Download Kinco HMIware User Manual

Safety Precautions
Read this manual and related manuals that mentioned in this manual carefully before you use the products, at the same time
operate the products under the premise of full safety attention. In order to use the products safely, we use the following icons
and graphic symbols to represent precautions, and there is some important safety content for the precautions icons, please be
sure to observe them.
Danger
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause personal injury or death.
Warning
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause personal injury.
Be Care
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause slightly personal injury
Notice
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause undesirable result or state.
Forbidden
Some instructions, processes and remove operations are forbidden to ensure correct use of product
Put away this manual after reading, so that you can read it anytime.
Note when using the product:

The following places should be avoided when using MT series HMI:

The place that the temperature and humidity exceeds the range of the specifications

The place with high humidity that may cause condensed water

The place that the temperature changes acutely

The place that is shined by ultraviolet ray

The place with heavy dust

The place that is polluted by chemicals

The place that is polluted by oily substance

The place with heavy shock and vibration

The place that is exposed to sunshine and wind directly.

The communication cables that connect HMI and PLC should be kept far from equipments that may generate
interference, like VFD, motor at the same time. At the same time do not put the control cable, power cable and
high line in the same wireway or nearby, or the interference may causes the malfunction of the equipment.

Please ensure the security of the system before you power on the HMI.

The proper configuration program is must when you want to use HMI to control PLC.

Please install the USB driver before you use USB cable to download user data

Please use finger or professional touch pen to operate the HMI

The input operation may fail if the HMI is touched rapidly and continuously. Please input the content after the
previous operation is input successfully.

If the backlight is off or the HMI has no display, do not touch it by mistake. Please confirm the safety of the
system and then operate it.

If the dip switches are changed, the operation takes effects after the restart button is pressed or the HMI is
powered off and on.

When you change the 3V battery in HMI, please choose the right model and install it correctly.
Copyright©2008 Kinco Automation Ltd. All Rights Reserved
Kinco Automation Ltd.
2
Preface
Thank you for choosing Kinco MT series HMI.
Before you use the MT series products, please read this manual carefully and understand it fully to ensure the personal and
equipment safety.
About this manual
This manual is for the usage and design way of Kinco HMIware configuration software (“Kinco HMIware” for short). You
can download it at our official English web site: http://www.kinco.cn/en/
!
The content in this manual may not be updated in time because of the improvement of products or other reasons.
We advice customer to pay attention to the information at our web site in order to ensure the right timely
information of product specifications and accessories
When you use this manual, some rated manuals and supporting details maybe involved. They are:

Communication Connection Help
This manual provides some information of rated communication setting, supported registers and communication cables when
the MT series HMI communicate with the PLC that it supports.

Product documents
Like catalog, products parameter list, order explanation, installation explanation manual, warranty and so on.

Examples
Some demo programs at our site.
 Range of Application
This manual provides guides to Kinco HMIware, so that you can develop the project in HMI.
 Target Population
This manual is for the people, commissioning engineers, technical support and Maintenance engineers who use Kinco MT
series HMI and has basic knowledge in automation area. If necessary, they should have the ability to program with C
language.
 How to use this manual
This manual introduce the process, components, configuration methods, operation details and using skills from easy to
difficult and step by step. It has three parts: introductory part, junior part and senior part. The new starter can start form
introductory part, the one who has experience with Kinco HMIware just need to run over the introductory part, the engineer
with rich experience in Kinco HMIware can start from the third part directly.
 The icons and terms in this manual
1

Safety icons and terms
Danger
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause personal injury or death.
Warning
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause personal injury.
Be Care
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause slightly personal injury
Notice
If rated precautions are not taken, it may cause undesirable result
Forbidden
Some instructions, processes and remove operations are forbidden to ensure correct use of product

General information of icons and items
!
Provide tips or added information for using product correctly

Link to the rated information of other manuals
※
The items with explanation and footnotes。

☞

Content for tips
Link to the rated information of this manual
Items

The following are the items in this manual:
Items used in this manual
Meaning
Kinco HMIware
The software for Kinco MT series HMI: Kinco HMIware configuration software
HMI
Kinco MT series HMI
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PC
Personal Computer
External Storage Device
The U disk or SD card that Kinco MT series HMI supports.
2
The following items are different from the official trade mark or name
Items used in this manual
Official trade mark or name
Windows 98
Microsoft® Windows® 98 Operation System
Windows Me
Microsoft® Windows® Me Operation System
Windows 2000
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Operation System
Windows XP
Microsoft® Windows® XP Operation System
Windows Vista
Microsoft® Windows® Vista Operation System
Windows 7
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Operation System
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Operation System
The following items describe the operation of mouse:
Item
Operation Step
Click
Do not move the mouse; press the left button, then release.
Right Click
Do not move the mouse; press the right button, then release.
Double Click
Drag
Move
Input
Operation
Do not move the mouse; press the left button two times quickly, this operation
only takes effect on left button.
Hold pressing the left button and move the mouse, release the left button at the
target position.
Move the mouse to the target position and stop.
Press the left button in the input box, then release. When there is a cursor in the
input box, input the content.
Click, double click or right click the blank
3
Picture
 Precautions when using the software
Install the proper Kinco HMIware according to the language of the OS, if you install the Chinese version in English OS,
some function may be abnormal, because there is no Chinese character library in English OS.

Kinco HMIware is backward compatible, but not the reverse. That is to say, the project that compiled by the higher
version software cannot be opened and compiled by lower version, but the project that compiled by lower version
software can be opened and compiled by higher version.

The *.pkg file that compiled by the version that earlier than EV5000 V1.3.0 cannot be decompiled

Please remember the password if you use the project password, upload password and decompilation password, we
cannot provide the reset the password service or any universal password.

The display difference between the Kinco HMIware and HMI:
(1) When you configure the project, there are some grids as the aligning reference in Kinco HMIware configuration area,
there is no grids in HMI screen.
(2) The following size difference maybe happen when using dial scale and dial axis.
(3) If the graphic uses the gradient color as fill color, the following display difference maybe happen.
 Product Support

Online support
If you have any question when using the product, you can contact our overseas technical engineers; they can support you
online or by email.
4
 Technical Training
If you have any question about the product described in this manual, you can contact our company directly or local
distributors. About the technical training, please pay attention to the information at our site or consult the sales manager.
 Contact us
Kinco Automation Ltd
Email: [email protected]
5
Index
Part1 Basic Part
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 About Kinco HMIware ............................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Features List of Kinco HMIware ................................................................................................................................ 1
2 Starting ................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1 How to use Kinco HMIware..................................................................................................................................... 13
2.2 How to get Kinco HMIware software....................................................................................................................... 13
2.3 Kinco HMIware Installation and Operating Environment Requirement................................................................... 13
2.4 Install/Uninstall ........................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.4.1 Install Kinco HMIware................................................................................................................................. 13
2.4.2 Uninstall Kinco HMIware ............................................................................................................................ 14
2.5 Start/Quit .................................................................................................................................................................. 14
2.5.1 Start Kinco HMIware ................................................................................................................................... 14
2.5.2 Quit Kinco HMIware.................................................................................................................................... 15
2.6 System Language Change ........................................................................................................................................ 15
2.7 F1 Help..................................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.8 Upgrade/Update........................................................................................................................................................ 16
2.9 Software Compatibility............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.10 Install USB Driver.................................................................................................................................................. 17
2.11 Software Application Program Introduction ........................................................................................................... 19
3 Make Project......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Project Requirement ................................................................................................................................................. 21
3.2 System Analysis ....................................................................................................................................................... 22
3.3 Make Project............................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.3.1 Create Project ............................................................................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Device Selection, Connection and Parameters Setting ................................................................................. 25
3.3.3 Edit Frame.................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.3.4 Save Project.................................................................................................................................................. 46
3.3.5 Project Simulation ........................................................................................................................................ 46
3.3.6 Download Project......................................................................................................................................... 47
3.4 Project Folder Introductions ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Part2 Advanced Part
1 User Interface ....................................................................................................................................................................... 51
1.1 Interface Layout ....................................................................................................................................................... 51
1.2 Menu ........................................................................................................................................................................ 51
1.2.1 File Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
1.2.2 Edit Menu..................................................................................................................................................... 52
1.2.3 View Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 52
1
1.2.4 Screen Menu................................................................................................................................................. 52
1.2.5 Draw Menu................................................................................................................................................... 53
1.2.6 Components Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 53
1.2.7 Tools Menu................................................................................................................................................... 53
1.2.8 Option Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 53
1.2.9 Window Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 53
1.2.10 Help Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 53
1.3 Toolbar...................................................................................................................................................................... 54
1.3.1 Basic Toolbar................................................................................................................................................ 54
1.3.2 Draw Toolbar................................................................................................................................................ 54
1.3.3 Page Switch Toolbar..................................................................................................................................... 54
1.3.4 Position Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 54
1.3.5 Line Width Toolbar....................................................................................................................................... 55
1.3.6 Line Style Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................ 55
1.3.7 System Toolbar............................................................................................................................................. 55
1.3.8 Database Toolbar.......................................................................................................................................... 55
1.3.9 Code Edit Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................ 55
1.3.10 Fill Effect Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................... 55
1.3.11 Label Position Toolbar................................................................................................................................ 56
1.3.12 State Switch Toolbar................................................................................................................................... 56
1.3.13 Font Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................... 56
1.3.14 Status Bar ................................................................................................................................................... 56
1.3.15 Tip Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 56
1.3.16 Toolbar Options.......................................................................................................................................... 56
1.4 Software window...................................................................................................................................................... 56
1.4.1 Graph Element Window ............................................................................................................................... 57
1.4.2 Project Files Window ................................................................................................................................... 58
1.4.3 Project Sstructure Window ........................................................................................................................... 58
1.4.4 Message Window ......................................................................................................................................... 59
1.4.5 Component List Window.............................................................................................................................. 60
1.5 Configuration Edit Area............................................................................................................................................ 61
1.5.1 Construct Window........................................................................................................................................ 61
1.5.2 HMI Edit Window ........................................................................................................................................ 62
1.5.3 Graphic Edit Window................................................................................................................................... 62
1.5.4 Macro Edit Window ..................................................................................................................................... 63
1.5.5 Edit Initial Window ...................................................................................................................................... 63
2 Basic Design Method............................................................................................................................................................ 64
2.1 Window screen ......................................................................................................................................................... 64
2.1.1 Specification of window screen.................................................................................................................... 64
2.1.2 Window Display Methods ............................................................................................................................ 64
2.1.3 Display Position ........................................................................................................................................... 67
2.1.4 Display Order ............................................................................................................................................... 67
2.1.5 Copy/Delete Windows.................................................................................................................................. 68
2.2 Draw......................................................................................................................................................................... 69
2
2.2.1 Image Format ............................................................................................................................................... 69
2.2.2 Vector ........................................................................................................................................................... 69
2.2.3 Geometric Figures Attribution...................................................................................................................... 72
2.2.4 About Fountain Fill ...................................................................................................................................... 73
2.2.5 Bitmap.......................................................................................................................................................... 74
2.2.6 About Transparent Color .............................................................................................................................. 74
2.3 Text........................................................................................................................................................................... 75
2.3.1 Font Type...................................................................................................................................................... 76
2.3.2 Dot Matrix Font............................................................................................................................................ 76
2.3.3 Vector Font ................................................................................................................................................... 76
2.3.4 Graph Font ................................................................................................................................................... 77
2.3.5 Text Attribute Edition ................................................................................................................................... 78
2.3.6 Notes for Using Vector Font......................................................................................................................... 78
2.4 Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
2.4.1 Keyboard Type ............................................................................................................................................. 79
2.4.2 NUM Keyboard............................................................................................................................................ 81
2.4.3 ASCII Keyboard........................................................................................................................................... 83
2.4.4 HEX Keyboard............................................................................................................................................. 83
2.4.5 Create your Own Mumber Keyboard ........................................................................................................... 84
2.4.6 Create your Oown Unicode Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 86
2.4.7 Call Keyboard in the Group Component Library ......................................................................................... 87
2.5 Code Type................................................................................................................................................................. 88
2.5.1 BIN............................................................................................................................................................... 88
2.5.2 BCD ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
2.5.3 LSB .............................................................................................................................................................. 89
2.6 Language Switching ................................................................................................................................................. 89
2.7 RTC Set .................................................................................................................................................................... 91
2.7.1 Through Special Registers............................................................................................................................ 92
2.7.2 Calibrate System Time in System Setup Screen ........................................................................................... 93
2.7.3 System Time and PLC Time Synchronization.............................................................................................. 93
2.8 LOGO Screen（Logo）........................................................................................................................................... 96
2.8.1 LOGO Screen Specification ......................................................................................................................... 96
2.8.2 Init Screen Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 96
2.8.3 Note for Using Init Screen............................................................................................................................ 98
2.9 Exchange Serial........................................................................................................................................................ 98
2.10 Replace Devices ..................................................................................................................................................... 99
2.10.1 Replace HMI ............................................................................................................................................ 100
2.10.2 Replace PLC............................................................................................................................................. 101
2.11 Index Function...................................................................................................................................................... 102
2.11.1 Index Register........................................................................................................................................... 102
2.11.2 Index Station Num.................................................................................................................................... 103
2.12 Buzzer................................................................................................................................................................... 105
2.12.1 Touch Beep............................................................................................................................................... 105
2.12.2 Alarm Beep............................................................................................................................................... 106
3
2.13 Screen Saver ......................................................................................................................................................... 107
2.14 Password Setting .................................................................................................................................................. 108
2.14.1 Project Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 108
2.14.2 Screen Protection...................................................................................................................................... 108
2.14.3 Component Protection.............................................................................................................................. 109
2.15 Data Encryption.................................................................................................................................................... 110
2.16 Animation Effects................................................................................................................................................. 112
2.17 Multi-Copy ........................................................................................................................................................... 115
2.18 Group.................................................................................................................................................................... 116
2.19 Find /Replace........................................................................................................................................................ 119
3 Window .............................................................................................................................................................................. 121
3.1 Window Types ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
3.2 System Default Window......................................................................................................................................... 123
3.3 Edit Window........................................................................................................................................................... 124
3.3.1 Window Add............................................................................................................................................... 124
3.3.2 Window Opening........................................................................................................................................ 125
3.3.3 Window Copy/ Multi-Windows Copy ........................................................................................................ 126
3.3.4 Window Deletion/ Multi-Windows Deletion.............................................................................................. 127
3.4 Window Attribute ................................................................................................................................................... 128
3.4.1 Open Window Attribute Box ...................................................................................................................... 128
3.4.2 Window Attribute Descriptions .................................................................................................................. 129
3.5 Components Related to Window ............................................................................................................................ 132
4 Component ......................................................................................................................................................................... 133
4.1 Common Setting of Component ............................................................................................................................. 133
4.1.1 Create and Delete Component.................................................................................................................... 133
4.1.2 Execution Order of Components ................................................................................................................ 134
4.1.3 Methods to Open Attributes Window ......................................................................................................... 135
4.1.4 Basic Setting............................................................................................................................................... 136
4.1.5 Tag Setting.................................................................................................................................................. 138
4.1.6 Graphics Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 139
4.1.7 Control Setting Option ............................................................................................................................... 140
4.1.8 Display Setting ........................................................................................................................................... 143
4.1.9 Touch Sound Control.................................................................................................................................. 145
4.1.10 Save Historical Data................................................................................................................................. 145
4.2 Button/Switch Components.................................................................................................................................... 147
4.2.1 Bit State Setting.......................................................................................................................................... 147
4.2.2 Bit State Switch.......................................................................................................................................... 150
4.2.3 Multiple State Setting................................................................................................................................. 152
4.2.4 Multiple State Switch ................................................................................................................................. 155
4.2.5 Combination Operations............................................................................................................................. 157
4.2.6 Function Key.............................................................................................................................................. 158
4.3 Lamp Component ................................................................................................................................................... 164
4.3.1 Bit State Lamp............................................................................................................................................ 164
4.3.2 Multiple State Display................................................................................................................................ 166
4
4.4 Number Components.............................................................................................................................................. 167
4.4.1 Number Input ............................................................................................................................................. 169
4.4.2 Number Display ......................................................................................................................................... 170
4.5 Text Components.................................................................................................................................................... 170
4.5.1 Text Iput ..................................................................................................................................................... 174
4.5.2 Text Display ............................................................................................................................................... 174
4.5.3 Note Book .................................................................................................................................................. 175
4.6 Graph/Meter Components ...................................................................................................................................... 175
4.6.1 Trend Curve................................................................................................................................................ 178
4.6.2 XY Plot....................................................................................................................................................... 190
4.6.3 Oscillograph ............................................................................................................................................... 194
4.6.4 Meter .......................................................................................................................................................... 196
4.6.5 Bar Picture.................................................................................................................................................. 198
4.7 Alarm Component .................................................................................................................................................. 201
4.7.1 Event Display ............................................................................................................................................. 203
4.7.2 Historical Event Display ............................................................................................................................ 207
4.7.3 Event Bar.................................................................................................................................................... 208
4.7.4 Alarm Display ............................................................................................................................................ 210
4.7.5 Alarm Bar ................................................................................................................................................... 210
4.8 Window Component ............................................................................................................................................... 211
4.8.1 Direct Window ........................................................................................................................................... 211
4.8.2 Indirect Window......................................................................................................................................... 213
4.9 Graphic Components .............................................................................................................................................. 214
4.9.1 Vector Graph .............................................................................................................................................. 214
4.9.2 Bitmap........................................................................................................................................................ 214
4.9.3 Free Plotting ............................................................................................................................................... 214
4.9.4 Dynamic Graph .......................................................................................................................................... 215
4.9.5 GIF ............................................................................................................................................................. 215
4.10 Video Input Component........................................................................................................................................ 216
4.10.1 Video ........................................................................................................................................................ 216
4.10.2 Camera ..................................................................................................................................................... 218
4.11 Multiple State Neon Lamp.................................................................................................................................... 219
4.11.1 Bit State Neon Lamp ................................................................................................................................ 219
4.11.2 Bit State Neon Lamp ................................................................................................................................ 220
4.12 Animation Components ........................................................................................................................................ 221
4.12.1 Animation................................................................................................................................................. 221
4.12.2 Moving Component.................................................................................................................................. 222
4.12.3 Pipeline..................................................................................................................................................... 226
4.13 Grid Components.................................................................................................................................................. 227
4.13.1 Grid .......................................................................................................................................................... 227
4.13.2 Historical Data Display ............................................................................................................................ 228
4.13.3 User Info Display ..................................................................................................................................... 233
4.13.4 Operation Log .......................................................................................................................................... 234
4.13.5 Data Report .............................................................................................................................................. 236
5
4.14 Data Transmission Component............................................................................................................................. 245
4.14.1 Recipe....................................................................................................................................................... 245
4.14.2 Data Transmission .................................................................................................................................... 246
4.15 Project Database ................................................................................................................................................... 248
4.15.1 Text Library.............................................................................................................................................. 249
4.15.2 Address Tag .............................................................................................................................................. 250
4.15.3 Event Information .................................................................................................................................... 251
4.15.4 Alarm Information.................................................................................................................................... 255
4.15.5 PLC Control ............................................................................................................................................. 257
4.15.6 Sound Lib ................................................................................................................................................. 264
4.15.7 Data Logger.............................................................................................................................................. 265
4.15.8 Schedule List ............................................................................................................................................ 267
4.16 Auxiliary Component ........................................................................................................................................... 271
4.16.1 Scale ......................................................................................................................................................... 271
4.16.2 Timer ........................................................................................................................................................ 272
4.16.3 Scroll Bar ................................................................................................................................................. 275
4.16.4 Date/Time................................................................................................................................................. 276
4.16.5 Note Pad................................................................................................................................................... 276
4.16.6 File List .................................................................................................................................................... 277
4.16.7 Trigger Touch ........................................................................................................................................... 277
5 Better Understanding of Library......................................................................................................................................... 279
5.1 Text Library ............................................................................................................................................................ 279
5.1.1 Create a Text Library.................................................................................................................................. 279
5.1.2 Export/Import Text Library ........................................................................................................................ 281
5.1.3 Set the Language of Text Library ............................................................................................................... 281
5.1.4 Text Library Application ............................................................................................................................ 282
5.2 Address Tag Library ............................................................................................................................................... 284
5.2.1 Build a Address tag Library........................................................................................................................ 284
5.2.2 Address Tag Application............................................................................................................................. 284
5.3 Graphic Library ...................................................................................................................................................... 285
5.3.1 Import Graphics.......................................................................................................................................... 285
5.3.2 Build New Graphics ................................................................................................................................... 289
5.3.3 Edit Graphics.............................................................................................................................................. 298
5.3.4 How to Use the Graphics............................................................................................................................ 301
5.4 Sound Lib Application............................................................................................................................................ 303
5.4.1 Import Audio File ....................................................................................................................................... 303
5.4.2 How to Use Audio File............................................................................................................................... 305
6 System Parameters.............................................................................................................................................................. 307
6.1 HMI Attributes ....................................................................................................................................................... 307
6.1.1 HMI............................................................................................................................................................ 307
6.1.2 Task Bar ..................................................................................................................................................... 308
6.1.3 HMI Extended Attributes ........................................................................................................................... 310
6.1.4 HMI System Information Text ................................................................................................................... 313
6.1.5 Security Levels Setting............................................................................................................................... 314
6
6.1.6 User Permissions Setting............................................................................................................................ 314
6.1.7 Historical Events Storage ........................................................................................................................... 315
6.1.8 Print Setting................................................................................................................................................ 316
6.1.9 Serial Port Setting....................................................................................................................................... 317
6.1.10 Extended Memory .................................................................................................................................... 319
6.2 PLC Attribute ......................................................................................................................................................... 319
7 Compile/Simulate/Download/Upload................................................................................................................................. 321
7.1 Compilation............................................................................................................................................................ 321
7.1.1 Methods of Compilation............................................................................................................................. 321
7.2 Simulation .............................................................................................................................................................. 321
7.2.1 Modes of Simulation .................................................................................................................................. 321
7.2.2 Exit Simulation........................................................................................................................................... 322
7.3 Download ............................................................................................................................................................... 322
7.3.1 Download Method Selection ...................................................................................................................... 322
7.3.2 Download via U disk or SD card................................................................................................................ 324
7.3.3 Download Selection ................................................................................................................................... 324
7.4 Upload/ Download/Compile Project via KHManager ............................................................................................ 328
8 KHManager ........................................................................................................................................................................ 329
8.1 Introduction to KHManager ................................................................................................................................... 329
8.2 Methods of Open KHManager ............................................................................................................................... 330
8.3 Download ............................................................................................................................................................... 330
8.4 Upload .................................................................................................................................................................... 331
8.5 System Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 331
8.6 Get Version ............................................................................................................................................................. 331
8.7 Decompile Operation.............................................................................................................................................. 331
8.8 Data Decryption ..................................................................................................................................................... 332
9 Macro.................................................................................................................................................................................. 333
9.1 Macro Editing Environment ................................................................................................................................... 333
9.2 Macro Edit.............................................................................................................................................................. 333
9.2.1 Build Macro ............................................................................................................................................... 333
9.2.2 Delete Macro.............................................................................................................................................. 334
9.2.3 Rename Macro ........................................................................................................................................... 334
9.2.4 Program Macro........................................................................................................................................... 335
9.2.5 Execute Macro............................................................................................................................................ 338
9.3 Macro Application .................................................................................................................................................. 338
9.4 Local Variable Function.......................................................................................................................................... 340
9.5 Array Application ................................................................................................................................................... 341
9.6 Some Notes on the Macro ...................................................................................................................................... 344
10 Password........................................................................................................................................................................... 345
10.1 Project Protection ................................................................................................................................................. 346
10.1.1 Project Password Protection ..................................................................................................................... 346
10.1.2 Upload Password Protection and Prohibit Uploading............................................................................... 346
10.1.3 Decompilation Password Protection and Prohibit Decompiling............................................................... 348
10.1.4 Download Password Protection................................................................................................................ 349
7
10.2 Window Protection ............................................................................................................................................... 350
10.2.1 Window Password Setting........................................................................................................................ 350
10.2.2 Security Level Setting of Window............................................................................................................ 351
10.2.3 System reserved registers related to security level ................................................................................... 352
10.2.4 Security level password input window ..................................................................................................... 352
10.2.5 Modifying Password Online..................................................................................................................... 353
10.2.6 Application of Passwords Required for Switching Windows ................................................................... 354
10.3 Component Protection .......................................................................................................................................... 355
10.3.1 Security Level Protection for Components............................................................................................... 355
10.3.2 User Permission Protection for Components............................................................................................ 355
10.3.3 System Reserved Registers Related to User Permissions ......................................................................... 356
10.3.4 System Reserved Registers Related to Add/Delete Users and User Permissions Online.......................... 356
10.3.5 Window for User Permission Password Input .......................................................................................... 357
10.3.6 Application of Security Level Protection for Components ....................................................................... 358
10.3.7 Application of User Permission Protection for Component...................................................................... 359
11 Recipe/ RecipeEditor ........................................................................................................................................................ 367
11.1 Register Related to the Recipe.............................................................................................................................. 367
11.2 Method for Checking the Recipe Size .................................................................................................................. 368
11.2.1 Method for Checking the RW Size ........................................................................................................... 368
11.2.2 Calculation for Recipe Address Range ..................................................................................................... 369
11.3 Usage of Recipe.................................................................................................................................................... 370
11.3.1 Absolute Address ...................................................................................................................................... 370
11.3.2 Index Address ........................................................................................................................................... 370
11.3.3 Application of Recipe ............................................................................................................................... 371
11.4 RecipeEditor ......................................................................................................................................................... 373
11.4.1 Recipe Editor Start-up .............................................................................................................................. 374
11.4.2 Recipe Editor User interface..................................................................................................................... 375
11.4.3 Usage of RecipeEditor.............................................................................................................................. 377
11.5 Recipe Uploading/ Downloading/ Clearing .......................................................................................................... 384
12 KHMonitor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 385
12.1 Descriptions of KHMonitor.................................................................................................................................. 385
12.2 Start KHMonitor................................................................................................................................................... 385
12.3 KHMonitor Interface ............................................................................................................................................ 385
12.4 How to Use KHMonitor ....................................................................................................................................... 386
13 Print .................................................................................................................................................................................. 389
13.1 Type of Printer supports local printing ................................................................................................................. 389
13.2 Printing-related Components ................................................................................................................................ 390
13.3 Pictbridge Print..................................................................................................................................................... 392
13.4 Print Function Setting Method.............................................................................................................................. 394
13.4.1 Local Print: HMI serial is connected directly to the Printer ..................................................................... 394
13.4.2 Local Print: HMI USB Slave is connected directly to the Printer ............................................................ 395
13.4.3 Network Print (remote print): Through Network Printer to Print HMI Screen......................................... 396
13.4 Print Page Application Skills ................................................................................................................................ 401
13.5 Print Error............................................................................................................................................................. 402
8
14 HMI Communication........................................................................................................................................................ 403
14.1 Serial Communication .......................................................................................................................................... 403
14.1.1 HMI and PC Serial Communication......................................................................................................... 403
14.1.2 HMI and PLC /Controller Serial Communication .................................................................................... 403
14.1.3 Serial Communication Related Settings ................................................................................................... 410
14.2 Network Port Communication.............................................................................................................................. 410
14.2.1 HMI and PC Network Port Communication............................................................................................. 410
14.2.2 HMI and HMI Port Communication Network.......................................................................................... 411
14.2.3 HMI and PLC/Controller Network Port Communication......................................................................... 412
14.2.4 FTP Function............................................................................................................................................ 415
14.3 Field Bus Communication .................................................................................................................................... 418
14.3.1 CAN Communicate .................................................................................................................................. 418
14.3.2 DP Communicate ..................................................................................................................................... 419
14.4 MPI Communicate................................................................................................................................................ 424
14.5 MODBUS Protocol Applications（Master-slave mode）.................................................................................... 428
14.5.1 MODBUS Protocol Overview.................................................................................................................. 428
14.5.2 MODBUS Protocol Communication Format ........................................................................................... 430
14.5.3 MODBUS Protocol in the HMI Application ............................................................................................ 436
15 VNC.................................................................................................................................................................................. 442
15.1 Various client-sides............................................................................................................................................... 442
15.2 Access via LAN.................................................................................................................................................... 442
15.2.1 Remote control HMI by PC via LAN....................................................................................................... 442
15.2.2 Remote control HMI by mobile via LAN................................................................................................. 445
15.2.3 Remote control HMI by browser via LAN............................................................................................... 446
15.3 Access via WAN ................................................................................................................................................... 448
16 Register............................................................................................................................................................................. 452
16.1 Local Registers of HMI ........................................................................................................................................ 452
16.1.1 Bit Address ............................................................................................................................................... 452
16.1.2 Word Address ........................................................................................................................................... 452
16.2 System Special Registers of HMI......................................................................................................................... 453
16.2.1 Parameter Setting of Hardware................................................................................................................. 454
16.2.2 System Setting.......................................................................................................................................... 455
16.2.3 Components Setting ................................................................................................................................. 460
16.2.4 Security Leve l and User Permission........................................................................................................ 462
16.2.5 Data and Project Management.................................................................................................................. 463
16.2.6 Communication ........................................................................................................................................ 465
Part3 Hardware Part
1 Name and Specification...................................................................................................................................................... 470
1.1 Name of Each Part......................................................................................................................................... 470
1.2 Specifications of Each Part............................................................................................................................ 471
2 Connection with Preiferal Equipments ............................................................................................................................... 476
2.1 Connection via Serial Port............................................................................................................................. 476
2.2 Connection via USB Interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 478
9
2.3 Connection via LAN Interfaces..................................................................................................................... 479
3 System Setting Mode.......................................................................................................................................................... 481
3.1 Methods to Display System Setting Mode .................................................................................................... 481
3.2 System Setting............................................................................................................................................... 481
4 Touch Screen Calibrate Mode............................................................................................................................................. 483
4.1 Methods to Display Touch Screen Calibrate Mode ....................................................................................... 483
4.2 Touch Screen Calibrate Setting ..................................................................................................................... 483
5 Firmware Update Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 484
5.1 Methods to Display Firmware Update Mode ................................................................................................ 484
5.2 Firmware Update Setting............................................................................................................................... 484
6 Maintenance and Tending ................................................................................................................................................... 485
6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 485
6.2 Tending.......................................................................................................................................................... 485
Appendix 1 Regular PLC Used for HMI ............................................................................................................................... 487
Appendix 2 List of Error Information.................................................................................................................................... 491
Appendix 3 List of System Prompt Message......................................................................................................................... 496
10
Basic Part
1 Introduction
This chapter mainly introduces the features and functions of Kinco HMIware Configuration Software.
1.1 About Kinco HMIware
Kinco HMIware Configuration Software（Hereinafter referred to as “Kinco HMIware”）is a human-machine interface(HMI)
configuration software developed by Kinco Electric (Shanghai) Ltd. （Hereinafter referred to as “Kinco”）,it is special for
MT4000/5000 series HMI. Kinco HMIware provides a powerful integrated development environment for users. Products
are widely applied in various kinds of fields such as medical, chemical industry, electric power, printing, textile, food,
national defense and engineering machinery, intelligent household, high speed railway and so on.
1.2 Features List of Kinco HMIware

Edit operation functions
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Batch to modify font
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 2.3.5 Text
properties
Attribute Edition】
☞Details
Batch to modify graph
【
properties
please
Advanced
refer
Part
to
2.2.3
Geometric Figures Attribution】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 3.3.3 Window
Batch to copy windows
Copy /Multi-Windows Copy】
☞Details
Crossing
projects
to
【
copy components
please
Advanced
refer
Part
to
2.1.5
Copy/Delete windows】
☞Details
Batch to set components
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 1.2.2 Edit
alignment
Menu】
1
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Details
Batch to set components
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 1.2.2 Edit
same size
Menu】
☞Details
Batch to set components
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 1.2.2 Edit
same space
Menu】
☞Details
Overlay windows
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.1.2 Windows
Display Methods】
☞Details
Group components
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.18 Group】
☞Details
Multi-copy components
【
please
Advanced
refer
Part
to
2.17
Multi-copy】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.9 Exchange
Exchange serial ports
Serial】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.10 Replace
Devices】
Exchange devices

Functions of Components
Switch and lamp
Functions
Diagrams
2
Notes
Basic Part Introduction
Lamps for displaying
OFF
ON
states of device’s
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.3 Lamp
address
Component】
Switches for changing
☞Details
states of device’s
【
address
please
Advanced
refer
Part
to
4.2
Button/Switch Component】
Switches for changing
☞Details
the value of device’s
【
address
Button/Switch Component】
please
Advanced
refer
Part
to
4.2
Number/Text input and display
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Number input
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.4.1 Number
Input】
☞Details
Number display
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.4.2 Number
Display】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.5.1 Text
Text input
Text display
Input】
☞Details
D100 4 D 4 8
M
H
D101 2 0 4 9
Space
I
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.5.2 Text
HMI
Display】
☞Details
System time display
【
Advanced
Date/Time】
3
please
Part
refer
to
4.16.4
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Details
Text annotations
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.3 Text】
Data transmission
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Transmit data by timing
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.16.2 Timer】
☞Details
Transmit data by touch
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.14 Data
Transmission Component】
☞Details
Transmit data by trigger
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.14.2 Data
...
...
Transmission】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.14.1 Recipe
Data transmit by recipe
Data】
Meter and Graph
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Display data as meter
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.6.4 Meter】
D100=75
Display data as bar
please
100
☞Details
50
【 Advanced Part 4.6.5 Bar
graph
Picture】
0
4
please
refer
to
Basic Part Introduction
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend
Display data as trend
Curve】
curve
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend
Display data as dot
Curve】
graph.
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend
Display
data
as
Curve】
projection graph
☞Details
Zoom in
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend
Curve】
Zoom of trend curve
Normal
Zoom out
Alarm
Functions
System
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
alarm
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 6.1.4 HMI
information
System Information Text】
5
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
User-defined
system
☞Details
PLC No Response
PLC disconnect
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 6.1.4 HMI
alarm information
System Information Text】
Display
☞Details
user-defined
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm
alarm information when
Component】
alarm happen
Display
please
alarm
☞Details
please
refer
to
infromation in popup
window
when
【 Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm
alarm
Component】
happen
The buzzer will peal
！
2 2011/06/23 15:22:54
15
1 2011/06/23 14:01:00 14:44:20 14
0 2011/06/23 10:50:01 11:40:10 10
Beep...
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm
when alarm happen
Component】
☞Details
Obtain the alarm time
of
event
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 2.7.3 System
information
time
from external clock.
and
PLC
CPU
time
synchronization】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Query historical event
【Advanced Part 4.7.2 Historical
records by inputting
Event Display】
date or file number
☞Details
Import/Export
alarm/event
logon
please
to
【 Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm
information
Component】
Conditional control
Functions
refer
Diagrams
6
Notes
Basic Part Introduction
☞Details
please
refer
to
Components are limited
【Advanced Part 4.1.7 Control
by user security level.
Setting Option】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.7 Control
Setting Option】
Components are limited
by user permission.
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.7 Control
Components are limited
by
the
status
Setting Option】
of
registers.
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.7 Control
Notification operation
Setting Option】
Conditional Display
Functions
Display
according
Diagrams
☞Details
components
to
Notes
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.8 Display
user
Setting】
security level.
7
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.8 Display
Display
Setting】
components
according
to
user
permission.
☞Details
Display
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.1.8 Display
components
Setting】
according to the status
of registers.

Data Storage Function
Functions
Diagrams
Save historical event
Notes
☞Details
please
refer
to
information.
【
Advanced
Part
6.1.7
Historical Events Storage】
Save sampling data of
☞Details
SD
trend curve.
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.1.10 Save
SAVE
SRAM
Save operation records
Historical Data】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 6.1.3 HMI
Extended Attributes】
Save recipe data
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.14.1 Recipe】

Data Clear Function
8
Basic Part Introduction
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
please
refer
to
Clear historical event
【 Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm
records.
Component】
☞Details
Clear
historical
data
【
records of trend curve.
please
Advanced
8.3
please
refer
to
SRAM
Clear historical recipe

Part
to
Download】
☞Details
data.
refer
【
D100
150
D100
0
D101
125
D101
0
Advanced
Part
8.3
Download】
Window Changing Function
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Change
window
by
to
Key】
D0:0 10
window
refer
【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function
touch button.
Change
please
☞Details
Frame 0
Frame 10
by
PLC control.
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC
Control】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Popup other window in
【 Advanced Part 4.8 Window
current window.
Component】

Password Protection Function
Functions
Diagrams
9
Notes
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Details
please
refer
to
Password protection for
【 Advanced Part 10.1 Project
project.
Protection】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Password protection for
【 Advanced Part 10.1 Project
uploading project.
Protection】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Password protection for
【 Advanced Part 10.1 Project
decompiling project.
Protection】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Password protection for
【Advanced Part 10.2 Window
user security level.
Protection】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 10.3.2 User
Permission
Password protection for
Protection
for
Components】
user permission.
CSV file encryption

☞Details
CSV
file
CSV
file
Encrypt
Decrypt
please
to
【 Advanced Part 2.15 Data
Encryption】
External Input/ Output
Functions
refer
Diagrams
10
Notes
Basic Part Introduction
☞Details please refer to【HMI
Read data from barcode
and PLC connection guide 】
reader.
manual
Obtain
image
☞Details
from
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.10 Video
video.
Input Component】
Printout the screen
☞Details
image or data.
【Advanced Part 13 Print】
please
refer
to
Connect keyboard and
mouse.

Print Function
Functions
Diagrams
15:25:54 Abnormal T
14:01:00 Abnormal T
10:50:01 Abnormal T
Trigger printing event
information.
2 2011/06/23 15:22:54
15
1 2011/06/23 14:01:00 14:44:20 14
0 2011/06/23 10:50:01 11:40:10 10
Notes
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.15.3 Event
Information】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Touch button to print
【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function
screen image.
Key】
☞Details
Print trend curve real
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend
time.
Curve】
Frame 10
D0:0 10
☞Details
please
refer
to
Print screen image by
【 Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC
PLC control.
Control】
Frame 0

Upload/Download
Functions
Diagrams
11
Notes
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Details
please
refer
to
Download project from
【 Advanced Part 7 Compile
PC.
/Simulate/Download/Upload】
☞Details
please
refer
to
Upload project from
【 Advanced Part 7 Compile
HMI to PC.
/Simulate/Download/Upload】
☞Details
Download project from
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function
external memory.
Key】
Upload project from
☞Details
HMI
【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function
to
external
memory.

please
refer
to
Key】
Script Function
Macro
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Execute data operation
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 9 Macro】
or control the display
in HMI by macro.

Other Function
Functions
Diagrams
Notes
☞Details
Customize logo.
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 2.8 Logo
Screen (Logo)】
12
Basic Part Introduction
☞Details
please
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.6 Language
Change
Switching】
languages
online
☞Details
Clock setting
refer
to
【Advanced Part 2.7 RTC Set】
☞Details
Save
please
screen
please
refer
to
by
【 Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC
screenshot function
Control】
☞Details
Index
for
register
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 2.11 Index
address(Offset)
Function】
☞Details
please
refer
to
【 Advanced Part 2.11 Index
Index for PLC station
Function】
number.(Offset)
13
2 Starting
2.1 How to use Kinco HMIware
The procedure for using Kinco HMIware is shown in following figure.
2.2 How to get Kinco HMIware software
Users can download Kinco HMIware software from download center in Kinco’s website: http://www.kinco.cn/en/
2.3 Kinco HMIware Installation and Operating Environment Requirement
!
Note for using Windows Vista/Windows 7 OS:

When using Windows Vista/Windows 7 OS, don’t install Kinco HMIware in system disk(C:).

When using Windows Vista/Windows 7 OS, Kinco HMIware must run as administrator. Right click
the icon of Kinco HMIware.exe, and then select “Run as administrator” as following figure:
2.4 Install/Uninstall
There are two versions of Kinco HMIware (Chinese version and English version).
2.4.1 Install Kinco HMIware
The procedure of installation is as following：
Double click“Setup.exe”file to run the installation program.
Enter welcome window.
Select installation directory, the default directory is “D:\Program Files” and it will create “Kinco HMIware” folder
automatically. Click【Browse】to change the installation directory.
Confirm installation.
It will appear installation statues of Kinco HMIware, click【Install】to start installing software.
13
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Install successfully
If the software install successfully, then it will appear the information. Click【Finish】to finish installation.
After finishing installation, Kinco HMIware will create a complete startup directory in【Start】menu, and create the shortcut
of Kinco HMIware and EVManager in desktop of operation system.
In above installation process, the user can click【Cancel】to quit installation.
2.4.2 Uninstall Kinco HMIware
Please quit Kinco HMIware firstly before uninstalling.
Run uninstall.
Method 1:Uninstall from【Start】menu.
【Start】【All Programs】【Kinco】【Kinco HMIware】【Uninstall】
Method 2:Uninstall from【Control Panel】【Add/Del Programs】
Uninstall procedure
Select “Remove”, click【Next】to start uninstalling process.
Modify
Select new program features to add or select currently installed features to remove.
Repair
Reinstall all program features installed by previous setup.
Remove
Remove all installed features.

If there are some files or folders added in the install directory of Kinco HMIware, please delete these
contents by manual after uninstalling the software.
2.5 Start/Quit
2.5.1 Start Kinco HMIware
Method 1:Start in【Start】menu.
【Start】【All Programs】【Kinco】【Kinco HMIware_ENU】【Kinco HMIware】
Method 2：Double click the shortcut of Kinco HMIware in desktop to start software.

When it is first time to start Kinco HMIware, it will display window as following:

When it is not the first time to start Kinco HMIware, then it will open the last operated project automatically.
14
Basic Part Starting
2.5.2 Quit Kinco HMIware
After starting Kinco HMIware software, there are several ways to quit the software as follows:

Click the【Close】button on the upper right side of the window.

Click the icon of Kinco HMIware on the upper left of the window, then select “Close” in the control menu.

Click Kinco HMIware【File】menu, then select “Quit” in the pull-down menu.

Press【Alt】key and【F4】key on the keyboard at the same time.
2.6 System Language Change
Kinco HMIware supports switching multiple languages, user can switch the software language by the System Language of
Option(O) in the software menu bar. It supports Chinese, English, Korean and Russian switching at this moment.

Switch the Chinese version to English version

Switch the English version to Chinese version
15
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2.7 F1 Help
When user use the Kinco HMIware software, there are there methods to use the F1 help.

Press the F1 on the keyboard

Click the [Help] button on the component attribute

Click the [Help] menu
2.8 Upgrade/Update
Note
1. To ensure the product working properly, it is forbidden to update, modify, uninstall and reinstall before
the software is closed.
2. Before updating software, to ensure the product working properly, please uninstall the old version
software completely.
3. Please backup the project made by old version software before using the new version software to
update the project made by old version software.
The latest software or upgrade package can be downloaded from the download centre in Kinco’s website ：
http://www.kinco.cn/en
2.9 Software Compatibility
!
In Kinco HMIware, projects made by old version software can be opened by new version software, but
project made by new version software can’t be opened by old version software.
16
Basic Part Starting
2.10 Install USB Driver
!
USB driver must be installed by manual, can’t be installed automatically.
When it is first time to use Kinco HMIware, it need to install the USB driver for downloading HMI project.
Users can install USB driver by manual as following procedure:
Use USB cable to connect the USB SLAVE port of HMI to USB HOST port of PC, and connect the power supply of
HMI
correctly and power on, then it will popup dialog box of【Update Driver Software】,then click
“Browse my computer for
driver software”：
Following dialog box will display. Click【Browse】：
Set the route to the driver folder in the install directory of Kinco HMIware, then click【OK】：
17
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
After
finishing installation, it will popup the dialog box of “The best driver software for your device is already
installed”, then click【Close】to quit.
If PC doesn’t popup【Installing device driver software】automatically in the first step, but there is a balloon tips in the
toolbar as following figure：
Then open【Device Manager】【Universal Serial Bus Controllers】,there is a detection icon of unknown device. Right click
The icon and select “Update Driver Software” as following figure:
At this time, it will popup【Update Driver Software】automatically：
18
Basic Part Starting
Select “No,” and click【Next】，then continue the installation procedure of USB driver as above.
After finishing installation, there is a balloon tip of “Kinco HMI USB” on the toolbar as following figure:
After that, open【Device Manager】，the unknown device will change to “Kinco HMI USB” in【Universal Serial Bus
Controllers】.It means the USB driver installation is successful.
If the USB driver can’t be installed correctly, there is a balloon tips on the toolbar of operation system as following figure:
Then there is an icon of unknown device in【Device Manager】.For this problem, please select the right directory to reinstall
USB driver.
2.11 Software Application Program Introduction
Kinco HMIware software is integrated with Kinco HMIware.exe, EVManager, EVPLCAddressView, RecipeEditor.exe and
PDOManager and so on. Additionally, there are two manuals integrated in Kinco HMIware software. Users can find the
shortcuts of these functional units in【Start】【All Programs】【Kinco】【Kinco HMIware_ENU】.Their descriptions
are shown in following table:
Functional Unit
Descriptions
19
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Main software which is used to create, edit, compile, simulate and download
project.
User’s Manual
Guide manual about communication between Kinco HMI and supported control
devices.
Auxiliary software, it is used to upload, download, decompile, HMI firmware
update, obtain HMI system information an so on.
Auxiliary software, it is used to configure the CAN communication parameters.
Auxiliary software, it is used to create, view or edit recipe data file and external
memory data file.
Auxiliary software, it is used to monitor the HMI and PLC registers.
Uninstall software; it is used to uninstall Kinco HMIware software.
20
3 Make Project
This chapter takes PH value of neutralization pond control system for example to explain the process of making project by
Kinco HMIware.
3.1 Project Requirement
The project requires auto-control mode and manual control mode.

In full-automatic control mode, after pressing “Start” button, the system will detect the water level of first
neutralization pond automatically. When the liquid meter(LIT03) detect that the water level reaches preset height, then
it will enter automatic circulation process: close electric valve(AV01),open electric valve (AV02),and start air
blower(B01) and circulating pump(P01) to aerate and circulation stir. After stirring uniform, it will start acid metering
pump(P02) or alkali metering pump(P03).When the PH value detected by AIT01 satisfies effluent standard
（6≤PH≤9）,then stop P02 or P03,open AV01 and close AV02,then let off the qualified water to the second
neutralization pond. If the water level detected by LIT04 reaches the preset height, then it will detect the PH value of
AIT02 automatically. If it satisfies 6≤PH≤9, then close AV04 and open AV03.Let off the water until the water level
detected by LIT04 is lower than lower limit, then close AV03.If it doesn’t satisfy the requirement, then it will close
AV03 and open AV04 to continue processing.
When detecting the water level of the first neutralization pond lower than lower limit, then stop B01 and P01, herein
this process finish. When the water level of the first neutralization pond reach preset height, then continue to next
process.
21
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In the circulation process, LIT01 and LIT02 real time monitor the liquid level of acid storage jar and alkali storage jar.
If
it is lower than lower limit, then it will show alarm information.

In manual control mode, every process is controlled separately by manual according to the value of AIT01 and AIT02
instead of being triggered by the water level of neutralization pond.
3.2 System Analysis
According to project requirement, this control system can be consisting of upper computer, PLC and instrumentation.
PLC is mainly used to sample data (data of liquid meter and PH meter), control device (air blower, circulating pump, electric
valve).Here we use HMI as upper computer to communicate with PLC by RS-232C.
The configuration and parameters are shown in following table.

Upper computer system configuration:
Software
Kinco HMIware software
Hardware
One PC with Windows XP/Vista/7 operation system and Kinco HMIware software.
One MT series HMI（Herein we choose MT5320T）
One PLC（Herein we choose Kinco CPU306EX）
One DC24V power supply for HMI
One AC220V power supply for PLC
One specified USB download cable（Herein we choose USB port for downloading program）
One RS232C cross cable for communication between HMI and PLC.（Herein we choose RS232C
communication）

PLC address allocation
Device
Address
Device
Address
Start switch SW01
I 0.0
Liquid meter LIT01
AIW 4
Emergency stop switch
I 0.1
Liquid meter LIT02
AIW 6
Air blower B01
Q 0.0
Liquid meter LIT03
AIW 8
Circulating pump P01
Q 0.1
Liquid meter LIT04
AIW 10
Metering pump P02
Q 0.2
Electric valve AV01
Q 1.0
Metering pump P03
Q 0.3
Electric valve AV02
Q 1.1
PH meter AIT01
AIW 0
Electric valve AV03
Q 1.2
PH meter AIT02
AIW 2
Electric valve AV04
Q 1.3
Auxiliary relay AR01
M 0.0(Turn on when the liquid
Auxiliary relay AR05
M 0.4(Turn on when the liquid
SW02
Auxiliary relay AR02
level of LIT01 is lower than lower
level of LIT03 is lower than
limit)
lower limit)
M 0.1(Turn on when the liquid
22
Auxiliary relay AR06
M 0.5(Turn on when the liquid
Basic Part Make Project
Auxiliary relay AR03
Auxiliary relay AR04

level of LIT01 is higher than
level of LIT03 is higher than
upper limit)
upper limit)
M 0.2(Turn on when the liquid
Auxiliary relay AR07
M 0.6(Turn on when the liquid
level of LIT02 is lower than lower
level of LIT04 is lower than
limit)
lower limit)
M 0.3(Turn on when the liquid
Auxiliary relay AR08
M 0.7(Turn on when the liquid
level of LIT02 is higher than
level of LIT04 is higher than
upper limit)
upper limit)
HMI frame
Auto Control
a. Bar Graph
b. Bit State Lamp
c. Multiple State Display
d. Number Display
e. Date/Time
f. Event Bar
g. Bit State Switch
h. Text
i. Function Key
j. Timer
Manual Control
a. Bit State Switch
b. Text
c. Number Display
d. Event Bar
e. Date/Time
f. Function Key
Alarm Display
23
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
a. Event Display
b. Text
c. Bit State Switch
d. Date/Time
e. Event Bar
f. Function Key
3.3 Make Project
Following are the procedure for making project in Kinco HMIware.
3.3.1 Create Project
Start Kinco HMIware
☞Details please refer to【Basic Part 2.5.1 Start Kinco HMIware】
Create Project
Click the icon in toolbar to create project.
Input project name.（Herein the project name is set as “PH control system”）
Select path of saving project.（Herein we use the default path）
Click【OK】to finish creating project.
24
Basic Part Make Project
After creating project, it will popup grey grid working area. This area is named “Construct Window”.
3.3.2 Device Selection, Connection and Parameters Setting
Device selection——select communication method
Drag “Serial Port” in【Graph element window】—【Connector】to construct window.
Device selection——select HMI model
Drag “MT5320T”in【Graph element window】—【HMI】to construct window.
When you release the mouse after dragging HMI icon, it will popup【Display Mode】dialog box as following figure. There
are “Horizontal” and “Vertical” option in it.(Herein we select “Horizontal”), then click【OK】
25
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Device selection——select PLC mode（or communication protocol）
Drag “Kinco PLC Series” in【Graph element window】—【PLC】to construct window.
Device connection
Drag HMI icon to make “COM” port approach to the left side of connector(herein we choose COM0) until the connector
moving together with HMI. Then connect PLC and connector by the same way.
Parameters setting——HMI setting
Double click HMI，it will popup window of【HMI Attribute】
Click【Task Bar】option
Cancel the option of “Display Task Bar” in【Task Bar】（Herein we don’t need to use "Task Bar”）
Click【COM0 Setting】option and set the corresponding parameters of COM0 according to the communication
parameters of PLC. Others all set as default.
26
Basic Part Make Project
Parameters setting——slave station no. setting
Double click PLC，it will popup【PLC Attribute】window.
Set “Station No.” according to PLC’s actual station no. （Herein the PLC’s station no. is 1）
3.3.3 Edit Frame
Open HMI edit window
27
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Right click HMI icon
Click “Edit” in the popup menu as following figure.
It will open HMI edit window as following figure(It will open Frame0 by default)
Edit frame——Create new frame
28
Basic Part Make Project
System will create frame 0~9 automatically when creating HMI.
Therein, frame 1~9 are specified system windows. Only Frame0 can
be used freely by user. According to the system analysis, we need to
create two windows.
Procedure for adding frame:
Click【Screen】menu, select “Add Frame”.
System will popup【New Frame】window, therein “Frame Name” can be defined freely(Herein we use system default
name “Frame10”).Then click【OK】.And then create Frame11 by the same way.
After creating new frames, they will show in 【 Project structure
window】as shown in left figure.
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Change background color
The initial background color of windows is black（RGB：0,0,0）.User can change the background color according to actual
requirement（Herein we set the background color as light grey color (RGB：182,182,182)）
29
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Operation procedure is as following:
Double click background area, it will popup【Window Attribute】dialog box.
Click “Use Background Color”
Click “Fill Color”
Click “Custom Color”, it will popup【Select color】window
Choose the desired color or set RGB value in Red（R）,Green（G）and Blue（B）.
Finally click【OK】
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Edit frame title
30
Basic Part Make Project
Click
icon in toolbar, it will popup【Text Attribute】window
Type “Auto Control” in【Content】area.
Select【Vector Font】
Setting in “Font Attribute”：
Font
Times New Roman
Size
16
Alignment
Center
Color
Black
After finishing setting font attribute, then click【OK】
Then there is a red box in the edit window. Choose and put on a suitable place.
Create title of” Manual Control” and “Alarm Display” by the same way.
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Draw the operation flow chart of PH control system
Draw the operation flow chart of PH control system by using line, rectangle and polygon.
31
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Take the graph in red box in the figure above for example, the procedure of drawing is as follows:
Click
icon in “Draw Toolbar”.
~Move mouse to edit area, it will appear “+”.Then click 7 times on the related position.
Right click mouse to finish drawing polygon.
☞More drawing methods please refer to【Advanced Part 2.2 Draw】
Double click polygon to open the “Graphic Attribute” window.
Set graphic attribute of polygon as follows：
Line Color
Black
Line Width
2 pound
Background Fill Color
White
32
Basic Part Make Project
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Draw graph of metering pump
If there is no desired graph in the system image library, then user can create a new graph.
 New Graphics
Click the icon
in Database Toolbar, it will popup【New Graphics】window
Set the attribute as following figure
Click【OK】to enter edit window of vector graph
 Draw graph
Select state0 in the edit window of vector graph，click icon
in the Draw Toolbar
~Move the mouse to the black edit area below, it will appear “+”.Then press left mouse button and drag to
lower right side. Then release at the proper position to finish drawing a circle.
33
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Select state1 and draw a graph by the same way as drawing state0.
☞More details about new graph please refer to【Advanced Part 5.3 Graphic Library】
 Set graphics attribute
Double click the graph to open【Graphics Attribute】window，then set the attribute of state0 and state1.
state0 Graphics Attribute
state1 Graphics Attribute
Line Color
Black
Line Color
Black
Line Width
2 Pound
Line Width
2 Pound
Background Fill Color
White
Background Fill Color
Red
 Save graph
After finishing drawing graph of metering pump, click icon in Basic Toolbar to save file pump.vg
Click the icon on the upper right of graph edit window to quit the window.
34
Basic Part Make Project
Create a new graph and draw graph of electric valve named
valve.vg as shown in left figure.
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Bit State Lamp components (metering pump, circulating pump and electric
valve)
Add 7 “Bit State Lamp” components for state indication of metering pump, circulating pump and electric valve. The
procedure is as follows:
Select “Bit State Lamp” from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】,then press left mouse button and drag to HMI
edit area.
Release mouse and it will popup attribute box of【Bit State Lamp】
35
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Set the components attribute as follows：
Circulating pump P01/Metering pump P02/ Metering pump P03
Q0.2
Electric valve AV01/AV02/AV03/AV04
Read
Q0.3
Q1.0
Q1.1
Q1.2
Read Address
Q0.1
Function
Normal
Address
Tag
Use；0：M；1：M
Function
Normal
Font Type
Vector Font
Tag
Not use
Font Attribute
Arial，11，Black，Bold
Graph
Vector Graph：valve.vg
Graph
Vector Graph：pump.vg
Q1.3
After finishing setting the components, the screen will show as following figure:
Finally add text in the screen. The procedure of adding text is the same as【Edit frame title】，show as following:
36
Basic Part Make Project
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Bit State Switch components（Start, emergency stop）
Add two “Bit State Switch” as “Start” and “Emergency stop” button as shown in following figure:
Add two “Bit State Switch” and set the attribute
as follows：Start/Emergency stop
Read/Write
I0.0
I0.1
Address
Switch Type
Reset
Tag
Use ； 0 ： Start/Emergency
stop；1：Start/Emergency stop
Graph
Vector Graph；
Button3-15.vg*
Button3-12.vg*
*Button3-12.vg/Button3-15.vg are imported from
【System Image Library】—【VG】—【Button】
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Function Key components
Add two “Function Key” from【Graph element window】—【Function Parts】,which are used to change window to
“Alarm Display” and “Manual Control”.
37
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Set the attributes as follows:
Manual Control
Alarm
Function Key
Change window[Frame10]
Function Key
Change window[Frame11]
Tag
Use；0：Manual Control；1：
Tag
Use；0：Alarm；1：Alarm
Manual Control
Graph
Vector Graph：CONFIRM.vg
Graph
Vector Graph：CONFIRM.vg
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Event Information Logon
38
Basic Part Make Project
1
3
2
4
Click icon in Database Toolbar to open【Event log object list】window
Click【Add】button, it will popup【Event】window
Add one event information logon as follows：
Address
M0.0
Event Trigging
On
Text
The liquid level of alkali storage jar is below lower limit！
Click【OK】button to close【Event】window and finish the first event information logon.
By the same way, add second event information logon.
Address
M0.2
Event Trigging
On
Text
The liquid level of acid storage jar is below lower limit！
Then click【OK】button to close【Event log object list】
39
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add information bar
Information bar include current system time and current alarm display.
Firstly add a rectangle graph and two line as background of information bar as following figure:
Set the attributes as follows：
Rectangle
Line
Line Color
White
Background Fill Color
Black
Line Color
White
☞More drawing methods please refer to【Advanced Part 2.2 Draw】
Add “Date/Time” from【Graph element window】—【Function Parts】for displaying current system time.
40
Basic Part Make Project
Set the attributes as follows：
Date
Display：YYYY.MM.DD
Time
Display：HH:MM:SS
Font Type
Vector Font
Font Attribute
Arial，8，White
Graph
No use
Finally add a text of “Time” as shown in left
figure:
Add “Event Bar” from【Graph element window】—【Function Parts】for rolling displaying alarm information
Set the attributes as follows:
Format
Event Trig Time
Standard Time Format
Extended Date Format
Event Trig Date
Finally add a text of “Alarm” as shown in left
figure:
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Number Display component
Add 4 “Number Display” from 【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for display the liquid level of alkali(acid)
storage jar and the PH value of first(second) neutralization pond.
Set the attributes as follows：
41
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
PH meter AIT01/AIT02
Read Address
AIW 0
Data Type
Liquid meter LIT01/LIT02
AIW 5
Read Address
AIW 4
AIW 6
Unsigned int
Data Type
Unsigned int
Integer/Decimal
2/2
Integer/Decimal
1/1
Min/Max
0/1400
Min/Max
0/50
Graph
No use
Graph
No use
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Bar Picture components
Add 2“Bar Picture” from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for displaying the liquid level of alkali(acid) storage
jar
Set the attributes as follows：
Acid storage jar/Alkali storage jar
Read Address
AIW 4
Border Color
Black
Normal Color
Green/Blue
Alarm Lower/Upper
Red/Yellow
Minimum/Maximum
0/50
Alarm Lower/Upper
5/45
Graph
No use
AIW 6
Edit “Auto Control” frame——Add Multiple State Display and Timer components
Add one “Multiple State Display” from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for displaying the rotary of fan blade
of air blower.
Set the attributes as follows：
Read Address
LW 0
State Num.
3
Graph
Bitmap：fan-05.bg*
*fan-05.bg is imported from 【 System Image
Library】—【BG】—【Fan】
Add one “Timer “component from【Graph element window】—【Function Parts】for changing the state value of
“Multiple State Display” component.
42
Basic Part Make Project
Edit “Manual Control” frame——Add Bit State Switch components
Click “10:Frame10”in【Project structure window】to change window to frame10 as shown in following figure:
Add 8 “Bit State Switch” components from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for controlling the start and stop
of electric valve, metering pump, circulating pump and air blower.
Set the attributes as follows：
Electric valve AV01/AV02/AV03/AV04
Air blower/Circulating pump/Acid metering pump/Alkali
metering pump
Read/Write
Address
Q1.0
Q1.1
Q1.2
Read/Write
Q1.3
Address
Q0.0
Q0.1
Q0.2
Q0.3
Switch Type
Toggle
Switch Type
Toggle
Tag
Use
Tag
Use
Graph
Vector Graphics:Button3-15.vg
Graph
Vector Graphics:Button3-15.vg
Edit “Manual Control” frame——Add Number Display components
Add 4 rectangles as the background graph of “Number Display” components
43
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Set the attributes as follows：
Line Color
White
Background Fill Color
Black
Add 4“Number Display” components from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for displaying the liquid level of
acid(alkali) storage jar and the PH value of first(second) neutralization pond
Set the attributes as follows：
PH value of first neutralization pond / PH value of
Acid storage jar / Alkali storage jar
second neutralization pond
Read Address
AIW 4
Unsigned int
Data Type
Unsigned int
Integer/Decimal
2/2
Integer/Decimal
1/1
Min/Max
0/1400
Min/Max
0/50
Graph
No use
Graph
No use
Read Address
AIW 0
Data Type
AIW 2
AIW 6
Edit “Manual Control” frame——Add information bar
The information bar in “Manual Control” frame is the same as “Auto Control”fram. Therefore we can copy the
information bar from “Auto Control” frame to “Manual Control” frame.
Select all information bars in “Auto Control” frame and right click.
Click【Copy】
Change to “Manual Control” frame and right click.
44
Basic Part Make Project
Click【Paste】
Edit “Manual Control” frame——Add “Emergency stop” button and “Change window” button
Copy the “Emergency stop “button, “Alarm” button and “Manual Control” button in “Auto Control” frame and
paste in this frame.
Double click “Manual Control” button to open
the attribute box of【Function Key】and modify as
follows:
Function Key
Change window[Frame0]
Tag
Use
0：Auto Control
1：Auto Control
Edit “Alarm Display” frame——Add Event Display component
45
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Change window to Frame11。
Add one “Event Display” component from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】for displaying the triggered alarm
information which have logined in “Event Information Logon”
Set the attributes as follows：
Read
Address
Format
LW1
Sequence No.
Event Trig Time
Acknowledge Time
Return to Normal Time
Standard Time Format
Extended Date Format
Event Trig Date
Edit “Alarm Display” frame——Add information bar
The procedure is the same as【Edit “Manual Control” frame——add information bar】
Edit “Alarm Display” frame——Add “Emergency stop” button and “Change window” button
Copy the “Emergency stop” button, “Alarm” button and “Auto Control” button in “Manual Control” frame and
paste in this frame.
Double click “Alarm” button to open the
attribute box of【Function Key】and modify as
follows:
Function Key
Change window[Frame10]
Tag
Use；0：Manual Control；
1：Manual Control
3.3.4 Save Project
Click the icon
in Basic Toolbar to save the project.
3.3.5 Project Simulation
After finishing project, user can simulate the project by “Off-line simulation”. The procedure is as follows:
Click the icon
in System Toolbar to compile the project.
After compilation succeed, click the icon
in System Toolbar to popup the dialog box of【EVSimulator】
46
Basic Part Make Project
Select the HMI need to compile and then click【Simulate】button to start simulation as shown in following figure:
3.3.6 Download Project
The procedure of downloading project is as follows：
Choose download way. Click the icon
in System Toolbar to open the dialog box of【Project Setting Option】
Select “USB”in【Download Device】（Herein we use USB for downloading）
Click【OK】button to close the dialog box of【Project Setting Option】
Click the icon in the System Toolbar, it will popup the dialog box of【EVDownload】
Select the HMI need to download and then click【Download】button to start downloading
3.4 Project Folder Introductions
When we create a new project, it will generate specified folders automatically. In these folders, it will generate some files
corresponding to the operation. The instructions of the files are as following table.
Name
HMIn
Instructions
“n” indicates number. All HMI used in one project will generate independent folder. This
folder is used to store macro file and project file.
image
It is used to store initial picture of bitmap in project.
ProjBK
It is used to store the old project which is backuped by new software.
sound
It is used to store the initial file and convert file of the sound in project.
tar
It is used to store data files for project compilation.
temp
It is used to store the project which is stored at the last time.
vg
It is used to store the vector graphics and bitmap in project.
EVWindows.dat
System file
PLCGEDefaultProperties
System file
name.wpj
Project management file, opened by Kinco HMIware.
name.bak
Data file backup by system automatically
47
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
name.pkg
Data package file generated by compilation, it is used for downloading to HMI.
48
Advanced Part
50
1 User Interface
1.1 Interface Layout
After opening Kinco HMIware, the main interface displays as below：
a. Menu bar
b. Toolbar
Project construct window
c. Configuration edit area
d. Component library window
g. Compile information window
h. Component list window
e. Project file window
f.
i. Status bar
The main interface of Kinco HMIware is composed by the following parts：

Menu

Toolbar

Software window

Edit area
1.2 Menu
1.2.1 File Menu

Save as：Save project to a new path.

Project password：Set password for opening project.

4 files recently opened：The software automatically remembers most recently opened 4 files’ name in the “File”
menu to facilitate user open project directly.
Quit：Close the software, then software will prompt users to save unsaved project.
51
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1.2.2 Edit Menu

Undo: Cancel the latest operation, and return to the state before this operation; redo: Redo the latest operation which
has been undone by the Undo operation.
!
Can only undo or redo one step, multiple steps of undo and redo is not supported.

Find/Replace: Find/Replace component address or tag.

Nudge: Left/Right/Up/Down: Move the selected component left/right/up/down by one pixel.

Align: Left/Right/Top/Bottom/Vertical Midline/Horizontal Midline: Align the selected components.

Size: Width/Height/Both: Set the selected components to the same width/height/ size.

Layer: Set Top Layer/Set Bottom Layer/Previous Layer/Next Layer: Adjust the sequence of the multiple overlapped
components.

Group/Ungroup: Group/Ungroup multiple components.

Same Horizontal/Vertical Space: Implement the equal horizontal/vertical space between multiple selected components.

Align Horizontal/Vertical Center: Place multiple selected components in the horizontal/vertical center of the window.

Flip Horizontally/Vertically/Rotate 90 Degree: Set the selected component to flip horizontally/vertically/rotate 90
degree.

Select All Components: Select all the components in the frame.

Show Grid: Display screen grid; Alignment Grid: Move by grid; Define the Grid Spacing: Self-define the screen grid
space.

Lock Component: Lock the components, then the components cannot be moved again.

The locked components support copy and paste.

Reset Toolbar: The toolbar restore to default state.
1.2.3 View Menu

Language：Quickly switch language 1,2,3,4.

State：Quickly switch state 0,1,2,3.

Zoom：25%~300%；Normal Size: Display in proportion of 1:1.

Display Component’s Name: Whether or not display component’s name.

Attribute：Attribute of window or component.
1.2.4 Screen Menu

Add Frame：Add configuration window.
52
Advanced Part User Interface

Delete Frame：Delete configuration window.

Frame Attribute: Open the attribute page of the current window.

Copy/Delete Windows: Copy/Delete configuration windows.

Edit Init Window: Edit starting up logo.
1.2.5 Draw Menu

Static Text: Add static text

New Graphics: Add new graphics;

Import Graphics Library: Import graphics of the system default image library.

Group components：Use the group element; Save the group element:
Save the group component to system library.
components;

Load Image: When creating a new bitmap graphic, single click【Load Image】to browse and import pictures.

Transparent Color: To make the bitmap transparent.

Multicolor-Gray switch: Single click【Multicolor-Gray switch】to switch between multicolor image and grayscale
image.
1.2.6 Components Menu
☞More details about components please refer to【Advanced Part 4 Component】
1.2.7 Tools Menu

Download Way: Selectable download way: USB/Serial port/Ethernet

Recipe Editor: Open recipe editing window.
1.2.8 Option Menu

Project Path: Set the default save path for project.

Compress big graph: Compress large bitmap size to reduce project size when quantities of bitmaps are used in the
project.
1.2.9 Window Menu

Cascade：Arrange current opened windows in cascade sequence.

Tile Horizontally: Tile current opened windows horizontally.

Tile Vertically: Tile current opened windows vertically.

Construct Window: Users configuration connection of HMI and PLC, as well set communication parameter in the
window.

HMI Edit Window：User editing window.

Close All Window：Close the current opened project.
1.2.10 Help Menu

Kinco HMIware Manual：Kinco HMIware user manual.

Communication Connection Guide：Connection guide of Kinco HMIware communicating with various PLCs and
controllers.
53
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Version Information：Version information of the software.
1.3 Toolbar
1.3.1 Basic Toolbar
1.3.2 Draw Toolbar

Select: Single click【Select】icon to cancel the selected objects.
1.3.3 Page Switch Toolbar
1.3.4 Position Toolbar
a
b
c
d
a：Nudge Left/Right/Up/Down by one pixel
b：Align Left/Right/Top/Bottom/Vertical Midline/Horizontal Midline
c：Make Same Width/Height/Size
d：Set Top/Set Bottom/Previous Layer/Next Layer
e：Group/Ungroup
f：Same Horizontal Space/Same Vertical Space
g：Align Horizontal Center/Vertical Center
h：Flip Horizontally/Vertically/Rotate 90 Degree
54
e
f
g
h
i
Advanced Part User Interface
i：Lock Component Position
1.3.5 Line Width Toolbar
1.3.6 Line Style Toolbar
1.3.7 System Toolbar
Compile
Compile All
Clear Build Result
Download
Decompile
Direct Online Simulation
Indirect Online Simulation
Offline Simulation
Download
Method
1.3.8 Database Toolbar
1.3.9 Code Edit Toolbar
Code Edit Toolbar: Do not support currently.
1.3.10 Fill Effect Toolbar

Filled Style 0~26：when check【Window Attribute】-【Use Background Color】，there are 26 filled styles selectable.
Filled style 0 indicates unfilled.
55
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Unfilled: When【Use Background Color】 is checked, single click 【Unfilled】to cancel fill color and filled style.
1.3.11 Label Position Toolbar
1.3.12 State Switch Toolbar
1.3.13 Font Toolbar
1.3.14 Status Bar

【Status Bar】：Shows the current X, Y coordinate values of mouse position, width/height of the target object.
1.3.15 Tip Text

【Tip Text】：When mouse is hovering over toolbar icon, the responding tip text will display.
1.3.16 Toolbar Options

【Toolbar Options】：Single click the down arrow【Toolbar Options】，
【Display/hide panel】 will display for user to
start closed toolbars.
1.4 Software window
Kinco HMIware software windows include: Graph element window, Project files window, Project structure window,
56
Advanced Part User Interface
Message window, Component list window.
1.4.1 Graph Element Window
Graph element window is one of the most indispensable windows, which is mainly for supply configuration with devices,
components and other design elements.
Graph element window is composed of the following 6 element libraries:

Connector
HMI
PLC/Controller
PLC Parts
Function Parts
Project Database
1. Right click on the Graphic Element Window to switch between big icon and small icon of parts:
57
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2. Hover mouse over icons of HMI or PLC to view information of the corresponding devices:
1.4.2 Project Files Window
Project files window is for displaying all graphic libraries, macro files, recipe files and other information include in the
current project.

1. Double click macrocode file in Project files window to open macro edit window and edit corresponding
macrocode.
2. Double click graphic files in Project files window to open graphic edit window and edit corresponding
graphic.
1.4.3 Project Sstructure Window
Project structure window is for displaying all the elements in the current project by tree diagram or previews.
Tree structure: Displaying all the elements in the current project by tree diagram：
58
Advanced Part User Interface
Component 0
Frame 0
Component 1
HMI0
Frame 1
Component2
HMI1
Frame n
Project Name
HMI
HMIn
PLC0
PLC
PLC1
PLCn

Click the project name in Project structure window to expand the topological structure; Click “HMIn” or
“Frame n” to display the responding configuration window of the certain HMI; Click component to display
configuration window which the component belongs to.
Preview：Display the frames of the configuration project in the form of thumbnail.
1.4.4 Message Window
Message window displays information of the loaded projects and compilation results, in order to facilitate users accurately
search the errors in the project.
59
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Users could delete or export compilation information in Message window by right click.
Clear message: clear all the compilation information shown in Message window.
Export message: export all the compilation information shown in Message window to the current project file,
the exported file name is log.txt by default.
1.4.5 Component List Window
Component list window is for check information of all the components used by current projects, including affiliated
HMI/PLC，Frame No., component ID, address type, address and so on.

1. Open Component list window from the drop list of【View】 Menu.
2. Double click the line of a component, then configuration edit window will change to the frame which the
component belongs to.
60
Advanced Part User Interface
1.5 Configuration Edit Area
The windows can be opened in configuration edit area areas follows:

Construct Window
Open Construct window by clicking “Construct Window” in 【Window】menu or clicking project name in Project
structure window.

HMI Edit Window
Drag a HMI into the Construct Window, and then open HMI Edit Window by right clicking on the HMI icon and select
“Edit”, or clicking “HMI n” or “Frame n” in Project structure window.

Graphic Edit Window
Open Graphic Edit window by creating a new graphic or by double clicking one graphic file in Project files window.

Macro Edit Window
Open Macrocode Edit Window by creating a new macro or by double clicking macro files in Project files window.

Edit Init Window
Enter the Edit Init Window by selecting HMI and clicking the
clicking the

icon of the Database Toolbar in Construct Window, or by
in HMI Edit Window.
When multiple edit windows are opened, you can arrange the windows by “Cascade”/ “Tile Horizontally”/
“Tile Vertically” in 【Window】menu.
1.5.1 Construct Window
Users can configure communication connection between devices and set communication parameter in Construct Window.

Communication connection configuration
Drag devices and cables from 【Connector】【
/ HMI】【
/ PLC】list of Graph element window into the Construct Window. Drag
devices to connect with wire ends. To make sure the connection is established, drag devices, then the properly attached wire
ends will move with the mouse.
61
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Communication parameter setting
Double click icon of HMI or PLC to open 【HMI Attribute】or【PLC Attribute】.

Serial communication
Set serial communication parameter in 【COMX Setting】—【HMI Attribute】；Set communication parameters of
PLC/Controller in 【PLC Attribute】.

Ethernet communication
Set communication parameters of HMI or PLC/controller in【HMI Attribute】—【Network Device Setting】.

Field Bus communication
Set communication parameters of HMI or PLC/controller in【HMI Attribute】—【Field Bus Setting】.
☞More details about communication please refer to【Advanced Part 14 HMI Communication】
1.5.2 HMI Edit Window
Design and edit project frames in the HMI Edit Window.
1.5.3 Graphic Edit Window
Users could edit vector graphics (.vg) and bitmap graphic (*.bg) in Graphic Edit Window.
☞More details about graphics edit please refer to【Advance Part 5.3 Graphic Library】
62
Advanced Part User Interface
1.5.4 Macro Edit Window
In Macro Edit Window, users could write source code to realize such functions as operation and logic by using standard C
language.
☞More details about Macro please refer to【Advance Part 9 Macro】
1.5.5 Edit Initial Window
In Edit Initial Window, users could replace or edit the default initial window of HMI.
☞More details about initial window please refer to【Advanced Part 2.8 LOGO Screen (Logo）】
63
2 Basic Design Method
2.1 Window screen
This chapter mainly introduces the specification of basic windows in Kinco HMIware , and how to use and display them.
2.1.1 Specification of window screen
Specification of new basic window:
Size (pixel)（width × height） Max size（pixel）
（width × height） Min size (pixel)（width × height）
320×234
320×234
320×240
320×240
480×234
480×234
480×272
480×272
640×480
640×480
800×480
800×480
800×600
800×600
1024×768
1024×768
10×10
Number
1~32768
2.1.2 Window Display Methods
Change window
Window change is to shut down the current window (including the sub window) and open another appointed one.
This operation can be finished by the following two methods：

Use function key
Function key:[change window],fill a number in [window number]
You can change window though touch the function key.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function Key】

Use plc control
“PLC control”:[change window],determine a control address,
You can change window by changing the value in this address.
64
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
☞More information refers to

【Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC Control 】
Window overlay
Window overlay is to integrate some windows into one screen.
This function can be realized with two methods:

Bottom window
Double click at the space on the basic window, you can see [window attribute] frame. Once chosen as a bottom
window, all the components on it will also show on the basic window.
Default common window:[1：Common Window]，users also can define any other one freely. All the components on
the common window will show on all the basic windows.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 3 Window】

1. 3 bottom windows can be used by one basic window at most
2. only one common window
3. Only components of bottom window or common window are shown on the basic window, excluding
attribute settings like background color or frame color.


Window overlay
Window overlay is to integrate some windows into one screen.
65
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
This function can be realized with following methods:

Direct window
You can switch on or off to open or close popup the window. Its size is determined by the one of direct window.
Keyboard window is direct window.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 4.8.1 Direct Window】

Indirect window
By changing the value, you can open or close the specific window. Its size is determined by the one of indirect
window.
☞More information refers to

【Advanced Part 4.8.2 Indirect Window】
Function key
Function key:[Popup window] to open the specific window,[close window] to close it.Its size is determined by
none but itself.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function Key】

Fast selection window
Default fast selection window [2：Fast Selection], users also can define any other one freely.
By click [Menu] on task bar, the fast selection window will display and it will shut down after click again.
it. Its size is determined by none but itself.
☞More information refers to
【Advanced Part 3 Window】

1. No limit of popup window .But it`s better to use much fewer or much RAM will not be released.
2. only one fast selection window
 Window move
The place will be changed by using “control bar” of function key.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function Key】

Basic window cannot be moved ,only popup windows can.
66
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
2.1.3 Display Position
Different types of windows display in different styles:
Popup window by “direct window” or “indirect window”
 According to component position
The popup window will display where the “direct window”or “indirect window” is put.

According to setting value
Set [variable display coordinate], values or addresses determine the position of popup window (coordinate of top left
corner point.

Function key [popup window]
Set values of “X”,”Y” in [window attribute]-[position], they are the coordinates of the popup window.

Its position cannot be changed when the screen is a basic window and it can only display full screen.
2.1.4 Display Order
Different types of windows display on a screen in its order.
67
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2.1.5 Copy/Delete Windows
（1）copy window
Copy in Same project or different projects

Same project
Same project: same HMI or different HMIs

Same HMI
Copy things from frame A to frame B：

Right click [copy]
Right click the component on frame A , choose[copy],then change to frame B and paste it on it. By this way, only
component is copied, not window attribute.

[copy/delete window]
Click[frame]-[copy/delete window] ， set “count”,
“source window”,
“destination windows”, click
“OK”. By this way, all the components and window attribution are copied.

Copy across HMI
Copy across HMI can only realized by right click [copy].
!
[Screen]—[copy/delete window]: this copy operation across the HMI windows are not supported
 Copy across project
When copy across different projects, you should open the related two projects with Kinco HMIware, and then right click
[copy].
（2）delete window
You can delete windows as belows:
68
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
 Right click [delete]
Right click the frame you want to delete under [project structure window], then it will be delete.

Windows are deleted one by one, multi-deletion is not supported.
 [copy/delete windows]
Click HMI you want to handle, click [screen]-[copy/delete windows-[delete window],[delete single window]can delete an
appointed window,[delete multi-windows]can delete continuous-number windows.
☞More information refers to【Advanced Part 3.3 Edit Window】
2.2 Draw
This chapter introduces Kinco HMIware image format and picture drawing and using.
2.2.1 Image Format
Kinco HMIware mainly supports two format vg and bg. When createing a vector graph, its default format is vg, while
createing a bit map, its default format is bg.
Differences between vector graph and bitmap is shown as below:
Specification of created graph：
Graph format
Max size(pixel)
Min size(pixel)
(width × height)
（width × height）
line,
Vector graph
（vg）
Graph types
round-corner
State limit
rectangle,
rectangle, ellipse, sector, broken
320×240
2×2
Bitmap （bg）
line, curve, polygon and so on
1~256
Jpg, bmp, gif, png and so on
2.2.2 Vector
[vector],in short, enlarge or narrow without distortion. Geometric figures which can be infinitely enlarged without color
change and blurred are mostly in this form
69
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In Kinco HMIware, you can create vector graph through in two ways:

Import from image library
Import graph you need from [image library]-[vector graph].
☞More information refer s to [Advanced Part 5.3.1 Import Grahpics]

Use drawing tools in

Draw in picture edit window
Use component [vector graph].open window edition, draw as you need with drawing tools, save, exit edit window, a new
vector graph is finished.
☞More information refers to [Advanced Part 5.3.2 Build New Graphics]

Draw in configuration window
Draw in the edit window with drawing tools, right click the graph done, choose “save to the VG map”, a new vector graph
is finished
☞More information refers to [Advanced Part 5.3.2 Build New Graphics]
Now we will introduce how to use drawing tools:
Choose an icon, drag in the edit area :
line
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
~move mouse into edit area,”+”shows
up, press left on mouse and drag
release
at the position you prefer a line is
finished
curve
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
 move mouse into edit area,”+”shows up,
press left on mouse and drag
,press left on mouse and drag
release the mouse you can see a circle
click at the start point
click at the finishing point ,a curve is finished
70
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
rectangle
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
 move mouse into edit area,”+”shows up
 press left on mouse and drag
 release at the position you prefer a rectangle
is finished
roundrectangle
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
 move mouse into edit area,”+”shows up,
click to set the starting point
press left on mouse and drag to the position
you want
release
the mouse, a roundrectangle is
finished
 Point at the small green block on the bottom
right corner, when the arrow turns two-ways,
press left on mouse and drag, ou can change its
radius.
polyline
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
 move mouse into edit area,”+”shows up,
click to set the starting point
click at the set points
right click to finish drawing
polygon
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
71
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
~
move
mouse
into
edit
area,”+”shows up, click 7 times at 7
points
 right click to finish drawing
ellipse
Graphic instrument
Drawing step

move mouse into edit area,”+”shows up,
click to set the starting point
 press left on mouse and drag to the position
you want
 release the mouse, a ellipse is finished
With the same width and height ,a ellipse turns to
be a circle
sector
Graphic instrument
Drawing step
move
mouse into edit area,”+”shows up,
click to set the centre point
 press left on mouse and drag to the position
you want
 release the mouse ,a closed circle shows up
 click at starting point
 click at the ending point ,a sector is finished
2.2.3 Geometric Figures Attribution
Attributions as below：
graphics
Graphic samples
Setting attribute
72
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
line color, line style、line width、arrow
Line
style
Curve
line color、line style、line width
line color 、 background fill color 、
foreground fill color 、 pattern fill 、
Rectangle
fountain fill、line style、line width
line color 、 background fill color 、
foreground fill color 、 pattern fill 、
RoundRectangle
fountain fill、line style、line width
line color、line style、line width
PolyLine
line color 、 background fill color 、
foreground fill color 、 pattern fill 、
PolyGon
fountain fill、line style、line width
line color 、 background fill color 、
foreground fill color 、 pattern fill 、
Ellipse
fountain fill、line style、line width
line color 、 background fill color 、
foreground fill color 、 pattern fill 、
Sector
fountain fill、line style、line width
Users can modify attribute in two ways:

Attribution frame
Double click the graph，modify in [graphics attribute]

Tools bar
Choose the graph, modify its attribute through[drawing tools]/[ line width]/[line style].In this way, you can only set line
color\filled color\line width and line style.
2.2.4 About Fountain Fill
The closed graphics can be set fountain fill.
Double click the graph，choose[fountain fill]choose the foreground fill color, background fill color line color .
73
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Example:
Fountain
Foreground
Background Fill
Line
Fill
Fill Color
Color
Color
Horizontal
■
□
■
Vertical
■
□
■
Oblique
■
□
■
■
□
■
■
□
■
■
□
■
Under
Oblique
Corner of
Radiation
Centre for
Radiation
Deformation
2.2.5 Bitmap
[bitmap]，in short，structured with pixel，enlarger or narrow with distortion. Bitmap is structured with pixel array and each
has its own information. We can change the graph by dealing with every pixel.
In Kinco HMIware, bitmap is created in two ways：

Import from image library
Import from[image library]-[BG]
☞More information refer s to [Advanced Part 5.3.1 Import Grahpics]
5

Import
pictures in forms of jpg、bmp、gif、png
Bitmap, open the edit window ,import pictures in forms of
jpg, bmp, gif, png and so on, save, exit ,a new bitmap is created.
☞More information refers to [Advanced Part 5.3.2 Build New Graphics]
5
2.2.6 About Transparent Color
If a picture influences the aesthetic, users can deal with the pure color with[transparent] tool in drawing tools
74
:
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
1
2
“Transparent” can only deal with simple actions, not suggested to use.
Besides，bitmap supports PNG format, so you can edit a picture with another editor and convert it into PNG form before
import.
!
GIF and PNG form picture doesn`t support transparent action
2.3 Text
User can add the text for the component by the following way in Kinco HMIware.

Set in Draw Toolbar.

Click the [A] icon in Draw Toolbar, and input the needed text content in [Text Attribute]-[Display Setting].
Position free

Set [Use Tag] or [Use TextLib] in the component attribute.
Select [Use Tag] in the [Tag] option in component attribute, and input the needed text contents in [Tag Contents], or select
[Use TextLib], if there are TextLib logon in the project.
Only shown on the component
75
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2.3.1 Font Type
Kinco HMIware provides 3 available fonts, i.e. dot matrix font, vector font and graph font. The advantages and
disadvantages of these three fonts will be described as follows; users can select the suitable font type according to its
characteristics.
2.3.2 Dot Matrix Font
Dot Matrix font saves the bitmap for each character of the required Chinese character set. Each primitive (small picture) is
spliced together to form a character string when it is used.

Disadvantages of dot matrix font:

Only SimSun is supported.

The scaling effect is poor.
For each character, 3 kinds of bitmaps (8×8, 16×8, 24×16 (height*width)) are reserved respectively, so the effect
is very poor when the larger font is displayed, as shown below:

full-width deal only for
unASCII characters
Kinco HMIware deals with ASCII characters as half-width ones, while unASCII as full-width ones. So if each
character has different width, the intervals may be different:

advantages of dot matrix font:
A smallest storage space is occupied by dot matrix font.
2.3.3 Vector Font
Vector font intercepts the characters that are used by the user from the corresponding font library through checking the setup
of the user-set fonts, and then makes them into TrueType font file (*.ttf format) for HMI to use.

Disadvantages of vector font:

Only Support the TrueType installed in the operating system (*.ttf format).

Without selecting “Vector Fonts Edge Blur”，the font is displayed with some projections, and comparison
results as shown below:
76
Advanced Part Basic Design Method

“Vector Fonts Edge Blur” can be set in [HMI Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes].

Advantages of vector font:

A smaller storage space is occupied. It adopts the method of intercepting the matrix from the font file, thus
reducing the size of the font file. For the same character in the same font, only one matrix needs to be intercepted
regardless of the size, color, bold/italic styles.


The font size can be set freely without any deformation

Support the alignment method for multiple-line text.

Text library can support the vector font.
System default vector font setting
User can define the default vector font in [System Default Vector Font] in [Option].
[Example] Set System Default Font as “Arial”, when using tag or text and select “Vector Font”, it will select
“Arial”by default automatically.
2.3.4 Graph Font
Graph font treats the whole character string as a whole, and intercepts the whole bitmap and saves it in the project.
77
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Disadvantages of graph font:

A larger storage space is occupied. Because the character string saves as bitmap, so it needs a larger space. For
example: Four characters “configuration”displayed in zero SimSun needs 1824 bytes, as shown below:
In addition, the graph font should be intercepted again if the content, size or colors vary slightly, thus causing a
linear increase in the occupied space.


Text library can’t support the graph font.
Advantages of graph font:

Support all installed fonts in current operating system.

The scaling effect is good.
2.3.5 Text Attribute Edition
User can modify the font attribute through the following two methods:

Modify in the component attribute dialog box
Double-click component /text to set the font attributes in [Component Attribute]-[Tag] or [Text Attribute].

Modify in Font Toolbar
Selected component/ text, and then set the font attributes in [Font Toolbar]. This method can support multi-modify font
attribute.
Different font types support different font attribute to be modified, specific as below:
: Support；--: Unsupport
Font Attribute
Common
Bold
Italic
Underline
strikeout
Size
Color
Graphic
A
A
A
A
A
AA A
AAA
Dot Matrix Font
Vector Font
Graph Font



--


--


--
--

--
--







2.3.6 Notes for Using Vector Font
Based on the special treating method for the vector font, the following conditions should be paid attention to when the vector
font is used:
1. Some fonts may not support some characters, or have poor support effects.
78
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
For example, the Chinese characters can be displayed by using Arial font, because there are no corresponding Chinese
characters in Arial font library. Otherwise the effect will as shown below:
2. Because the dot matrix font and graph font have many disadvantages in the storage space and scaling etc, therefore, use
the vector font as much as possible when it can meet the project requirements.
3. Avoid using too many fonts as much as possible.
It too many types of vector fonts (e.g. dozens or more) are used by the user, the number of font files will be too many, thus
affecting the compilation speed, downloading speed and screen switching speed.
4. Use the common fonts in operating system as much as possible.
If a certain project uses “Microsoft Elegant Black” font when it is edited on PC, and when it is transferred to another PC
where no “Microsoft Elegant Black” font exists for editing, then all the “Microsoft Elegant Black” characters used in
the project will be changed to “SimSun” automatically.
2.4 Keyboard
This chapter describes keyboard type and methods of calling keyboard in Kinco HMIware.
2.4.1 Keyboard Type
Kinco HMIware support three keyboard for users: NUMERAL Keyboard、ASCII Keyboard and HEX Keyboard. And users
can make own keyboard or use external USB keyboard.

NUM Keyboard：NUM Keyboard for number input component.
Window
control bar
Max value*
Max:AAAAAAAAAAAA
Min:AAAAAAAAAAAA
Min value*
AAAAAAAAAA
Shut down
Input
display
clear
CLR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
.
ENTER
backspace
_
minus
enter
※ 1. The values shown here are max and min in Max/Min Value Setting in [Number Input Component Attribute]-[Numeric
Data], Keyboard permission input value range is limited by the value.
2. If [Proportion Conversion] is selected, the values shown here are max and min after proportion conversion.

ASCII Keyboard：ASCII Keyboard for text input component or number input component.
Lowercase：
79
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Caps：
Chinese Input:
※Set Chinese Font Box Height in [HMI Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes], height range from 24 to 99 (pixel).

HEX Keyboard：for HEX character input
80
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
※1. The values shown here are max and min in Max/Min Value Setting in [Number Input Component Attribute]-[Numeric
Data], Keyboard permission input value range is limited by the value.
2. If [Proportion Conversion] is selected, the values shown here are max and min after proportion conversion.
☞More information refers to [Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function Key]
2.4.2 NUM Keyboard
Through the following three methods, Number Input Component will pop up NUM Keyboard in Kinco HMIware.

Use public windows keyboard
This method is system default.
Open [Number Input Component Attribute] - [Keyboard Setting] dialog box, and then select [Public Windows Keyboard], as
shown below:
Put two “direct window” components respectively on the left and right side of [Frame 1：Common Window],choose
[Frame 3：NUM Keyboard] in frame ID.
Take apart in the middle of a screen, when the components on the left side is triggered, the direct window on the right side
will pop the keyboard, It`s the same with the other side.

Use Specified Keyboard
This method can pop up keyboard made by user self.
81
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Use specified keyboard. Only after setting window attribute as “keyboard page” can you find the page in [input
attribute]-[keyboard setting]-[specified keyboard].

Use external keyboard
This method need connect USB Host keyboard.
Open [Number Input Component Attribute] - [Keyboard Setting] dialog box, and then select [Not Use Pop-up Keyboard], as
shown below:
No keyboard will pop up, while user can input things through circumscribed keyboard.

It is only applicable to the HMI supporting the USB HOST.
82
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
2.4.3 ASCII Keyboard
Through the following two methods, Text Input component / Note Book component will pop up ASCII Keyboard in Kinco
HMIware.

Use Specified Keyboard
This method is system default.
Default keyboard:[Frame 4：ASCII Keyboard]


If you want to us your own keyboard, you should set it as a keyboard page ,and choose the frame ID of the
keyboard window.
Use external keyboard
Same as number input，No keyboard will pop up, while user can input things through circumscribed keyboard.
2.4.4 HEX Keyboard
When input hex number, you should make it with two methods as below:

Use Specified Keyboard
[number input attribute]-[keyboard setting]-[specified keyboard],choose[Frame 8：HEX Keyboard].

If you want to us your own keyboard, you should set it as a keyboard page, and choose the frame ID of the
keyboard window.
83
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Use external keyboard
Same as number input
No keyboard will pop up, while user can input things through circumscribed keyboard.
2.4.5 Create your Own Mumber Keyboard
Num keys0-9, enter, delete and backspace
Determine the layout:
Create keyboard：
function key，move the window，attribute setting：
Function
Switch Window: Popup window title bar
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，close the window，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Escape
84
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
text display，display the characters, attribute setting：
Read address
LW 9070*1（special register）
Data width
6
 function key，delete，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Clear
Tag
0：CLR；1：CLR
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，backspace，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Back Space
Tag
0：；1：
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，enter，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Enter
Tag
Sselect；0：ENTER；1：ENTER
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，character input，attribute setting：take
Function
Keyboard Function：Unicode
Tag
0：1；1：1
for example
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
number display，display min value, attribute setting：
Read address
LW 9190*2（special register）
Data width
6
 number display，display max value, attribute setting：
Read address
LW 9180*3（special register）
Data width
6
※ 1.LW9060 ~ LW9075 special registers，cache the latest input
85
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2. LW9190 ~ LW9197 special register，min value display
3. LW9180 ~ LW9187 special register，max value display
2.4.6 Create your Oown Unicode Keyboard
Unicode uses two bytes to form a character，often used to display characters cannot display by ASCII, kanji for example.
Take Russia as an example：
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
4
5
8
7
6
 function key，move the window，attribute setting：
Function
Switch Window: Popup window title bar
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，close the window，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Escape
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 text display，display the characters, attribute setting：
Read address
LW 9060（special register）
Data width
16
Unicode
choose
 function key，character input，attribute setting：take
Function
Keyboard Function：Unicode
Tag
0：И；1：И
Font
vector：Arial Unicode MS
for example
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，enter，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Enter
86
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Tag
0：вВОД；1：вВОД
Font
vector：Arial Unicode MS
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，delete，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Clear
Tag
0：СБР；1：СБР
Font
vector：Arial Unicode MS
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，backspace，attribute setting：：
Function
Keyboard Function：Back Space
Tag
0：BS；1：BS
Font
vector：Arial Unicode MS
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
 function key，space，attribute setting：
Function
Keyboard Function：Unicode
Graphics
Select Vector Graphics：
2.4.7 Call Keyboard in the Group Component Library
Kinco HMIware provides 21 default keyboards in Group Components Library, the method of calling the keyboard in Group
Components Library is as follows:
【example】number input calls a keyboard made of group（text input/note book）。[Example]
 Createe a new window named Frame10, and select [Keyboard Page] from [Special Attribute] in Window Attribute.
 Right-click the mouse in the blank area in the Frame10 window to select [Group]-[Use the group element], then select
[keyboard] from [Group Components] in [Edit Box of Group Components Library], and select the right keyboard from
[Preview] and click [Place Group Components] button, then the keyboard will appear in Frame10.
87
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
 Modify the window size of Frame 10 to the same size as the specified keyboard.
 Place one number input component (LW0) in Frame0, and select [Specified
Keyboard] in [Keyboard Setting] in
[Number Input Component Attribute], select [10:Frame10].
 Save, compile, and run the project. Then click the number input component (LW0) to make the specified num keyboard
pop up in the middle of HMI screen.
2.5 Code Type
Kinco HMIware can support code type: BIN, BCD and LSB. User can select the correct encoding type according to the
actual encoding type of data process.
2.5.1 BIN
BIN（Binary）is binary code type. Most digital systems are based on BIN code to process the data
Code Type
Word data range
Dword data range
Signed BIN
-32767~32767
-2147483648~2147483647
Unsigned BIN
0~65535
0~4294967295
[Example]
Convert binary data 1001 0100 to decimal data:
88
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
1001 0100 = 1×27+0×26+0×25+1×24+0×23+1×22+0×21+0×20 = 148
2.5.2 BCD
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) is two-decimal code. The encoding type represents a decimal number 0 to 9 with 4-bit binary
number. Example 9 (Decimal) =1001 (Binary).
As easy to deal with,often use for BCD switch and BCD nixie tube display 由
Code Type
Word data range
Dword data range
BCD
0~9999
0~99999999
[Example]
Decimal data is +123，the binary data is 0000 0000 0111 1011 (64+32+16+8+2+1=123). But BCD data is #123，it can be
simply expressed as 0000 0001 0010 0011
Decimal data is -413，the binary data is 1111 1110 0110 0011(complement for negative number，negation adding 1). But
BCD data is #F413，it can be simply expressed as 1111 0100 0001 0011
2.5.3 LSB
LSB is the acronym of Least Significant Bit. This encoding type first converts the data in the buffer to binary data, and then
determines the current state of component based on the number of consecutive “0”at the least significant bits of the binary
dat. [Example] Take the data with word address for example:
Decimal
Binary
State
0
0000 0000 0000 0000
All bit are 0, the state is 16
1
0000 0000 0000 0001
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 0, the state is 0
2
0000 0000 0000 0010
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 1, the state is 1
3
0000 0000 0000 0011
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 0, the state is 0
4
0000 0000 0000 0100
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 2, the state is 2
5
0000 0000 0000 0101
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 0, the state is 0
6
0000 0000 0000 0110
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 1, the state is 1
7
0000 0000 0000 0111
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 0, the state is 0
8
0000 0000 0000 1000
The number of consecutive “0”at least significant bits is 3, the state is 3
2.6 Language Switching
User can pre-register the content written in multiple languages to text library in Kinco HMIware. The switching display
among the multiple languages contents can be realized by modifying the value of special register, which refers to LW9130 in
Kinco HMIware.
89
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞ For details about text library, refers to [Advanced Part 5.1 Text Library]
There are two following usages for switching display among the multiple languages by LW9130.

Use Multiple State Setting and Multiple State Display components.
Createe one Multiple State Display component, the attribute is:
Read Address
LW9130（HMI system special register）
State Num.
3
Tag
No
Graphics
Use vector graphic, createe one vector graphic with 3 state
Three multiple state settings stack up upon a multiple state display in corresponding order, attribute settings：
Write Address
LW9130（HMI system special register）
Setting Mode
Set Constant
Set Value
0/1/2
Tag
No
Graphics
No
☞ For details about component attribute, refer to [Advanced Part 4 Component]
When running, the effect is as shown below:
90
Advanced Part Basic Design Method

Use Multiple State Switch
Createe one Multiple State Switch component, the attribute is:
Read/ Write Address
LW9130（HMI system special register）
Control Mode
Dropdown List
State Num.
3
Select/Background/Border Color
bright green/gray /lack
Tag
Use；0：Chinese；1：English；2：Japanese
Graphics
No
When running, the effect is as shown below:
Equipment operate
abnormally
设备运行异常
Language
Chinese
Chinese
English
Language
Chinese
不具合ままの稼動
Language
English
Japanese
Chinese
Chinese
English
English
English
Japanese
English
Japanese
Chinese
English
English
Japanese
2.7 RTC Set
MT series HMI has real time（RTC）function， BIN coded format，for real time and date display. Once HMI is power off，
battery is backup
91
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In Kinco HMIware，components with real time clock：time, event display, event bar, historical event display, historical data
display, operation log, trend curve ,XY plot.
So when using components above, you should ensure the accuracy of time or you may get wrong information
2.7.1 Through Special Registers
LW10000~LW10006:
Special Register
Address Type
Code Type
Descriptions
LW10000
Second,
LW10001
Minute, the effective value range from 0 to 59
LW10002
Hour,
LW10003
WORD
BIN
Day,
LW10004
Month,
LW10005
Year,
LW10006
Week,
the effective value range from 0 to 59
the effective value range from 0 to 23
the effective value range from 1 to 31
the effective value range from 1 to 12
the effective value range from 2000 to 2037
the effective value range from 0 [Sun] to 6 [Sat]
[Example]set year, month, date, minute, second, use 6 number input components as shown :
attributes:
Read/Write
LW10005（HMI system
LW10004（HMI system
LW10003（HMI system
Address
special register）
special register）
special register）
Integer
4
2
2
Min/ Max
2000/2037
1/12
1/31
Alignment
Left
Leading 0
Leading 0
Font Color
Black
Graphics
No
 attributes:
Read/Write
LW10002（HMI system
LW10001（HMI system
LW10000（HMI system
Address
special register）
special register）
special register）
Integer
2
2
2
Min/ Max
0/23
0/59
0/59
Alignment
Leading 0
Font Color
Black
Graphics
No
Input the real time to get the right time information:
92
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
2011
/
10
/
18
19 ： 57 ： 01
/
2011
10
/
19 ： 57 ： 01
18
Max:AAAAAAAAAAAA
Min:AAAAAAAAAAAA
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
.
9
CLR
Max:AAAAAAAAAAAA
Min:AAAAAAAAAAAA
57
_
1
ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
0
CLR
_
ENTER
2
2.7.2 Calibrate System Time in System Setup Screen
Switch to system setting mode, modify time on this interface.
Take one HMI for example:
☞More infermationrefers to[Hardware Part 3.1 Methods to Display System Setting Mode】
2.7.3 System Time and PLC Time Synchronization
There are two following way to make the system time and PLC CPU time synchronization:

Use Data Transmission function of Timer component
In this way, we will use the Timer component to transfer the data in the time register of PLC to HMI system special register
LW10000~LW10006.
☞ For details about Timer component, refers to [Advanced Part 4.16.2 Timer]
!

Minimum execution cycle is 100ms，so there is an inevitable time deviation between HMI and PLC.
Use The External Clock for Event
Only for trigger time and return to normal time of event (HMI time for acknowledge time ).
Choose “use external time for event”- [HMI attribute]-[HMI extended attributes ],related time will read from special
93
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
registers: LW9010~LW9017 ，which get time by timer receiving from PLC CPU clock.
LW9010~9017：
Data Type
Code Type
Address
LW9010
LW9011
WORD
BIN
LW9012
LW9013
!
Descriptions
Address
Second, the effective value
range from 0 to 59
Minute, the effective value
range from 0 to 59
Hour, the effective value
range from 0 to 23
Date, the effective value
range from 1 to 31
LW9014
LW9015
LW9016
LW9017
Descriptions
Month, the effective value range
from 1 to 12
Year, the effective value range
from 1980 to 2079
Week, the effective value range
from 0[Sun] to 6[Sat]
Millisecond, the effective value
range from 0 to 999
Minimum execution cycle is 100ms，so there is an inevitable time deviation between HMI and PLC.
[Example] Take FX2N PLC for example:
FX2N CPU clock
Addr. Type
D8013
D8014
Descriptions
Addr. Type
Second, the effective value range from 0 to
D8017
59
Minute, the effective value range from 0 to
D8018
59
D8015
Hour, the effective value range from 0 to 23
D8016
Date, the effective value range from 1 to 31
D8019
Descriptions
Month, the effective value range from 1 to
12
Year, the effective value range from 1980 to
2079
Week, the effective value range from 0[Sun]
to 6[Sat]
 Select “Use External Time for Event” in [HMI Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes].
94
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
 Add the needed event to Event Information List.
☞ For details about event information logon, refers to [Advanced Part 4.15.3 Event Information]
 use a event display to display information written in event information list.
attribute：
Read Address
LW 0（HMI Local Register）
Format
Sequence No.
Event Trig Time
Acknowledge Time
Return to Normal Time
Standard Time Format（H:M:S）
Extended Date Format（Y/M/D）
 use a timer to transport data from PLC to HMI
attribute：
Execution Cycle
1×100ms
Data Transmission
Source Address
Destination Address
SD 8013*（PLC register） LW 9010（HMI system special register）
Data Type
Word
95
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Data Transmission
6(word)
※ FX2N PLC D8000~D8255 corresponding to HMI SD8000~SD8255。
value in D0 is larger than 100：
2.8 LOGO Screen（Logo）
LOGO screen is the screen that appears during the startup of HMI. LOGO screen can be customized by users.
2.8.1 LOGO Screen Specification
The specification of LOGO screen
HMI models
MT4424T/TE
Max size（pixel）
（Width×Height）
Picture format
800×480
MT4414T/TE
Jpg, bmp, gif and so on
MT4620TE
800×600
Others
Width×Height<131000
2.8.2 Init Screen Setting

Change initial window：
Graph instrument
step
96
Advanced Part Basic Design Method

Select the HMI to be set LOGO
screen in Construct Window.
2
 Click the
icon in Toolbar.
1
 Right-click in the editing space after
entering
the
LOGO
screen
setting
window.
 Select “Load Image”
 There are will pop up [Open] dialog
box, user can find the path of picture to
be imported and select the picture.
 Click [Open] button.
97
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LOGO Screen is set successfully.

HMI Click the
icon in the
toolbar, and pop up the [KHDownload]
dialog box, then select the HMI to be
downloaded the LOGO screen.
Select the [LOGO file] and click the
[Download] button that means the
LOGO screen will be downloaded to the
HMI.
The method for not showing LOGO:
Open [KHManager]-[Download Operate] and select “Unshow LOGO”, then click the [Set] button. If the setting is successful,
[Set Successfully] dialog box will appear. And then LOGO screen will not appear during the startup of HMI next time.
☞ For details about KHManager, refer to [Advanced Part 8 KHManager].
2.8.3 Note for Using Init Screen
Pictures for initial screen should keep in allowed size.
2.9 Exchange Serial
By “exchange serial 0 and serial 1”,all the devices connected to these two ports along with their parameters will be
exchanged without bothering
to reset.
In Kinco HMIware construct window select the HMI which to exchange serial, right-click and select "Exchange serial 0 and
serial 1 ", as shown below:
98
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
!
Exchange serial function is only applicable to COM0 and COM1, are not suitable for COM2
2.10 Replace Devices
In the industrial field, we often need to change devices. Kinco HMIware has shortcuts to make it.
Note
HMI replacement must be carried out through the [Replace HMI Type] option, and if it is done by getting
the original HMI deleted and then a needed HMI type created, the original project screen will be lost.
99
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Note
PLC replacement must be carried out through the [Replace PLC Type] option，and if it is done by getting the
original PLC deleted and then a needed PLC type created, the PLC address type set in the original project
will be replaced by the HMI local address.
2.10.1 Replace HMI
Select a HMI icon and right-click it in the Construct Window of Kinco HMIware, and then click “Replace HMI Type”, as
shown below:
1
2
Then, the [Replace HMI Type] dialog box will pop up:
100
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Choose the HMI you want in []new HMI]-[HMI type],If resolution ratio of the two differ a lot ,it is suggested to choose all
the special windows ,or the old ones are in use. Click OK to finish.
!
1. Replace a HMI with 3 serials with one with 2,you should connect the device to COM0 or COM1 if it is
once connect to COM1.Otherwise ,replacement won`t be allowed.
2. HMI with Ethernet can only replaced by one has too
3.Once the new HMI type doesn`t support components in the old ones, all them will disappear
automatically.
4. If resolution ratio of the two types are different size of component will be enlarged or narrowed,
excluding word size..
2.10.2 Replace PLC
Select a PLC icon and right-click it in the Construct Window of Kinco HMIware, and then click “Replace PLC Type”, as
shown below:
Then, the [Replace PLC Type] dialog box will pop up:
101
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The user can select the replace PLC type in the pull-down list of the destination PLC type, and the user select new address
types in address type mapping list according to the address type relationship between source PLC type and destination PLC
type.
2.11 Index Function
2.11.1 Index Register
We can change operator address by changing value of a register .In this way, we call this register index register. Real
address=initial address + value of index register. After using index register, only the real register value will be modified, not
the initial one.
!
Some backgrounders including event information logon, alarm information logon, PLC control,
macro ,trend curve, XY plot, oscilloscope do not have this function.
[Example]
 Number Input component, the attribute is:
Read/Write Address
LW 0（HMI local register）
 Number Display component, the attribute is:
Read Address
D 100（PL C register）
102
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Index Register
select：LW 0
 Number Display component, the attribute is:
Read Address
D 200（PLC register）
Index Register
select：LW 0
You can check all the product indicator data by input line number
2.11.2 Index Station Num
When HMI communicates with more than one PLC through one port, it usually needs to drag many PLCs on the screen. If
there are a lot, it will be a little crowd. In order to avoid it, user can make it by [change station num.
When editing a project, only one PLC is dragged out, by change choose [change station num] in component attribute, you
can switch to different station PLCs.
0 ~ 255 station ID，special registers LW9416 ~ LW9431
103
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
1. Some backgrounders including event information logon, alarm information logon, PLC control, macro,
trend curve, XY plot, and oscilloscope do not have this function.
2. Special register index station ID, 16 different number devices to max on one screen .
[Example]
Number input, attribute:
read/write address
LW 9416（special register）
Number display, attribute：
Read address
D 100（PLC register）
Change station num
Index0：LW9416
 Number display, attribute：
Read address
D 101（PLC register）
Change station num
Index0：LW9416
You can check all the product indicator data by input line number
104
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Station 2
Production line
Station 1
1
Production cycle
150
Product count
210
D100
D101
Production line
150
210
2
Production cycle 200
Product count
Station 2
Station 1
Station 3
D100
D101
200
320
Station 3
320
2.12 Buzzer
Buzzer is built HMI body, and can issue a "beep" sound device. The buzzer is usually used for touch and alarm.
2.12.1 Touch Beep
Touch beep means that when user touches the screen components, the buzzer will issue a "beep" sound.
Enabling and disabling the touch beep can be achieved through the following three ways:

Set in [HMI Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes]:
Check the "User buzzer" means that enable the buzzer sounds, as shown:
105
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Save, compile and download to the HMI, then setting can take effect.

Set in system setting mode
Switch to system setting mode, and set the buzzer enable or disable.
Take a HMI for example:
2011 / 10 / 18
19 : 57 : 01
MTxxxx SETUP
Option
Startup Window NO.
0
Backlight Saver Time:
10
Buzzer Disabled
Enable
Reset HMI after set the buzzer!
2011 / 10 /18
19 : 57 : 01
MTxxxx SETUP
Option
0
Startup Window NO.
10
Backlight Saver Time:
Buzzer Disabled
Enable
Reset HMI after set the buzzer!
☞More information refers to [Hardware Part 3 System Setting Mode]

Change the value of LW10012 to make buzzer enable or disable.
LW10012 Specific instructions as shown in table:
System Register
Descriptions
LW 10012
0:buzzer disable; 1: buzzer enable
2.12.2 Alarm Beep
When item logon in the alarm information or event information is triggered, HMI will beep.
106
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Choose “buzzer” as below：
Users can choose buzzing time raging from 1 to 65535, unit: second
User should set value of LB9141 to shut off the buzzer:
Special register address
LB 9141
Specification
ON：shut off buzzer，reset to 0
2.13 Screen Saver
Use a screen saver function can effectively prevent the screen in a important frame by inadvertently touch screen causes
disoperation.
Screen saver function is enabled in the [HMI Attribute] - [HMI extended attributes]:
When the HMI screen in the set period of time without touched, the screen will switch to the specified window that
screensaver window.
If the screen saver window is a non-fixed value, you can change the value of the special register LW9532 to change
107
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
screensaver window number.

1.
Screen saver time range from 1 to 65535, unit is minute; if set to 0, it means does not use the screen
saver function.
2. Check the "Return to original window when screensavers ends", which means that when the system
enters screen, if there are touch-screen operation, the system will switch back to the previous window
into screensavers. Uncheck it means to continue to stay in the screensaver window, you need to set
window switching element to switch screen.
2.14 Password Setting
Kinco HMIware security function includes project protect, screen protect and component protect.
2.14.1 Project Protection

project protection：before you can open a project ,you should input password

Project password protection:

Upload protect：before uploading ,you should input a password

Project upload projection:
After input upload password

Project decompile
protection:：when turning pkg into wpj, you should input a password

Project decompile
protection:
PKG
file
WPJ
file
After input decompile
password
2.14.2 Screen Protection
You can set security levels or user permissions to limit operator from entering some important windows.
108
Advanced Part Basic Design Method

security levels to protect screen
Set number of security levels and relevant password in [HMI attribute]-[security levels].
There are two ways：
Take window A switching to window B for example:

Window security level
Window security level is set to 0(default), Window B security level is set to 1, then window A can be switched to window
B when the system security level is equal or up to 1. So user must input the 1 or up 1 level password before switching the
window.
About password window：
User can pop password window with the help of direct window, while function key will be used to switch the state of it.
User can also create a new window or call the system one[Frame9:Login Window].
 Set the control authority
Set control setting to the component changing window. Choose “conditional enable” in [attribute]-[control
setting]-[Touching enabled setting], select “security level”, set minimum level:1(or higher than 1).Then only users
whose level is not less than 1can operate

this component.
screen protection through user permission
You need first to assign authority in [HMI attribute]-[user permissions setting]
Then you can set control setting of a component to implement this function.
Choose “conditional enabling”in [HMI attribute]-[control setting]-[touching enabled setting],select “permission control”,
“select permission”:1 (for example).
Only user who has permission 1 can use this component. User can input its name and password to get the permission.
About login window:
User can also create a new window or call the system one [Frame9: Login Window].
2.14.3 Component Protection
In Kinco HMIware, you can limit others to operate some important components by set security levels or user permissions.
In two following ways you can protect components from being used without allowance:
109
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Through Security Level

Through Permission Control
☞For details about password, refers to [Advaced part 10 Password]
2.15 Data Encryption
For the data stored in the external memory – USB disk\ SD card, data encryption function can be used to limit the user to
make modification, editing and so on to the data files as CSV format.

1.
If the [data decryption] operation is not performed to the CSV file generated for the component using
[Data Encryption], the illegible characters will be displayed in the opened CSV file.
2.
If the data is decrypted through KHManager, the CSV file can only be opened for viewing instead of
modifying or editing.
3.
If the encrypted file is modified by someone intentionally, the error prompt will appear during the
[Decompile] operation in KHManager, making the damage of source file informed to the user.
4. The components supporting [Data Encryption] function are trend curve, XY plot, historical data
display components.
Take the setting method of [Data Encryption] for sampling data file of the Trend Curve as example:
(1) [Trend graph component attribute] - [Save historical data] - Select [Save to external device] - Select [Data Encryption].
（2）The illegible characters will be displayed in the generated CSV file after the encryption if it is directly opened.
110
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
（3）Open the KHManager software to decrypt CSV file.
111
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The following dialog box will pop up after the successful decryption.
The display effect of the CSV file decrypted successfully is as shown below.
2.16 Animation Effects
In Kinco HMIware, user can make the screen more vivid by using animation effects in three ways:
 using multiple state display component
By frequently switching some static pictures ,you can see a continuous effect .
[Example]multiple state display making animation effect of an air blower
112
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
 multiple state display，making animation effect of an air blower，attribute：
Read address
LW 0 (HMI local register)
Move type
3
Graphics
Vector graphics:
timer，change values of multiple state display，attribute：
Execution Cycle
1×100ms
State Setting
Mode
Periodical JOG++ (circle)
Date Type
word
Asc value
1
Upper
2
Addr. Type
LW 0 (HMI local register)
When the project is run, the effect is as shown:
☞More information refers to [Adcanced Part 4.3.2 Multiple State Display]

Animation
By changing values, component can move from one position to another, so user will see a continuous action effect.
[Example]ambition making conveyer belt effect
113
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
 ambition, attribute：
Read address
LW 0（HMI local register）
Graphics
Vector graphics:
timer，change values of presupposed path, attribute:
Execution Cycle
1×100ms
State Setting
Mode
Periodical JOG++ (circle)
Date Type
word
Asc value
1
Upper
3
Addr. Type
LW 1（HMI local register）
When the project is ran, the effect is as shown:
☞More infermation refers to [Advanced Part 4.12.1 Animation Components]

Moving component
 By changing values, component can move from one position to another ,so user will see a continuous action effect.
[Example] moving component making ball moving effect
320px
1
50px
50px
2
240px
3
 Moving component property is set to:
Read address
LW 0 (HMI local register)
Move type
X & Y axis
Graphics
Vector graphics:
 Timer element, used to change the X-direction coordinate values of moving element, property is set to:
Execution Cycle
2×100ms
114
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
State Setting
Mode
Periodical Bounce（turnover upon limit）
Date Type
word
Step
1
Upper
0
Lower
270（320-50）
Addr. Type
LW 1（HMI local register）
 Timer element, used to change the Y-direction coordinate values of moving element, property is set to:
Execution Cycle
3×100ms
State Setting
Mode
Periodical Bounce（turnover upon limit）
Date Type
word
Step
1
Upper
0
Lower
190（240-50）
Mode
LW 2（HMI local register）
When the project is ran, the effect is as shown:
2.17 Multi-Copy
The method of multi-copy:
Select components, click the right mouse button and select [Multi-Copy], pop up multiple copies Properties window.
115
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
a：Interval makes the right border of the component as the start point to perform the copy. Pitch makes the 1st point in the
upper-left corner of the component as the start point to perform the copy.
Interval
Pitch
b：Copy quantity：Duplication elements quantity
c：Interval：The distance between the duplicated elements, in pixels
d：Increase/ Decrease：Address Increase or decrease
e：Address auto change：Integer bit register address auto increase or decrease
f：After address auto change：The register address after the decimal point auto increase or decrease
2.18 Group
Several components or the graphics are combined together and saved into the Group Components Library, thus making them
called by other projects conveniently.
The format of Group Components Library is *.pgl.

How to open [edit box of group components library]
 Click [Draw] menu-[Group components]-[use the group element]
 Right-click the mouse in the blank space of the window, select [Groups]- [use the group element], then the [edit box of
group components library] dialog will pop up, as shown below:
116
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
Name
Export Library
Description
Make the [Group Components Library] saved in the path defined by the user for convenient
import.
Import Library
The default path of group components library is the userlib directory under the installation
path of Kinco HMIware, and the user can also import the group components library from
the self-defined path. Click [Import Library], and select the required group components
library in the path corresponding to the saved group components library, then click [Open]
to add this group components library to the group components library of the current project.
New Library
Click [New Library] button will make the dialog pop up, and the user can put the name of
this new created group components library in it. The default path to save the group
components library is the userlib directory under the installation path of the software.
Delete Library
Delete the group components library opened currently.
Delete All Groups
Delete all the graphics in the group components library opened currently.
Delete Group Components
Delete the selected graphics in the group components library opened currently.
Place Group Components
Place the selected group graphics in the group components library opened currently into the
screen edited currently.
[Example]: How to add group graphics to a new created group components library is described as follows:
（1）
Click [use the group element] in [Group components] in [Draw], and click [New Library] after the Edit Box of
Group Components Library pops up, and input “group” as the name of the group components library in the
group component library name dialog box, as shown below:
117
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Click [Enter] to create an empty group components library as shown below:
（2）Place 3 rectangles in the screen, as shown below:
Selected these 3 rectangles, and right-click the mouse to select [Group]-[Save the group elements], and then click the [Save
Group Components] button in the Edit box of Group Components Library dialog box to make the following dialog box pop
up.
118
Advanced Part Basic Design Method
（3）Input “graph 1”in the Part Group Name dialog box, and then click [OK] button, then these 3 rectangles with the
name of [graph 1] will be added into the new created group components library with the name of [group], as shown below:
（4）If there are other group components to be added into the group components library with the name of [group], the
operation method is the same as that mentioned above. And you just need to select [group] in the Group Components Library
list as the path to save it.
2.19 Find /Replace

Click [edit] menu-[find/ replace]

Click the

Press the PC keyboard shortcuts “CTRL” + “ F”
icon on toolbar
The following dialog box will pop up:
Name
Find Range
Description
Current Project
All the frames, macros, background database in HMI will be searched.
Background
Only the background database components, such as event information logon，alarm
119
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Database
information logon，trend carve etc. will be searched.
All HMI
Frames and Macros
All the frames and macros in current project will be searched.
All Frames
All the frames in current project will be searched.
All Macros
All the macros in current project will be searched.
Frames and Macros
All the frames and macros in the selected HMI will be searched.
All Frames
All the components in all the frames in the selected HMI will be
Current HMI
searched.
Current Frame
All the components in the current frame in the selected HMI will
be searched.
Find
Register
All Macros
Only all the macros in the current HMI will be searched.
Register Type
It means to find the device with Bit type or Word type.
Addr. Type
It represents the device type and device address in the controller
where the search is performed. Checking “Range” means the
search will be performed in the set range of address.
Text
Unselect match
It means the judgment of the case of the characters and the
case/ full match
consistency in the whole text will not be done during the search.
Match Case
It means the match of the case of the characters in the text to be
searched is required.
Full Match
It means the match of the text to be searched in the whole text is
required.
Replace
After this option is set, the device type and address found according to the set conditions will be replaced by
the specified device type and address. “Automigration by Cor. Address” in the Replace part will take
effect once the “Range” in Find part is selected. If “Automigration by Cor. Address”is not selected, the
replace address is the same; while if “Automigration by Cor. Address”is selected, the replace address is the
consecutive address which will automatically deviate by making the set replace address as the start address.
When the above parameters are set, if the “Find” button in the dialog box is clicked, the search of address
meeting the condition will be performed the window locating in the Find Range. If the component is found,
then No., Location, Name and Data will be displayed in the bottom white box. When the component
meeting the requirements is found, the screen will automatically switch to the position where this component
locates and the attribute dialog box for this component will pop up after this component is double-clicked.
Clicking “Replace” or “Replace All” means the found component meeting the conditions will be
replaced by the component with the address type and address set in the “Replace” part.
120
3 Window
Window is the basic element for HMI project, each screen is made of some windows. With window, you can place the
various components, graphics, texts displayed on the HMI screen.
3.1 Window Types
According to the different of the function or using ways, there are 3 types of windows: Basic Window, Common Window
and Fast Selection Window. The Basic Window after its size is changed can also be used as pop-up window. All the windows
can be used as the bottom window. Specific descriptions are shown as below:
Window Types
Basic Window
Descriptions
This window is the most commonly used window. When Basic Window is changed by using [Function
Key]-[change window] or [PLC Control]-[change window] function, the current screen will be cleared
(All the windows rather than Common Window and Fast Selection Window will be cleared.), and the
Basic Window to be changed will be displayed in the current screen. When the component in Basic
Window calls the pop-up windows, the Basic Window is always on opening status, and the original
information will be reserved, and the called pop-up window will be attached to the current Basic
Window. The master-slave relationship is between Basic Window and all of related pop-up windows.
When Basic Window N is switched to Basic Window M, all of the sub-windows of Basic Window N
will be closed while Basic Window M and is sub-windows will be displayed.
Fast Selection
This window is the window called by the operation buttons, is generally used to place the commonly
Window
used buttons. And it will be always displayed in the screen until the operation button makes it hidden.
The default Fast Selection Window is Frame 2. You can modify the other window as Fast Selection
Window in [HMI Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes]-[Fast Selection Window].
Common
The components in this window will be displayed in the other window, but does not include Pop-up
Window
Window. Usually each window shared or the same components will be put in Common Window. The
default Common Window is Frame 1. You can modify the other window as Common Window in [HMI
Attribute]-[HMI Extended Attributes]-[Public Window].
Bottom Window
This window is generally used to put some common components such as background graphics, charts,
and titles and so on. Using this window, you needn’t to edit the some components repeatedly. The
components in Bottom Window will be inserted into the general window during, and in fact window
isn’t displayed at all.
Pop-up Window
All the Pop-up windows are attached to the current Basic Window. The windows closed by the function
key only can close Pop-up window, direct window or indirect window, can’t close Basic Window. The
direct window, indirect window, [Event Information Logon]-[Pop-up window] and [Function
121
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Key]-[Popup window] all belong to the Pop-up window.
One screen can include Basic Window, Fast Selection Window, Common Window, while every Basic Window or Common
Window can include many Bottom Windows and Pop-up Windows. The relationship between them is shown as below:
※ The pop windows by Event information logon and Function key setup
The number of windows in each project is limited as follows：
Window Type
Default Window No.
The largest number of windows
Basic Window
0
The window No. ranges: basic window 0, 10 to 32767
Common Window
1
1
Fast Selection Window
2
1
Bottom Window
--
Up to 3 bottom windows can be set for each window.
Pop-up Window
--
Unlimited until the memory runs out
!
1.As once opened，the popup window won`t release the RAM unless closed，it is suggest to use it as few as
possible.
2. The same window can be opened once by one related window, therefore you can’t open the same
window by 2 or up direct window/ indirect window in the basic window.
3. All the Pop-up windows are attached to the current basic window, so when the current window is switched
to the other Basic Window, the Pop-up window will be closed. In this case, if the window is switched back to
this Basic Window, you will find that the Pop-up window originally attached to this window still exist;
otherwise you use the [Close window] function of function key.
4.A popup window in the common window does exist until shut down with the Function key [Close window]
5. Fast Selection Window supports the Pop-up window.
6. Use Basic window rather than Popup window, Indirect window or direct window which may slow down
the communication speed.
7. The actual largest number of Basic window and Popup window is related to HMI`s RAM.
122
Advanced Part Window
3.2 System Default Window
A new project has 10 default windows as seen in the Project structure window as follows:
Default windows description：
Window number
0
Window name
Frame0
Description
Basic window，default initial window
Common window，two popup windows used to pop default keyboard. Do not
1
Common Window
delete these two windows or the keyboard is unavailable.
Attention: Devices used in every window can be put in it
2
Fast Selection
Fast Selection，used in coordinate with [Fast selection window] in HMI attribute
3
NUM Keyboard
NUM Keyboard，default keyboard
4
ASCII Keyboard
ASCII keyboard，backup
5
File List Window
File List Window，used in coordinate with [Input/Export] in Function key
6
Password Window
Password Window，used in coordinate with File List Window
7
8
Confirm Action
Confirm Action Window，pop up when [Control setting]-[Operator confirm] is
☞For details,refer to【Advanced Part 4.1.7 Control Setting Option】
Window
chosen
HEX Keyboard
HEX Keyboard, backup
Login Window，pop up when [Control setting]-[Conditional enable]-[Security
9
Login Window
level]-[auto show login window] is chosen
☞More information refer to【Advanced Part 10 Password】
123
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1. Default Frame 0～9 no deletion
2.Device address and attribute in Frame1-9 cannot been modified， or they may not be in normal use. You
can only change the text set
3.3 Edit Window
3.3.1 Window Add
A new project has 10 system default windows. User can add some new windows, and there are 3 methods to create a new
window.

Click the [Add Frame] in [Screen] menu.

Click the

Select the HMI0 to right click in Project Structure Window and select [Add Frame],
icon of [Add Window] in [Page Switch Toolbar].
Click [Add Frame], and the [New Frame] dialog box will pop up.
124
Advanced Part Window
Specific descriptions are shown as below:
Name
Frame
Vacant
Position
Descriptions
When the existing windows are not in a continuous order, the new window will automatically insert
in the first vacant place.
End
The new frame will automatically be numbered next to the existing last number. Default choice.
Custom
The new frame number can be defined freelyfrom10 to 32767 without duplicating the existing
number.
Frame ID
New frame number. When the Frame position is [Vacant]or[End],this option is unavailable. Only
when it is [Custom], you can modify it.
Frame Name
Ether default or custom
After [New Frame] setting，click【New】，a new frame is created.
3.3.2 Window Opening
There are 4 methods to open the window after the window is created.

Select the window in the pull-down menu in [Page Switch Toolbar].

Click the icon of [Previous page]/[Next page] to open the window. The previous window can be displayed by clicking
the
icon, and the next window can be displayed by clicking the
incon.

Click the window ID in [Project Structure window]-[Tree View].

Double-click the window ID in [Project Structure window]-[Windows Preview].
125
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
3.3.3 Window Copy/ Multi-Windows Copy
 Window support the function of copy and multi copy. Click the [Copy/Delete windows] in [Screen] menu to copy
window.
Click [Copy/Delete windows] and the following dialog box will pop up：
Specific descriptions are shown as below:
Name
Descriptions
Operation Type
Copy window：count
Select the function of Copy window and set the count
Source Windows
Copy Single Window
Set the starting source copied window ID
126
Advanced Part Window
Param Setting
Copy Multi-Windows
Set the starting source copied window ID and the end source window ID,
from window M to window N will be copied at the same time.
Set the starting destination windows ID. The end destination window ID
Destination windows ID Setting
will increase automatically according to the copied number and the number
of the source window, can’t be modified.

The destination window ID mustn’t be the existing window ID.
3.3.4 Window Deletion/ Multi-Windows Deletion

Delete the current window
There are 4 methods to delete the current window:
 Click [Delete Frame] in [Screen] menu.
 Click the
icon of Delete Frame in [Page Switch Toolbar]
 Right click the selected window in [Project Structure window]-[Tree View], select [Delete].
 Selected the window in [Project Structure window]-[Tree View], and press the [Delete] key of PC keyboard.

Delete custom window
 Click the [Copy/Delete windows] in [Screen] menu to delete window.
127
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
 Click [Copy/Delete windows] to pop up the [Copy/Delete windows] properties dialog box，and select [Delete
Window].
Specific descriptions are shown as below:
Name
Descriptions
Operation Type
Delete Window
Select the function of delete window.
Delete Window
Delete Single Window
Set the starting deleted window ID
Operation
Delete Multi-Windows
Set the starting source deleted window ID and the end source window ID,
Setting
!
from window M to window N will be deleted at the same time.
1. After delete window, all components in this window will lost and can’t be recovered. Be careful with using
this function.
2. The windows from Window 0 to window 9 are system default window, unable to delete.
3.4 Window Attribute
3.4.1 Open Window Attribute Box
There are 5 methods to change the window attribute in Kinco HMIware software.

Click [Frame Attribute] in [Screen] menu.
128
Advanced Part Window

Click the

Directly click the

Double-click the blank in the current window.

Right click the selected window to set in [Project structure window]-[Tree View], select [set].
icon in the [Current Frame Attribute] in [Page Switch Toolbar].
icon.
3.4.2 Window Attribute Descriptions
Window attribute descriptions are shown as below:
129
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Window attribute descriptions
Name
Assign the name for each window for convenient differentiation.
No.
The window No. ranges from 0 to 32767. Window No. can be set when the new window
is created, and it can’t be changed after it has been created.
Security Level
Set the security level for the current window
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10 Password]
Switching to the lowest security
This function is used with security level.
level when window closed
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10 Password]
Position
X/Y
This function is only valid for using “popup window” function of
the function key. When the window is set this attribute, the vertex in
the upper-left of the window will be displayed in the special X/Y
position.
Width/Height
Set the width and height of the window. If the special attribute features
[Print page], the width and height both can be larger than the fact
screen size, but do not exceed 1024.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 13 Print]
Bottom Window
Set the corresponding bottom windows for the current window. The bottom window is in
the bottom of the edit window as background graphics. The window to be set as the
bottom window must be the created window, where the components used by the
multiple windows together can be put.
Frame
Set the width and the color of frame. The frame width ranges from 0 to 16. If the width
is not 0, the color can be selected for the frame.
Shielding public window
If the shielding public window keyboard mapping is selected, it will shield the keyboard
keyboard mapping
in the common window. This function is only valid for the self-keyboard HMI.
Special Attribute
Keyboard page: Set the current window as keyboard window, and use with the specified
keyboard of the keyboard setting in component attribute. ☞For details, refer to
[Advanced Part 2.4 Keyboard]
Print page: Set the current window as print window. ☞For details, refer to [Advanced
Part 13 Print]
Video page: Set the current window as video window. It is set when video component is
put in pop-up window.
Use Background Color
[Fill color] is the background color, [Background] is the filling graphics color. If the fill
130
Advanced Part Window
style is 0, only fill color is displayed in this window.
Transparence
It is only valid for the pop-up window and the fast selection window. Transparence is
0%, 20%, 50%, 80%, 100%
Pop Window Type
The Pop Window Type shows the relationship between one pop-up window and its
adjacent window.
If one window features “Monopoly”, its parent window will be frozen
Monopoly
after it pops up, and it will always be displayed in the Top layer。
If one window features “Clipping”, the border of this window will be
Clipping
restricted by its parent window, i.e. the part displayed out of the border of its
parent window will be cut off.
If one window features “Tracking”, it will move together when its parent
Tracking
window moves.
Coherence
Window A and Window B are both attached to the Basic Window. Generally,
Window A will be displayed in the Top layer when it is touched. But if
“Coherence” is selected, it will not be displayed in the Top layer even if it
is touched, but it will always be attached to its parent window.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 3 Window]
Note: If “Clipping” is selected, “Tracking” must be selected simultaneously.
Timer List descriptions
Timer List
Show all the timers. If there is none，it won`t display.
Special setting element list descriptions
Special setting
Show all the timers and setting components with window attribute. If there is none ,it won`t display
element list
【Example】Pop Frame10,11,12 over Frame0,transparence are respectively0%,20%,80%.Moreover,initial coordinate are
respectively（0,0）,（110,0）,（220,0）.
Popup
frame10
Popup
frame11
131
Popup
frame12
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
frame0:3 function keys to pop frame10,11,12：
function
Change window：pop frame10
pop frame10
pop frame10
Tag
Use tag；0：Pop frame10
Use tag；0：Pop frame11
Use tag；0：Pop frame12
Graphic
Vector graphic：
Frame10，11，12attribute settings：
Initial coordinate
0
110
220
transparence
0%
20%
80%
Background color
choose，fill color：yellow
Save, compile and download. In operation，click function key, you can see frame as bellow
Popup
frame10
Popup
frame11
Popup
frame12
Popup
frame10
Popup
frame11
Popup
frame12
3.5 Components Related to Window
Components directly related to the window are: Direct window, indirect window, and function key (Change window, Goto
Prev, Change common window, Change fast selection window, Popup window, Close window, Popup window title bar and
Minimize).
Functions directly related to the window are: Change Window, Write Data to PLC (Current Base Window), Change Window
(Ignore the window 0) of PLC Control.
☞
For details about contents of these components, refer to [Advaced part 4 Component]
132
4 Component
Components are the objects by which user inputs and operate data; user can execute some operations by operating these
objects. The attribute of component must be set correctly according to actual application. Different attributes influence the
component operating and executing result directly. This chapter will introduce the detail of component attribute.
4.1 Common Setting of Component
4.1.1 Create and Delete Component
(1)Create component
There are two ways to create component:

Create from the Graph element window
In the PLC parts/Function parts/projects database of Graph element window, drag the component to the edit area, then the
attribute window will pops up automatically, there will be a “+” cursor when you click the OK of attribute window, then
move the cursor to appropriate position and click left button to put the component, click right button to cancel creating
component. As shown in following picture:
2
1

Create from Menu
Click the components(I) menu, chose a wanted component, then the attribute window will pops up automatically, there
will be a “+” cursor when you click the OK of attribute window, then move the cursor to appropriate position and click
left button to put the component, click right button to cancel creating component.
133
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Text library, address tag and sound lib are in the Option(O) menu
（2）Delete component
There are two ways to delete the components that have created

Delete by right click menu
Chose the component, right click then click the Delete to delete the selected component

Delete by Delete key on the key board
Chose the component, then press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete component
4.1.2 Execution Order of Components
In some application, there is a chance that one touch to trigger multiple components execution, so the customer stacks
several components together.
At this time, if there is a touch operation, the stacked components are not executed at the same time but executed according
to the order of components.
The top component is executed first, then the following components. As shown in the following picture:
Besides, customer can check the layer position of the stacked components
Right click the stacked components; you can see the following options:
134
Advanced Part Component
You can use the tool bar
(set top/set bottom/ previous layer/next layer) to adjust the layer position of the
stacked components
!
1.
If there is a component that executes Change window operation in the stacked components, the
components that under this Change window component will not be executed.
2. The number of stacked components should be less than 32.
4.1.3 Methods to Open Attributes Window
The attributes window will pop up automatically when the component created, and there are three methods to open attribute
135
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
window of the created component.

Double click to open attribute window

Chose the component, right click, chose the Attribute operation in the menu

Chose the component, click the
icon on the tool bar
How to open attributes window of stacked components
When multiple components stacked together, the lower component can be selected by right click, then open attributes
window by above methods.
!
Multiple attribute windows can not be open at the same time
4.1.4 Basic Setting
In the Basic Attributes option, customer can set the operation object, address type and other related attributes
Detail description of Basic Attributes
Priority
Reserved
136
Advanced Part Component
Write Address
The register address to which the status value or data that writes.
If it is unavailable, the component is
read-only component, the display status depends on the value and data in the Read Address
HMI
The HMI number; the number is distributed automatically in order when the HMI
is built
PLC No.
The PLC controller number; the number is distributed automatically in order
when the PLC controller is built
Change Station Num
When HMI communicate with multiple PLC controllers, you can use this option
to connect corresponding PLC controller. This option is used in the application
that uses one HMI-multiple PLCs or ,multiple HMIs-multiple PLCs but only one
PLC in the program
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.11.2 Index Station Num]
Addr. Type
Chose the address type of the PLC register or HMI local register
Bit registers in HMI : LB、LW.B、RB、RBI、FRB、FRBI
Word registers in HMI: LW、RW、RWI、ERW0~2、ERWI0~2、FRW、FRWI
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 15.1 Local Register of HMI]
5
PLC/Controllers’ address type is different according to different PLC/controller
device
Refer to the Communication Connection Guide for more details about
PLC/controller address type
Address
Set the register address of the command or data
Code Type
BIN,
BCD or LSB
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.5 Cdoe Type]
Word Length
The register number that the component takes up, It is usually 1, it also changes
according to different components and address type.
System Register
The registers in HMI which have special use
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 15.2 System Special Registers of HMI]
Format
The format of the address type in PLC/controller or HMI
Use Address Tag
Use the addresses that have been defined in the Address Tag
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.2 Address Tag Library]
Use
register
Read Address
the
index
Use a certain register as the index register of the component
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.11.1 Index Register]
The register address from which the status value or data read. If it is unavailable, the component is
137
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
write-only component; the display status cannot display the data or state of read address.
Description
The reference name of this component.
4.1.5 Tag Setting
In the Tag option of component attribute, set the display text of each state.
Detail description of Tag
Use Tag
Use the tag
Use Graph Font
Use graph font mode in tag text
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.3.4 Grahp Font]
Tag Cross-border
Checked
Check
Adjust the component size automatically according to the tag content, as following
picture:
Uncheck
Do not adjust the component size automatically according to the tag content, the tag
content that cross border will be cut, as following picture:
138
Advanced Part Component
Use Textlib
Use the text in the textlib as tag content
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.1 Text Library]
Tag List
The comment text corresponding to each state
Tag Content
Input the comment text of each state here
Copy
Contents
to All State
Front Type
Chose one state in the Tag list, click this option to copy the tag content of this state to all the state
Use vector font or dot matrix font in tag content
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.3 Text]
Font Attribute
Set the attributes of the tag content, like font, size, alignment, color and so on. The current font
attributes can be copied to each state or tag content of each language

The steps to set tag:
Add tag content of state 0
Step
Check the “Use Tag
Chose the state 0 in Tag List
Input comment text in the Tag
Content
Add tag content of state 1
 Chose the state 1 in Tag List
Input comment text in the Tag
Content
4.1.6 Graphics Setting
Set the graphic of each state in the Graphics option of component attribute, the graphic can be vector or bit map.
Detail description of Graphics
139
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Vector Graphics
Use vector graphic to display
Bitmap
Use bitmap to display
Use original size
This option is effective when chose bitmap as graphic, if it is checked, component will display the
original size of the graphic
Save
to
System
Library
Save the checked graphic or graphic of some state to the system library in the UserselPath file folder
Import Graphics
Import vg or bg format graphic from system library or external
Graphics Status
Preview the graphic of the checked state. For some stateless control component, like Vector Graph
and Bitmap, The graphic display in Vector or Bitmap is the picture checked here.
☞Refer to Advanced Part 5.3 Graphic Library for more details
4.1.7 Control Setting Option
Set the control conditions and security in the Control Setting, also can set the trigger macro and trigger register operation
here.
Detail description of Control Setting
140
Advanced Part Component
Touching
Always valid
The touch is enabled always the time. The operator can operate is all the time
Enable
Always invalid
The touch is never enabled. The operator cannot control operator it
Setting
Conditional
Security Level: If clicked means the current security level must higher than the set
Enabling
security, so the operator can operate this component to set the state value or data to the
corresponding register.
☞For
details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.3.1 Security Level Protection for
Components]
Permission Control: If clicked means the operator must has corresponding permission so
he can operate this component to set the state value or data to the corresponding register.
141
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞For
details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.3.2 User Permission Protection for
Components]
Register Control: if clicked means the specified bit register or word register must satisfy
the setting conditions, so that operator can operate this component to set the state value
or data to the corresponding register.
Auto
show
login window
If clicked means when touch the component but the current user
security level or permission cannot satisfy the setting security level or
permission, the password input window (Frame9: Login window)
will pop up automatically.
Show
Element
Invalid Tag
If clicked means when the component is touch invalid, the component will display touch
invalid tag. This function is optional only when the Always Invalid or Conditional
Enabling is selected. The color of touch invalid tag can be set in HMI Extended
Attributes of HMI Attributes
Security
Min Press Time
Setting
The minimum time of a hold pressing to make touch effective. The unit is 100ms, when
it is set to 0, it means do not set this option.
Operator
If clicked means when touch the component, the Confirm Window (Frame7：Confirm
Confirm
Action Window) will pop up. Click YES to make this touch effective and if click Cancel
or do not click YES during the wait(s), the touch operation will be canceled
142
Advanced Part Component
automatically.
Record
If clicked means the operation event will be recorded , this event can be displayed in the
Operations
Operation Log , and saved in csv file in the external storage
Min
Time
Interval(Second)
The minimum time interval between two touch operations of one same component or
two different components. 0 means do not set the Min time Interval
Notificatio
Trigger Macro
Execute the specified macro when the operation to the component is successful
n
Trigger Register
Word
Write the “Write Value” to the specified register before the
Written Notice
After
operation is executed successfully
Written
Notice
Bit
operation is executed successfully
Write the On/Off signal to the specified register before the
Written Notice
After
Notice
Write the “Write Value” to the specified register after the
operation is executed successfully
Written
Write the On/Off signal to the specified register after the
operation is executed successfully
4.1.8 Display Setting
Set the display condition, display size, position in the Display Setting.
Detail description of Display Setting
143
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Lock
If clicked means the component is locked, the position of component cannot be changed by mouse or
moving keys on keyboard
X/Y
The coordinate value of the top left of component
Width/Height
The width and height of component(The unit is pixel)
Always Display
If clicked means the component is displayed all the time
Never Display
If clicked means the component is hidden, the hidden component cannot touch
Conditional
Security Level Control: Clicked means the component is displayed only when the current security level
Display
is higher than the setting level.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.3.1 Security Level Protection for Components]
User Permission Control: If clicked means the component is displayed only when the operator has
corresponding permission
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.3.2 User Permission Protection for Components]
Register Control: Click means he component is displayed only when the specified bit register or word
register satisfies the condition
144
Advanced Part Component
.
4.1.9 Touch Sound Control
In the Sound option, set the sound when the component is touched
Detail description of Sound
Use Sound
Set the sound when the component is touched.
Sound Library
Open the sound library attributes box.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.6 Sound Lib]
Play
Play and listen the audio
Stop
Stop the audio
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.4 Sound Lib Application]
!
“The sound function is only suitable for the HMI with audio output port.
4.1.10 Save Historical Data
Detail description of Save Historical Data
145
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Save to Recipe
Save sampling data to the recipe register (RW) of HMI
Data Field
The end address = the start address + 20 +sampling page number*(4+ channel number). If the data
exceeds the storage limit, the sampling data will cover the previous data
Save to External
Save the sampling data to the external device
Device
Storage Devices
SD card, USB DISK1*、USB DISK2* are optional
Outage keep in
If the HMI is powered off and restart, the information can be regained
Export to csv
Save the sampling data to external device in CSV file. This CSV file is saved in
File
/trend/subdirectory/file name
Data Encryption
Encrypt the sampling data
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.15 Data Encryption]
Save MS
Save the sampling time to ms level and record in CSV file
Subdirectory
Set the subdirectory name of CSV file when it is saved in external device, customer
can change this name
The default subdirectory name of History Data is History Data, Trend Curve is
History Trend, XY plot is XY-CHART
Storage Type
Daily File
Save the sampling data by days, and the name of CSV files is in
“yyyy mmdd” form
146
Advanced Part Component
Single File
Save the sampling data by items, and the name of CSV file is the
Subdirectory
Bulk Storage
Provide a buffer storage mode, Only when the data is up to the bulk storage setting,
and then write the data to SD card or U disk. The “Default” means don’t use buffer
storage mode, as soon as there is sampling data, write this data to SD card or U disk
Max Storage
Set the limit of the storage: if it is by Daily File, the unit is day, if it is by Single
File, the unit is item. If chose the “Daily File”, the file name is as “yyyymmdd”,
The Max Storage means the maximum csv file number under this routine, if csv
file exceeds the max storage number; the previous files will be deleted. If chose
the “Single File” in Storage Type, the CSV file named by the Subdirectory name,
The Max Storage means the maximum items in this csv file, if the items is up to
the limit, the data will not be saved
Variable
Subdirectory
The Subdirectory is read from specified registers, the maximum register number is 16
※ If a HMI has two USB host, the number of U disk depends on the sequence they plug in HMI. That is to say the first U
disk that plug in HMI is USB DISK1, and the second U disk that plug in HMI is USB DISK2. It does no matter with the
slot position.
!
When the sampling data is saving to external storage device, the special system register should set OFF
before removing the external storage device, or the data will be damaged or lost. They are LB9153（SD
card）、LB9154（USB disk1）、LB9155（USB disk2）
4.2 Button/Switch Components
They are Bit State Setting, Bit State Switch, Multiple State Setting, Multiple State Switch, Combination Operations, and
Function Key and so on.
4.2.1 Bit State Setting
The Bit State Setting defines a touch area. When this area is active, this button can set the HMI bit address
or PLC bit address On or Off. The display status of this component will not be changed by the input value.
147
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Detail description of Bit State Setting
Type
Function description
Press to set specified address ON, still ON if released or pressed again
On
Press to set bit address OFF, still OFF if released or pressed again
Off
Press to set specified address ON, still ON if released; Press again to set address OFF,
Still OFF if released
Toggle
Only when this component is hold pressing, the specified address is ON, change to
OFF if released
Reset
When the window which contains this component opens, the specified address is set
ON
Set On when Window Open
Set Off when Window Open
When the window that contains this component opens, the specified address is set
OFF
148
Advanced Part Component
When the window that contains this component closes, the specified address is set ON
Set On when Window Close
When the window that contains this component closes, the specified address is set OFF
Set OFF when Window Close
When the window that contains this component is maximized, the specified address is
set ON
Set ON when Window
Maximized
When the window that contains this component is maximized, the specified address is
set OFF
Set OFF when Window
Maximized
When the window that contains this component is minimized, the specified address is
set ON
Set ON when Window
Minimized
Set OFF when Window
Minimized
When the window that contains this component is minimized, the specified address is
set OFF
149
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
When window minimized
M0:OFF
M0
When the backlight of the window that contains this component is off, the specified
address is set ON
Set On when Backlight Off
When the backlight of the window that contains this component is off, the specified
address is set OFF
Set On when Backlight Off
In the window which contains this component, when a Number Input component
inputs successfully, the specified address is set ON
Set On when Input Success
In the window which contains this component, when a Number Input component
inputs successfully, the specified address is set OFF
Set OFF when Input Success
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which
Key
has keys itself. This function is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys
itself
4.2.2 Bit State Switch
The Bit State Switch is a combination of Bit State Lamp and Bit State Setting component, it defines a
touch area, if this area is active, this component can switch HMI or PLC bit address between on and off, at
150
Advanced Part Component
the same time, the display state of component will change according to the value of read address.
Detail description of Bit State Switch
Switch Type
Function description
Press to set specified address ON, still ON if released or pressed again
On
Press to set specified address OFF, still OFF if released or pressed again
Off
Press to set specified address ON, still ON if released; Press again to set address OFF, Still
OFF if released
Toggle
Only when this component is hold pressing, the specified address is ON, change to OFF if
released
Reset
Key
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which has keys
itself. This function is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys itself
151
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
4.2.3 Multiple State Setting
The Multiple State Setting component defines a touch area, if this area is active; this component writes a
setting value to a specified register in HMI or PLC. The display status of component will not be changed
by the value of read address.
Write data“125”
to D100
D100=125
Detail description of Multiple State Setting
Setting Mode
Set
Press component to set the setting constant to a specified register
Constant
Set at
Window
When the window with this component opens, set the setting constant to a specified register
automatically
Open
Set at
Window
When the window with this component closes, set the setting constant to a specified register
automatically
Close
Set at
Window
When the window with this component is maximized, set the setting constant to a specified
register automatically
Maximized
152
Advanced Part Component
Set
at
Window
When the window with this component is minimized, set the setting constant to a specified
register automatically
Minimized
Set
at
Backlight
When the backlight of the window that contains this component is off, set the setting value
to a specified register automatically
Off
Set at Enter
In the window which contains this component, when a Number Input component inputs
success
successfully, set the setting value to a specified register automatically
D100=125
####
123
Input is
accepted
120
123
D100
Set at Enter
In the window which contains this component, when a Number Input component inputs
Fail
unsuccessfully, set the setting value to a specified register automatically
D100=125
####
123
Input is not
accepted
120
120
D100
Add value
The value in specified register will be added “Addend” every time presses this button, the
result will not exceed the Upper limit
153
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Sub value
The value in specified register will be subtracted “Subtrahend” every time presses this
button; the result will not exceed the Lower limit
Jog++
If hold pressing the button exceeding the “Delay Time”, the value in specified register will
be added “Addend” in a “Jog Speed” time. The result will not exceed the Upper limit
If the “Immediate Execution of Increase/Decrease Progressively” is checked, the value in
specified register will be added “Addend” immediately at every press. If hold pressing the
button, the value in specified register will be added “Addend” in every “Jog Speed” time
until reaches the Upper limit
Jog--
If hold pressing the button exceeding the “Delay Time”, the value in specified register will
be subtracted “Subtrahend” in a “Jog Speed” time. The result will not exceed the Lower
limit
If the “Immediate Execution of Increase/Decrease Progressively” is checked, the value in
specified register will be subtracted “Subtrahend” immediately at every press. If hold
pressing the button, the value in specified register will be subtracted “Subtrahend” in every
“Jog Speed” time until reaches the “Lower” limit
Jog++(Circ
If hold pressing the button exceeding the “Delay Time”, the value in specified register will
le)
be added “Addend” in a “Jog Speed” time until reaches the Upper limit, then adds addend
from the Lower limit
154
Advanced Part Component
If the “Immediate Execution of Increase/Decrease Progressively” is checked, the value in
specified register will be added “Addend” immediately at every press. If hold pressing the
button, the value in specified register will be added “Addend” in every “Jog Speed” time
until reaches the Upper limit, then adds addend from the Lower limit
Jog--(Circl
If hold pressing the button exceeding the “Delay Time”, the value in specified register will
e)
be subtracted “Subtrahend” in a “Jog Speed” time until reaches the Lower limit, then
subtract subtrahend form the Upper limit
If the “Immediate Execution of Increase/Decrease Progressively” is checked, the value in
specified register will be subtracted “Subtrahend” immediately at every press. If hold
pressing the button, the value in specified register will be subtracted “Subtrahend” in every
“Jog Speed” time until reaches the “Lower” limit, then subtract subtrahend form the Upper
limit
Variable
The parameters, like Set Value, Addend, Subtrahend, Upper, Lower, are read from specified registers
Parameters
Key
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which has keys itself. This
function is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys itself
4.2.4 Multiple State Switch
The Multiple State Switch is the combination of Multiple State Display and Multiple State Setting. It
displays the mapping status according to the value of Read Address (the maximum mapping status is
256). At the same time, it defines an area, when this area is touched, this component writes the
mapping value to the Write Address. The Write Address and Read Address can be the same or different.
155
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Detail description of Multiple State Switch
Control
Add
The State No. adds 1 every time press this button, and the mapping value is write to the
Write Address, at the same time this component displays corresponding graph according to
the value of Read Address.
Unloop unchecked:
Unloop checked:
Sub
The State No. subtracts 1 every time press this button, and the mapping value is write to the
Write Address, at the same time this component displays corresponding graph according to
the value of Read Address.
Unloop unchecked:
Maximum State 6
Beep...Beep...
state5
state4
state3
state0
state1
state2
Unloop checked:
List
Display the state in list, and the current selected state is in Select Color
156
Advanced Part Component
State Num.
Dropdown
Display the state in dropdown list, but only display the current selected state. Click the
List
dropdown list to display all the states
The maximum state number is 256.(The BIN or BCD encoding supports 256 states at most, and the LSB
encoding supports 17 states at most.)
Map Value
When the value in Read Address equals one of the values in the Map Value list, the component displays the
corresponding graph and tag. When the component switches to one state, the corresponding Map Value
is write to the Write Address
Line Spacing
If chose the List or Dropdown List as control mode, this option is used to set the line space between each
tag. The unit is pixel
Key
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which has keys itself. This
function is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys itself
4.2.5 Combination Operations
The Combination Operations is used to combine multiple bit state setting and multiple state setting as one
component. So the operator can execute bit state setting and multiple states setting operation by 0nly one
button.
157
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Detail description of Combination Operations basic attributes
Component List
Add multiple Bit State Setting and Multiple State Setting components by right click.
Write Address
Set the Write Address of the components in the Component List
Setting Mode
Bit State Setting supports On, Off, and Toggle mode only.
☞For details about Bit State Setting, refer to [Advanced Part 4.2.1 Bit State Setting]
Multiple State Setting components support Set Constant, Add and Sub mode only.
☞For details about Multiple State Setting, refer to [Advanced Part 4.2.3 Multiple State Setting]
Exiting
when
If checked means that the execution will stop if one of the components fails during the sequence
component
execution, the next component will not be executed. If unchecked means the Combination
execution Fail
Operation executes from top to bottom, if one of the components fails during the sequence
execution, then jump to execute the next component.

1. When add the components, use the “Insert before” and “Insert behind” option to set the order of the
components
2. Use the Move UP and Move Down to change the order in component list
3. Use the Delete option to delete components
4.2.6 Function Key
The Function Key provides functions like Switch Window, Keyboard Function, Clear Event, Touch
Calibration, save Screenshot to Extended Memory, Execute Macro, and Print and so on. It also can be
used to design the key board, and Function Key does not have control register, it executes functions by
touch.

Switch Window
Description of Switch Window function
Change Window
Press the function key to close the current window (sub windows in this window included) and
switch to the window with specified window No.
158
Advanced Part Component
Press the function key to close the current basic window, and come back to the previous window.
For example, switch fram0 to frame 10, press this function key in frame 10 to back to frame 0. This
function is only suitable for basic window
Goto
Prev
If pressed, the Common Window (The default is Frame 1) will be replaced by the specified window
as the new Common Window
Common
Window
Frame 1
Frame 0
Frame 0
Change
Common
Common
Window
Frame 10
+
+
Frame 0
Frame 0
Window
If pressed, the Fast Selection Window (The default is Frame 2) will be replaced by the specified
window as the new Fast Selection Window
Change
Fast
selection window
Pop up window
If pressed, the specified window will pop up, and displayed above the current window, the current
window will not close
159
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Use this option to close the pop-up window, but cannot close the Direct Window and Indirect
Window, because they are controlled by the bit or word register. The Close Window function can
close the pop up window only, but cannot control data in
Close Window
register
Hold pressing this function key to move the pop up window. This function is suitable for pup up
window, direct/indirect window only
Pop up window title
bar
If pressed, the pop up window will be minimized in the task bar. Press the window icon on task bar
to reset the window to original position. This function is suitable for pup up window, direct/indirect
window only
Minimize

Map Keyboard
Use this function to make virtual keyboard.
Function description of keyboard
Enter
The same function as the Enter on the keyboard
Backspace
The same function as the Backspace on the keyboard
Clear
Clear the content in the Number Input and Text Input component
Escape
Cancel operation, the same function as the ESC on the keyboard
Unicode
Set the input characters in the “Number Input” and “Text Input” component. The number (0, 1, 2…) or
160
Advanced Part Component
ASCII and Unicode (a, b, c…) are operational
Move the cursor according to the mode, like Move up, Move down, Move left, Move right, Line head,
Cursor
Line tail, First position, Last position. This function is suitable for the Note Book component only
Select text operation, Start select and Finish select included. This function is suitable for the Note Book
Select Text
component only
Text Operation

Set the text operation, includes Copy, Cut, and Paste. This function is suitable for the Note Book only
Execute Macro
Chose the macro
Press function key to execute the existing macro.
This function can set function for the F1~F8 of HMI, includes Along, Backwards, ESC, Enter and so on. This function is
suitable for MT4201T HMI only.

Touch Calibration
Press function key with this option checked to enter the touch calibration screen. Customer can calibrate the touch panel.


Enter the calibration screen without set the DIP switches
Clear Event
Press function key to clear the event information in the Event Display component.

Save Screenshot to The Extended Memory.
Press function key to save the screenshot to the extended memory in bmp picture. So the customer can print or check the
screen of HMI.
☞For details about Save Screenshot to the Extended Memory, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC Control]

Import/Export
Press function key to import/export project or recipe data.
!
This function must works with the File List Window and only the HMI with USB host or SD card supports
it
161
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Description of Import/Export function
Import
project
to
HMI
Export Project from
HMI
Import the project (pkg file) from extended memory to HMI. After that, HMI will restart
automatically and run the project.
Export the project(pkg file) in HMI to extended memory
162
Advanced Part Component
Pop up Frame 5 and
select save path
Pr oj ect upl oad
Cu r r e n t
p a t h :
..\
event \
exmem\
hi st or yst or e\
l og\
scr \
t r end\
Pr oj ect upl oad
Cu r r e n t
p at h :
Fi l e
n a me :
Tr ee
/ di sk/ usb1/
..\
event \
exmem\
hi st or yst or e\
l og\
scr \
t r end\
Test . pkg
HMI 0:
Test . pkg
OK
Cu r r e n t
p a t h :
Pr oj ect upl oad
/ di sk/ usb1/
Fi l e
n a me :
Pr oj ect
Tr ee
Pr oj ect
Test . pkg
OK
OK
..\
1 \2
3
4
event
exm
em\
Clear
w
q
e
hi st or yst or e\r
l og\ a s d f
Caps
scr \
x
c
= t r| end\
?
z
+
_
Fi l e
n a me :
Tr ee
/ di sk/ usb1/
ESC
HMI 0:
HMI 0:
Pr oj ect upl oad
Input file name
..\
event \
exmem\
hi st or yst or e\
l og\
scr \
t r end\
Test . pkg
Test . pkg
Fi l e
n a me :
Cu r r e n t
p a t h :
Tr ee
/ di sk/ usb1/
>
<
pr oj ect
Test . pkg
5
6
t
g
vv
7
y
8
u
i
h
HM
I 0:j
b
n
CH
9
0
o
BACK
p
k
l
ENT
m
;
{
Page
Up
}
Page
Down
OK
After press OK
Import
Recipe
to
Import the recipe file (.rcp) in extended memory to HMI. The operation steps are the similar with
HMI
Import Project to HMI
Export Recipe from
Export the recipe file (.rcp) in HMI to extended memory. The operation steps are the similar with
HMI
Export Project from HMI
163
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Message Board
This function works with the Message Pad; it can be used as an assistant tool of Message Pad.
Description of Message Board
Tool
Pen
Press the function key to set the tool as a pen for Message Pad
Erase
Press the function key to set the toll as a eraser for Message Pad
Clear Block
Press the function key to clear the selected area of the Message Pad
Pen Color
Set color of pen
Pen Width
Set width of pen, 1~8 pixel are optional
Clear
Press function key to clear all content on Message Pad

Print
Press function key to print the current screen.
☞For details about print, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.5 PLC Control]

Map Keyboard
Map the function key to the F1~F12 of the keyboard. This function is suitable for HMI with USB host only.
4.3 Lamp Component
4.3.1 Bit State Lamp
The Bit State Lamp is used to indicate the state (0 or 1) of bit register in HMI or PLC. It can display tag
text and graphic.
Detail description of Bit State Lamp
Function
Description
Display the corresponding graphic according to the state. This graphic isn’t blinking
Normal
164
Advanced Part Component
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set.
Value 1 Blinking on state 0,
value0 Showing state 0
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
Value 1 Blinking on state 1,
value0 Showing state 0
Value 1 switch Blinking on state
1 and 0, value0 Showing state 0
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set.
Value 0 Blinking on state 0,
value 1 Showing state 0
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
Value 0 Blinking on state 1,
value 1 Showing state 0
Value 0 switch Blinking on state
1 and 0, value 1 Showing state 0
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
Value 1 Blinking on state 0,
value 0 Showing state 1
Value 1 Blinking on state 1,
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
value 0 Showing state 1
165
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Value 1 switch Blinking on state
1 and 0, value 0 Showing state 1
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
Value 0 Blinking on state 0,
value 1 Showing state 1
The blinking frequency (Rate) can be set
Value 0 Blinking on state 1,
value 1 Showing state 1
Value 0 switch Blinking on state
1 and 0, value 1 Showing state 1
4.3.2 Multiple State Display
The Multiple State Display displays the mapping state according to the value in the specified HMI
register or PLC register. It supports 256 mapping states at most.
Description of Multiple State Display
State Num.
Set the state number of Multiple State Display, it is up to 256. (The BIN or BCD encoding
supports 256 state at most, and the LSB encoding supports 17 states at most)
166
Advanced Part Component
Set the mapping value of each state. When the value in specified register equals the setting value,
Data Mapping
the component displays corresponding state
4.4 Number Components
Number components include Number Input Component and Number Display Component. They are used to write data to a
specified register or read data from a register and display this value.

Common Attributes of Number Component.
Description of number
signed int
unsigned int
Hex
Data type
Bin
Password
Float
Double
Display the data in signed decimal integer (0~9) format.16 bits data range:
-32768~32767; 32 bit data range: -2147483648~2147483647
Display the data in unsigned decimal integer (0~9) format.16 bits data range:
0~65535; 32 bit data range: 0~4294967295
Display the data in hex (0~F) format. The integer part can be set, no decimal. 6 bits
data range: 0~65535; 32 bit data range: 0~4294967295
Display the data in binary (0, 1) format. The integer part can be set, no decimal. 6 bits
data range: 0~65535; 32 bit data range: 0~4294967295
Display data in “*” format. Only the data type and date width can be set, other
options are ignored
Transform the 32 bits IEEE float data to decimal data and display in decimal. The
default data width is DWORD
Transform the 64 bits IEEE float data to decimal data and display in decimal. The
default data width is 4-DWORD
Data Width
Set the data width of the register 16 bits or 32 bits(WORD or DWORD)
Integer/Decimal
Set the display bit number before and behind decimal dot
Show plus sign
When the data type is signed int, click this option to display the “+” symbol before positive number
Set input/display range for Number Input/Display Component. “Variable Max/Min Value” checked
means that the Max/Min Value is variable, and set read register of this variable. The word length of this
Max/Min Value
register depends on the data width of component. For example, the Max/Min Value is LW0, if the word
Setting
width is WORD, the LW0 is minimum value register, LW1 is Maximum value register; and if the word
width is DWORD, the LW0 and LW1 are minimum value registers, LW2 and LW3 are the maximum
value registers
Off
normal
upper/lower
If the data is exceeds the Max/Min Value range, the component will display the data in the setting
color.
167
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Flash
If the value in certain register exceeds the upper limit or lower limit, the data in the component will be
flashing to enhance the alarm effect.
The data will be displayed after calculating by proportion, the Min Value and Max Value is must be set
in the function. For example, the original data is A, and the displaying data is B. Then the relationship
between is as followings:
B= Min Value+(A-Min)*Proportion and the Proportion=( Max Value -Min Value)/( Max-Min)
For example the original data is 20, according to the following setting, the displaying data is
15+(20-0)*(55-15)/(100-0)=23. So the component displays 23
Proportion
Conversion
※ For signed/unsigned int, if the Decimal is set, the original data will be displayed after left shift the Decimal bits, but also
set the original data to the register.
Description of Font
Set the display position of data,, it has for methods , they are Left, Right, Leading 0, Center.
For example, the Integer is 5, Decimal is 0, input value is 123, then the following are the
displaying in four different methods:
Alignment
Font Adjustment
Add the width of display area, the units is pixel
168
Advanced Part Component
Horizontal Increased 0 pixel
Horizontal Increased 60 pixel
#####
#####
60px
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which has keys
Key

itself. This function is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys itself
Related Attributes Setting of Numeric Data
Other Related Attributes
Set the Cursor Color when Numeric Data is triggered in the HMI Extended Attributes of HMI
Attributes.
Cursor
4.4.1 Number Input
Number Input Component write the data in value to the certain HMI or PLC register, at the same time
display the written date on HMI.
Attributes Description of Keyboard Setting
Public
Windows
Keyboard
Use the Public Windows Keyboard
It is the default setting , and use the keyboard in Frame3: NUM Keyboard
Use the specified keyboard in designated window. If use the self-made keyboard, the window
Specified Keyboard
where the keyboard is should set the Keyboard Page in Window Attribute, so the window number
can be displayed in the Specified Keyboard list
Keyboard
Pop-Up
Position
Do not Use Pup-Up
Set the keyboard pop-up position on HMI
When the Number Input Component is triggered, do not pup up keyboard. The HMI supports
169
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Keyboard
USB can use the external keyboard
The popped-up keyboard can input data to the components continuously by order. During the
input operating, the keyboard will not disappear when press ENTER, and the input cursor will
flash among the component in circle. The keyboard will be closed by press Close button
Use Input Order
Input Order
Set the input order number for the component
For multiple groups of components that need input the data continuously, the first triggered
component decides where the cursor circles
Group
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.4 Keyboard]
4.4.2 Number Display
Number Display is used to display the value in specific HMI or PLC register on HMI.
4.5 Text Components
The text components contain Text Input, Note Book, Text Display, they are used to decode the data by ASCII then write it to
specific register in character string or read data from specific register then display it in character string after the data
decoded by ASSIC

Common Attributes Setting of Text Components
170
Advanced Part Component
Common Attributes Description of Text Component
Swap the high byte and low byte, then display the high byte on the left and low byte on the
right
High byte and low byte
swaps
If checked, the text content is decoded by Unicode and displayed. It is usually used to display
Unicode
multiple languages
This mode can display the extended ASCII character between 0X80~0XFF. If checked, the text
Extended ASCII
cannot display Chinese character; the Unicode and Extended ASSCII cannot be chosen at the
same time
Word Length
The word length is 1~16 optional. Each word contains 2 ASCII characters
Description of Font Attribute
Use the Vector Font or Dot Matrix Font to display character string
Note: Generally speaking, if it is not ASCII character, it cannot be displayed by vector font, but the Unicode
character input by Unicode keyboard with sane character tag can be displayed by vector font. For example:
Font
Type
171
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Add the display area width at the right side, the
Set the displaying position of character string,
including two methods: Left, Right.
Align
Font
units is pixel.
Adjust
ment
ment
Map the component to the F1~F12 of external keyboard or F1~F8 of the HMI which has keys itself. This function
Key
is suitable for the HMI with USB host or HMI with keys itself
Description of Keyboard Setting Attributes
Public
Windows
Keyboard
Use the public windows keyboard, the default keyboard is the [Frame3:NUM Keyboard]
Use the keyboard in specified window. The default keyboard is the [Frame 4：ASCII Keyboard] If
Specified Keyboard
you use the self-regulating keyboard, you should set the Special Attribute in HMI Attribute to
Keyboard Page, then you can select the Window’s number in Specified Keyboard list
Keyboard
Pop-up
Position
Not
Use
pop-p
Keyboard
Set the position of the pop-up window in the screen
Do not pop up keyboard when trigger text input or text book component, but use the external USB
keyboard if the HMI supports the USB host
Input the component continuously when the keyboard is popped up, the keyboard will not be closed
Use Input Order
when press the ENTER key during the inputting, the input cursor will flash in cycle among the
components that set the Input Order, the keyboard will be closed when click the Close button
172
Advanced Part Component
Input Order
Set the input order for the components
Sort the components that need to input continuously in different groups, the first triggered
component decides which group the cursor will flash among
Group
D100
HMI
5
Group 2
Group 1
D102
PLC
D104
OK
D200
100
D202
50
D204
180
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.4 Keyboard]

Related attributes settings about the Text component
Description of related attributes
Set the cursor color when the Text Input component or Note Book component is triggered in
Cursor Color
the HMI Extended Attributes of HMI Attributes
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.3 HMI Extended Attributes]
Cursor Move
Text Operation
Use the Keyboard Function in the function key to move the cursor
Refer to Advance Part
4.2.6 Function Key for more information.
Use the Keyboard Function in the function key to select, copy, cut, and paste the text content.
173
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
☞Refer to Advanced Part4.2.6 Function Key for more information.
4.5.1 Text Iput
The Text Input decodes the data according to ASCII, and then writes it to the HMI or PLC register in
character string, at the same time displays the written data in character string on HMI. The written data is
saved in the continuous registers that begin from “Read Address”. When displaying the data, the low byte
characters are displayed on the left and the high byte characters are displayed on the right.

The Text Input component cannot display the multiple rows text content
4.5.2 Text Display
The Text Display component displays the HMI or PLC data in character string on HMI after decoding it
according to the ASCII.
D100
4
D101
2
D
4
M
8
H
0
Space
4
D100(Word No.:2)
9
I
HMI

The Text Display component cannot display the multiple rows text content
174
Advanced Part Component
4.5.3 Note Book
The Note Book is the same as the Text Input; they decode the data according to ASCII, and then write it to
the HMI or PLC register in character string, at the same time displays the written data in character string
on HMI. The written data is saved in the continuous register that begins “Read Address”. When displaying
the data, the low byte characters are displayed on the left and the high byte characters are displayed on the
right.

The Note Book component can display the multiple rows text content
Description of Note Book attributes
Total Lines
The
Word
The total lines of input text
Register
Number of Per Line
Display Line
Display area line
The most data length per line, the unit is word. A length of a ASSIC character is a byte, and
1word = 2 bytes
4.6 Graph/Meter Components
In Kinco HMIware, customer can display the data in chart/graph. The graph/meter components contain Trend Curve, XY
plot, Oscillograph, Bar Picture, Meter and so on.
The Trend Curve, XY plot and Oscillograph are graphs; they are usually used to display data in a single or a series of
continuous registers in graph on HMI. The customer can use them according to their function and actual application.

The common attributes of graph setting.
175
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Description of Basic Attributes
Component
Read Address
Trend Curve
XY Plot
Set the sampling register
Set the sampling register address of the
address
of
the
first
channel
It
depends on the type of XY plot
depends
on
the
sampling channel number,
Word Length
if
the
m,(m<17),
first channel. The address assigning
channel
the
is
word
length is m
The word length depends on the
channel number, sampling points, XY
plot type and the read register type. The
user can not change this
Oscillograph
Set the sampling register address
of the first channel
It
depends
on
the
channel
number and sampling rate. If the
channel number is m(0<m<17)
and sampling rate is n(0<n<256),
the word length is m*n
Detail description of channel attributes.
Line Width
Display the width of the curve
Set the data format of sampling data. It contains 16-bit signed, 16-bit unsigned, 32-bit signed, 32-bit
Data Type
unsigned, float and double
Set the display range of sampling data on X axis and Y axis
Y max/Y min
Color
Set the color of curve
The Y max/Y min value is from specified registers. In multiple channel application, user can set specified
Channel
use
variable limit
registers for Y max/ Y min of each channel. Trend Curve: if the Specified Address is Y min; the Specified
Address+1 is the Y max. XY plot: if the Specified Address is Y min, the Specified Address+1 is the Y
max, the Specified Address+2 is the X min and the Specified Address+3 is the X max. Oscillograph: if the
Specified Address is Y min, the Specified Address+1 is the Y max
176
Advanced Part Component
Detail description of extended attributes
Channel
Properties
Chose a channel to edit. The available channels depend on the channel number set in Trend Graphics or XY
Curve Graphics or Scope Chart page. And set the line style and line width
Connect
Style
Line
Dot
X
Y
axis
projection
projection
Chose the graph of nodes,
axis
the following six types are available
Node
Graph
●▲■○ᇞ□×
Node Size
Set the size of node
Use Grid
Variable
Period
!
Node Color
Set the color of node
The curve use the background and grid, users can set the line and row number, as well as the line width ,
color and type
When use the Time sampling, the Circle time can
be read from specified register. Note: The
Oscillograph does not support variable period
Number of
points
The number of sampling points
can be read from specified
register
If the circle period and sampling point number use the variable value, the variable value will be used in
priority. And the default value will be used if the variable value cannot be got because of the
communication problem
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.1.10 Save Historical Data]
!
The Trend Curve and Historical Data Display can be used at the same, but when the trend curve and
historical data display sample the same register and the data is saved in external device, the Subdirectories
should be different, or the only save historical data in just one of the component

About the display of curve.
177
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The Trend Curve and XY plot run at the backstage, the trend curve and XY plot will not be cut off when changing the frame.
On the other hand, the Oscillograph does not support running at backstage; the data sampling and curve will be cut off
when changing the frame.
The special attributes of these curves are as follows.
4.6.1 Trend Curve
The Trend Curve reads a series specified continuous registers (in HMI or PLC) in period and display them
in curve. The new data will be read from specified registers and displayed at the right/left/top/down side
of curve, it is a real-time curve.
178
Advanced Part Component
Detail description of trend curve attributes
Single page
Only display the sampling value in current page, there is no extended curve
Type
Multiple pages
There is extended curve. When the curve goes on, the previous sampling data will not
disappear. The historical data will be stored in the buffer area
Start
Start from left
Attributes
from
right
Y
O
Start
Start from top
from
bottom
X
Time sampling
OFFON trigger
sampling
ONOFF trigger
Sampling
Methods
sampling
OFFON
trigger sampling
OFFON
reset
trigger sampling
ONOFF
reset
trigger sampling
Cycle
The sampling will be triggered when specified register changes from OFF to ON
The sampling will be triggered when specified register changes from ON to OFF
The sampling will be triggered when specified register changes
The sampling will be triggered when specified register changes from OFF to ON. And
the specified register will be reset to OFF automatically
The sampling will be triggered when specified register changes from ON to OFF. And
the specified register will be reset to ON automatically
The time interval between two sampling points. The unit could be 1s or 100ms
Continue
Sam.Type
Once
Sampling
Sample the date timely
The sampling will continue even the all sampling points are finished
The sampling will stop automatically when all the sampling points are finished, the
sampling executes only once
Sampling points on each page
179
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
points
PageNum
This option is valid in the Multiple Page type
Channel
The number of the channel, it is 16 channels at most
This option is valid in the trigger sampling .Take the following picture for example, the LB100(bit register
in the HMI) is the trigger register, when the LB100 satisfies the setting condition in the Sampling Method ,
the sampling will be triggered
Control
Register
Setting
Set the Pause and Clear register, the default word length is 2, the set address is used to stop the curve, and
the set address +1 is used to clear the curve. The Pause function just stops the change of curve, but not
stops the sampling. The Clear function will clear the curve on the Trend curve. Take the following picture
for example, the LB0(bit register in HMI) is set to control the Pause-Clear function, when the LB0 is
ON , curve will stop refreshing, when the LB0 is OFF , the curve will continue to display, when the LB1
is ON the curve on the Trend Curve will be cleared
Pause-Clear
Set the register to turn the page of Multiple Page curve, default word length is 3. This option is valid when
the Multiple Page is chosen. Use this function to browse multiple page curves, and this function can be
SCRO
used with Scroll Bar.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.16.3 Scroll Bar]
Take the following picture for example, if the specified register is LW0(word address in HMI), so the LW0
is the current browsing index value of scroll bar, the LW1 is the start browsing index value, and the LW2
is the max browsing index value
180
Advanced Part Component
This option is used to save the start sampling time and end sampling time of current page, this option is
valid when the Save Time option is chosen. Default word length is 12. Take the following picture for
example, if the specified address is LW70(word register in HMI), the start time of current time (second,
minute, hour, day, month, year) are LW70, LW71, LW72, LW73, LW74, LW75. The end time of current
page (second, minute, hour, day, month, year) are LW76, LW77, LW78, LW79, LW80, LW81
Time
!
If “Use scroll bar” is selected in [Trend Graph Component Attribute]-[Scale], the [Scroll] cannot be selected
in [Trend Graph Component Attribute]-[Trend Graphics].
Description of Scale attributes
Use Scroll Bar
The trend curve uses the system scroll bar, user can set the scroll bar width, the width range is
20~120, units is pixels.
Use Vertical Axis Scale
The trend curve uses the system vertical axis scale.
Scale color
Set the color of vertical color.
Display Scale Frame
Display the scale frame or not.
181
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Major Scale Number
Set the major scale number.
Major Scale Length
Set the major scale length, the unit is pixels.
Minor Scale Number
Set the minor scale number.
Minor Scale Length
Set the minor scale length, the unit is pixels.
Label Font
Set the label font
Integer
The integer number of scale (User cannot adjust it ).
Decimal
The decimal number of scale (User cannot adjust it ).
Use Scale Label
Use
Horizontal
Time Scale
Axis
Trend Curve displays the horizontal scale.
Scale Color
Set the vertical scale color.
Display Scale Frame
Display the scale frame or not.
Time scale interval
The time interval between two time scale point, the unit is sampling
circle, for example, if the Time scale interval is 3, the time interval
between two scale point is three sampling circles’ time. So the
displayed scale number depends on the sampling points number and
time scale interval.
Length
Mark
Set the length of time scale, the unit is pixel.
each
sampling
Mark a scale on each sampling point
point scale
Length
Set the length of each sampling points, the unit is pixel.
Use Scale Label
Label Font
Set the scale label font
Time
Display and set the time format, there are three formats: HH:MM:SS、
HH:MM、HH:MM:SS:MS
Date
Display and set the date format, there are three formats:
182
Advanced Part Component
DD*MM*YY、MM*DD*YY、YY*MM*DD. Separator: /、—、.
Vertical
Axis
Scale
Channel
Reference Channel
The max/min of vertical axis is based on the max/min of specified
channel.
History Data Query
Select “History Data Query” in [History Data Query] of [Trend Graph Component Attribute], then set Query Address and
Query Trigger Address to make history data query function for trend graph.
Description of History Data Query attributes
History data query address, the word length is 8.
Start Date: Specified address, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
Start Time: Specified address+2, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and second) in this
address.
End Date: Specified address+4, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
End Time: Specified address+6, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and second) in this
address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants to
query the data between 9:30:40 14th, Aug, 2012 and 14:16:30 15th, Aug, 2012.
Query Address
So the Specified address are as follows:
Start Date: LW200=20120814
Start Time: LW202=93040
End Date: LW204=20120815
End Time: LW206=141630
Query Trigger Address
When the specified address status is on, the trend will trig query function.
183
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
If the Open printing option is checked, the trend curve can be printed in real-time.
!
The real-time printing in Trend Curve only supports micro printer
Description of printing attributes
Print per point
Print per page
Mode
Print whole
Trigger by register
The printing is triggered by every sampling point
The printing is triggered when all the sampling points on a whole page is
finished
The printing is triggered after all the sampling points on all pages are
finished in multiple page trend curves
The printing is triggered when the specified register satisfies the setting
condition
Paper Width
Set the paper width according to the printer
Step
The pixel between two small grids
Vertical axis scale
Set the standard channel of vertical axis scale. That is to say set the upper limit and lower limit of
reference channel
Time Mode
vertical axis
Set the display time mode of horizontal axis. Two modes are optional: HH:MM、HH:MM:SS
OFFON
ONOFF
OFFON
Trigger Style
OFFON(Reset)
If chose the Trigger by register in the Mode, the printing will be triggered
when specified register changes from OFF to ON
If chose the Trigger by register in the Mode, the printing will be triggered
when specified register changes from ON to OFF
If chose the Trigger by register in the Mode, the printing will be triggered
when specified register changes its state
If chose the Trigger by register in the Mode, the printing will be triggered
when specified register changes from OFF to ON, then the register will be
reset to OFF automatically
If chose the Trigger by register in the Mode, the printing will be triggered
ONOFF(Reset)
when specified register changes from ON to OFF, then the register will be
reset to ON automatically
Print axis
Print
The horizontal axis and vertical axis of printing. The line type, line width and axis color can be set
horizontal
The display time interval (show time), font size and color can be set. The show time means the
184
Advanced Part Component
axis(time)
display interval between the previous printing time and the next printing time, the unit is sampling
points
Print
vertical
axis(scale)
Print vertical axis has two forms: Percentage and Sampling value. The font size and color of vertical
axis are changeable
The baseline is the standard line in horizontal direction. Two baselines can be printed at most. The
Print baseline
base line value, baseline type, line width and baseline color can be set. The baseline value is
suggested not to exceed the limit of standard channel
!
This function is valid only when the Open Printing is checked
Description of Print Trigger Line Attribute
When value of specified register changes, print a trigger line
Trigger Register
Line Type/Width/Color
Set the type, width and color of trigger line
Set the time and scale of trigger line
Print line scale/time
Print state description
Font Size
Set the font size of trigger line time and scale font
Font Color
Set the font color of trigger line time and scale font
Set the comments information of print trigger line
Trigger Line State
Set the state number and corresponding value of trigger state description,
Num
1~256 are optional. For example, set the trigger line state Num to 3, the
185
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
corresponding value are 0, 1, 2. And the value 0 corresponds to description
“temperature rise”, the value 1 corresponds to description “temperature
unchanged” and value 2 corresponds to description “temperature descend”
When the value of specified register is 2, the trigger line and
corresponding description will be printed
100
Trigger line(D100: 10>>3)
Temperature
descend
Description
0
Top:
Position
description
of
Bottom
【Extend application of Trend Curve】

View and zoom function
Use the LB9110 to open or close the zoom function. When the LB9110 is ON, the zoom function will be opened.
Zoom out view: In multiple pages trend curve and the page number is more than 1. When LB9110 is ON, double click on the
trend curve screen to zoom out the curve.
Zoom in view: When LB9110 is ON, drag the mouse to select a section curve to view the zoomed in curve.
186
Advanced Part Component
Zoom in
Normal
Double Click
Zoom out

Click Drag Release
Cursor function
The system special register LB9111 can enable the cursor function. When LB9111 is on, user can touch and trag the cursor to
the data point that user want to select.
!

The priority of LB9111 is higher than LB9110. If LB9111 is on, the zoom function will be disabling.
Sampling time and sampling coordinates query function.
When the LB9110 is ON, customer can query the sampling time and sampling coordinates by system registers. Related
system registers are as follows:：
Description of related system registers
Special register address
LW9200~LW9205
Function
Description
Display the viewed sampling
These registers are second, minute, hour, day, month, and
point time of trend curve
year. The Code Type is BIN
N means the channel number, display the Y coordinates of
viewed sampling point in each channel. For example the
LW9210~LW9210+N
Display
the
coordinates
of
viewed sampling point
channel is 2, the LW9210 displays the Y coordinate value
of current viewed sampling point in channel 1, and the
LW9211 displays the Y coordinate value of current viewed
sampling point in channel 2
Take the following picture for example
187
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
a. Number Display，LW9205
b. Number Display，LW9204 c. Number Display，LW9203
d. Number Display，LW9202 e. Number Display，LW9201
f. Number Display，LW9200
g. Number Display，LW9210 h. Number Display，LW9211
Take MT5320T communicating with SIEMENS S7-200 for example, sample the data in VW0, VW2, VW4 and draw them in
a curve, at the same time the sampling points scale can be viewed.
Build a new Trend Curve component, the component attribute is as followings:
Basic Attribute
Read Address
VW 0（PLC register）
Trend Graphics
Type
Multiple Pages
PageNum
10
Channel
3
SCR0
Checked, address: LW 0（HMI local register）
Channel
No. 0
Y Min/Max: 0/500
Color：■（Red）
No. 1
Y Min/Max: 0/500
Color：■（Yellow）
No. 2
Y Min/Max: 0/500
Color：■（Green）
188
Advanced Part Component
Extended Attributes
Use Grid
Checked, Lines/Columns: 3/3, Background color: ■(blue-gray),
Grid color: □(white), Grid Line Style:- - -
Save Historical Data
Save to recipe data field
Checked, Start address: 0
Add a Scroll Bar component to turn page of the historical curve, the setting is as followings:
Basic Attributes
Write address
LW 0 (HMI local register)
Scroll Bar
Background Image
Vector Graphics, CONFIRM.vg
Button Image
Vector Graphics, CTRL_BAR001.vg
Scroll Bar Extended Attributes
Max/Min Value Setting
0/100
Variable Max/Min Value
Unchecked
Add a Bit State Switch to zoom the curve, the setting is as follows:
Read/Write Address
LB 9110（special system register in HMI）
Switch Type
Toggle
Tag
Use Tag checked; 0: View; 1: Cancel
Font
Use Font Graph: Times New Roman, Size 12, Center, Blue.
Graphics
Vector Graphics checked: CONFIRM.vg
Add three Number Display components to display the value of current sampling points, the setting is as follows:
Read Address
LW 9210/LW 9211/LW 9212（special system register in HMI）
The effect is as follows:
189
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
4.6.2 XY Plot
XY Plot read a series of continuous registers from specified HMI local registers or PLC/Controller
registers in a period, and plots them in dual axle curve, it can reflect the relationship of two variables.
(X-axis) (Y-axis)
D100
D101
1st
5
30
100
80
2nd
10
40
60
3rd
15
50
40
4th
20
40
20
5th
25
30
0
0
10
20
30
Detail explanation of XY Plot attributes
Single Page
Type
Multiple Pages
Attributes
Standard
Only display the data change information of current page, there is no curve extension.
There is XY plot extension, each channel can be saved, when the XY plot extends, the
historical sampling data will not be lost, but save in the buffer area.
Invalid
Track
190
Invalid
Advanced Part Component
Hor
Trend
izo
Vertical
ntal
Time Sampling
OFFON trigger
sampling
ONOFF trigger
Sampling
Method
sampling
OFFNO
trigger sampling
OFFON
reset
When specified register changes from OFF to ON, then trigger the sampling.
When specified register changes from ON to OFF , then trigger the sampling.
When specified register changes its state , then trigger the sampling.
When specified register changes from OFF to ON, then trigger the sampling. The
trigger sampling
specified register will be reset automatically after being triggered.
ONOFF
When specified register changes from ON to OFF, then trigger the sampling. The
reset
trigger sampling
Cycle
Sample data periodically.
specified register will be reset automatically after being triggered.
The time interval of the two pages or two sampling points. The unit can be s or 100ms.
Sampling multiple points every time or in each period, with X and Y components. The
register number is related to the channel number and sampling number. For example,
there is m channels and n sampling points, that is to say, the register number is m*n*2.
XY
Type
Plot
Standard
(X-axis) (Y-axis)
D100 D101
30
1st 5
D102 D103
40
2nd 10
D104 D105
50
3rd 15
D106 D107
40
4th 20
D108 D109
5th 25
30
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
One Cycle
Example, suppose the Read Address is D100, and there is 1 channel, 5 sampling points
in each page; so this XY plot will take 10 registers. They are D100, D101, …, D109
which corresponding to the X11, Y11, X12, Y12, …, X15, Y15.
Sampling one point each time, with X and Y components. The register number is related
Track
to the channel number. For example, the channel number is m, sampling points is n, so
191
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
the register number is m*2.
100
(X-axis) (Y-axis)
D100 D101
1st 5
30
2nd
10
40
3rd
15
50
4th
20
40
5th
25
30
80
60
1
40
2
3
4
5
20
0
0
10
20
30
One Cycle
Example, suppose the Read Address is D100, and there is 1 channel, 5 sampling points
in each page; so this XY plot will take 2 registers. They are D100 and D101 which
corresponding to the X1 and Y1.
Sampling multiple points every time or in each period, with Y components, but no X
components. The register number is related to the channel number and sampling number.
For example, there is m channels and n sampling points, that is to say, the register
number is m*n.
(Y-axis)
D100
1st 30
D101
2nd 40
D102
3rd 50
D103
4th 40
D104
5th 30
Trend
100
80
60
40 D100
20
D102
D104
D101
D103
0
One Cycle
Example, suppose the Read Address is D100, and there is 1 channel, 5 sampling points
in each page; so this XY plot will take 5 registers. They are D100, D101, …, D104
which corresponding to the Y11, Y12, …Y15.
Sampling
Points
The sampling points displayed on each page
PageNum
This option is valid only when the Multiple Pages is chosen.
Channel
Displayed curve number.
Trigger
This option is valid when use the trigger sampling in the Sample Methods. Take the following picture for
Register
example, set the LB100 (HMI local register) as the trigger register, the sampling will be triggered when the
Setting
state in LB100 satisfies the setting in Sampling Method.
192
Advanced Part Component
Pause/Cle
Set the register that controls the Pause and Clear function, the default word length is 2, the [set register]
ar
controls the Pause, and [set register+1] controls the Clear. The Pause function only stops the change of curve,
but not stops the sampling. The Clear function clears the curve displayed on the XY plot. Take the following
picture for example, set LB0 (HMI local register) as the register to control Pause and Clear. When LB0 is ON,
the screen on XY Plot will stop refreshing; when LB0 is OFF, the screen on XY Plot will continue to display
the change of curve. When LB1 is ON, the curve on XY Plot will be cleared.
Set the register to turn page of multiple pages of XY Plot, the default word length is 3. This option is valid
when the Multiple Pages is chosen. Use this function to scroll the multiple pages XY plot, and can be used
with the Scroll Bar. ☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.16.3 Scroll Bar]
Take the following picture for example, the specified register is LW0 (HMI local register), so the LW0 is the
current index value of scroll bar, LW1 is start index value of scroll bar, LW2 is the maximum index value of
SCR0
scroll bar.
Use this function to save the start time and end time of current page. This function is valid when the “Save
Time
Time” is checked. The default word length is 12. Take the following picture for example, the specified
address that is used to save time is LW70(HMI local register), the start time (Second, Minute, Hour, Day,
193
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Month and Year) of current page are LW70, LW71, LW72, LW73, LW74 and LW75. the end time (Second,
Minute, Hour, Day, Month and Year) of current page are LW76, LW77, LW78, LW79, LW80 and LW81.
4.6.3 Oscillograph
The function of Oscillograph component is similar to the Trend Curve. They read continuous registers
form specified HMI local registers or PLC/Controller registers periodically, and plots them in single axis
curve.
Detail explanation of Oscillograph attributes
Single
Type
Property
page
Only display the data change information of current page, there is no curve extension.
Multiple
There is XY plot extension, each channel can be saved, when the XY plot extends, the
Pages
historical sampling data will not be lost, but save in the buffer area.
The direction that Oscillograph curve starts.
Start from
Start from
Left
Right
194
Advanced Part Component
O
Y
Start from
Start from
Top
bottom
X
Cycle
The time interval of every 2 sampling points. The unit can be s or 100ms.
When use the rate sampling, the Oscillograph reads [Sampling Rate number] groups data each time. For
example, the Read Address is LW10 (HMI local register), Sampling Rate is 2, Channel is 3, so the read
Sampling
address is LW10~LW15. The address distribution is as follows: three channels’ data of the first group are
Rate
saved in LW10, LW11 and LW12; three channels’ data of the second group are saved in LW13, LW14, and
LW15. If the sampling cycle is 1s, the Oscillograph reads these two groups data every second. The rate
sampling makes the curve more smooth and accurate
Sampling
points
Sampling points number displayed on each page
PageNum
This option is valid when the Multiple Pages is checked
Channel
Displayed curve number
Set the register that controls the Pause and Clear function, the default word length is 2, the [set register]
controls the Pause, and [set register+1] controls the Clear. The Pause function only stops the change of
curve, but not stops the sampling. The Clear function clears the curve displayed on the Oscillograph. Take
the following picture for example, set LB0 (HMI local register) as the register to control Pause and Clear.
When LB0 is ON, the screen on Oscillograph will stop refreshing; when LB0 is OFF, the screen on
Oscillograph will continue to display the change of curve. When LB1 is ON, the curve on Oscillograph will
Pause/Clear
be cleared.
Set the register to turn page of multiple pages of Oscillograph, the default word length is 3. This option is
valid when the Multiple Pages is chosen. Use this function to scroll the multiple pages Oscillograph, and
SCR0
can be used with the Scroll Bar. ☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.16.3 Scroll Bar]
Take the following picture for example, the specified register is LW0 (HMI local register), so the LW0 is
the current index value of scroll bar, LW1 is start index value of scroll bar, LW2 is the maximum index
195
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
value of scroll bar.
Use this function to save the start time and end time of current page. This function is valid when the “Save
Time” is checked. The default word length is 12. Take the following picture for example, the specified
address that is used to save time is LW70(HMI local register), the start time (Second, Minute, Hour, Day,
Month and Year) of current page are LW70, LW71, LW72, LW73, LW74 and LW75. the end time (Second,
Minute, Hour, Day, Month and Year) of current page are LW76, LW77, LW78, LW79, LW80 and LW81.
Time
4.6.4 Meter
Meter component displays the data of HMI or PLC/Controller in instrument chart.
Detail explanation of Meter attributes
Dial Style
Pie, Circularity(point up), Circularity(point
196
down)
Advanced Part Component
Hand color
Chose the color of the meter hand
Length
Set the length of the meter hand, the maximum is the radius of the actual circle
Width
Set the width of meter hand
Hand Style
Chose the style of meter hand
Scale color
Chose the color of meter scale
Set to display the scale frame or not
Show
Scale
Frame
The Number of
Main Scale
The Length of
Main Scale
The Number of
Minor Scale
The Length of
Minor
Scale
Set the number of main scale, 0~50 are optional
Set the length of main scale, the maximum cannot exceed the radius length of actual circle
Set the number of minor scale, 0~10 are optional
Set the length of main scale, the maximum cannot exceed the radius length of actual circle
Use Scale Tag
Set to display the scale tag or not
Tag Font
Click the Tag Font to set the font of tag
Integer
The integer number of scale tag (Can not be set, it will change according to the maximum of meter )
Decimal
Set the decimal number of the scale tag, 0~8 are optional
Use Dial Axis
Checked to set the axis size and color
Axis Width
Set the size of meter axis, the maximum cannot exceed the radius length of actual circle
Axis Color
Set the color of meter axis
Explanations of Meter Extended Attributes
Maximum/Minimum
Set the display range of meter.
197
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Variable Min/Max
Set the registers where variable Minimum and Maximum are stored.
Set the color of the Upper/Lower Limit.
Upper
Limit/Lower
Limit
Set the thickness of the circle color block. The maximum can not exceed the radius of meter
Fan Thickness
circle, and should be equal to or smaller than the Fan External Radius.
Set the radius of circle color block. The maximum can not exceed the radius of meter circle, and
should be equal to or larger than the Fan External Radius.
Fan External Radius
Lower
Limit/Upper
Limit
Variable Lower/Upper
Limit
Set the alarm range of the meter component.
Set the register where the alarm range be stored.
4.6.5 Bar Picture
Bar Picture displays the data in HMI local register or PLC/Controller register in percentage of bar picture ,
that is to say the bar picture displays the percentage of actual value compared to the set
maximum/minimum value.
!
Bar Picture does not support the float data format
198
Advanced Part Component
Detail Explanation of Bar Picture Attributes
Display
the
percentage
of
actual
value
compared
to
the
set
maximum/minimum value in bar picture.
Standard
Bar Type
Display the offset value of actual value compared to the original data in bar
picture.
Offset
Bar Shape
Art direction
Up
Bottom
Left
Right
Rectangle
Clockwise
Counter clockwise
Circle
If the value in specified register is in the permissible range, the bar picture displays specified color
in filling area.
Target Value
199
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Diameter of Fan
Set the diameter of fan when the Bar Shape is Circle, the unit is pixel.
Start Angle
Set the start angle of fan when the Bar Shape is Circle.
End Angle
Set the end angle of fan when the Bar Shape is Circle.
Color
Set the color for Normal state, Upper/Lower Limit, Frame and Background.
When the value in specified register exceeds the Alarm Upper, the filling area in bar picture flashes.
Over Upper Limit
Flashing
When the value in specified register exceeds the Alarm Lower, the filling area in bar picture flashes.
Over Lower Limit
Flashing
Set the upper/lower limit of bar picture.
Maximum/
Minimum
The percentage of filling area of Bar Picture can be calculated by the following formula:
The percentage of filling area of Bar Picture= (Value in specified
register-[Minimum])/([Maximum]-[Minimum])*100%
Variable Min/Max
The Maximum and Minimum are read from specified registers.
Set the alarm range, when the value in specified registered is larger than Alarm Upper or smaller
than Alarm Lower, the filling area of bar picture displays the specified Alarm Color.
Alarm
Upper/Lower
Variable
Alarm
The Variable Alarm Upper/Lower are read from specified registers.
200
Advanced Part Component
Upper/Lower
Detail Explanation of Scale Attributes
Scale Color
Set the scale color
Set to display scale frame or not.
Show Scale Frame
Use Scale
The Number of Main Scale
Set the number of main scale
The Length of Main Scale
Set the length of main scale, unit is pixel.
The Number of Minor
Set the number of minor scale
The Length of Minor
Scale
Scale
Set the length of minor scale, unit is pixel.
Left
Scale
Right
Up
Bottom
Display
Position
Use Scale Tag
Tag Font
Set the font of tag
Integer
Integer of scale cannot be set by user.
Decimal
Decimal of scale, can be set by user.
4.7 Alarm Component
Alarm component is used to display user alarm or user event information. Inco HMIware provides components of event
display, historical event display, event bar, alarm display and alarm bar for displaying alarm information.
!
1.The event information displaying in components of event display, historical event display, event bar must
be preset in【Event Information Logon】in project database.
2. The alarm information displaying in components of alarm display, alarm bar must be preset in【Alarm
Information Logon】in project database.
3. Alarm information can’t be saved, and alarm display component can only display the unrecovered alarm
information.
201
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
4. Event information can be saved, and event display component can display both unrecovered event
information and recovered event information.

Related attribute of event information setting

Event information storage
Set the storage of event information in【HMI Attribute】—【Historical Events Storage】.
（1）Save to Recipe Data Field
It is used to save event information to recipe memory of HMI (RW register).

1.”Save Count” must be greater than 0.If “Save Count” is 0, then system won’t save event to recipe data
field.
2.”Start Addr.” can be user-defined. The length of one event information is 16 words. System will set “End
Addr.” Automatically according to “Save Count”.
3. Event information which saves to recipe data field cannot display in historical event display component.
（2）Save to External Device
It is used to save event information to external device.
When “Storage Type” is set as “Daily File”, then the event information will save to path “event/Subdirectory
name/yyyymmdd.csv”.When “Storage Type” is set as “Single File”, then the event information will save to path
“event/Subdirectory name/ Subdirectory name.csv”.（Therein，yyyymmdd is event execution date such as 20110101）
202
Advanced Part Component

1. Only the HMI with USB HOST or SD Card support saving to external device.
2. Only the event information which is saved to external device can query by date or order sequence and
display in “Historical Event Display” component.
3.Event information can save to recipe data field and external device at the same time.
☞For details about historical event storage, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.7 Historical Events Storage]
5

Event information clear
There are four ways to clear event information which displaying in event display component.
（1）Set LW10015 as 0 and restart HMI.
This way is used to clear all the event information which are saved in recipe data field.
（2）Tick【Clear History Event Data】in【EVDownload】when downloading project. The event information will be clear
after downloading.
This way is used to clear all the event information which are saved in recipe data field and external device.
（3）Use【Clear Event】function in function key.
This way is used to clear all the event information which are saved in recipe data field.
（4）Use【Clear History Event】function in【KHManager】.
This way is used to clear all the event information which are saved in recipe data field and external device.

System Scroll Bar Width setting
When the information in Event Display component cannot totally display horizontally, then system will provide scroll
bar automatically.
The width of system scroll bar can be set in
【HMI Attribute】—【HMI Extended Attributes】,the range is 20~120（Pixel）.
4.7.1 Event Display
Event display is used to display event information logon in “Event Information Logon”. The displaying
events will be sorted by triggered time.
203
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
【Read Address】in Event Display component is used to scroll the event information(Up or down).
Related setting descriptions for event information
Display Type Range
This event display component can only display the event within this type range. The
event type is set in “Event Information Logon”.
Row Space
The space between two rows or two Columns.
Acknowledge Type
Set the acknowledge method for triggered event. Click or Double Click.
Color
Acknowledge Color
The color of event information after affirming.
Back to Normal Color
The color of event information after event back to normal.
Select Area Color
The color of dotted line for indicating user information.
The format of event information. All the format information display in front of event information.
Format
Sequence No.
Sequence No. of events, it starts from 0.
Event Trig Time
The time when event triggered
Acknowledge Time
The time when event acknowledged
Return to Normal Time
The time when event returns to normal
Extended Time Format（D/H:M）
Time format is Day/Hour: Minute
204
Advanced Part Component
Short Time Format（H:M）
Time format is Hour: Minute
Standard Time Format（H:M:S）
Time format is Hour:Minute:Second
Precise Time Format（H:M:S:MS）
Time format is Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond
Extended Date Format（Y/M/D）
Date format is Year/Month/Day
Event Trig Date（M/D）
Date format is Month/Day
Tick it indicate that the events display by ascending order of sequence
Time Ascending Order Display
No. and time. Or the event display by descending order of sequence
No. and time.
Only show the Event which doesn’t
Tick it to only show the event which doesn’t recover. Or it will display
recover
all the events.
【Example】Take the serial communication between MT5320T and SIEMENS S7-200 for example, when the temperature is
higher than 80℃ or the pressure is higher than 120Mpa,then the HMI will display alarm and output buzzer alarm, then it
can display and query historical event record.
Text
NO.
Trig.
Time
Acknowledge Return to
Time
Normal Time
Event
Multiple
State Setting
Event
Display
Temperature/Pressure
VW0
VW2
####
####
Create new project [Event], and then add two windows Frame10 and Frame11 which are used for temperature alarm and
pressure alarm. Set the attributes as follows:
Name
Alarm window_1/Alarm window_2
X/Y
80/80
Width/Height
200/100
Use Background Color
Tick, Fill Color:■（Yellow）
Frame
Width：2
Pop Window Type
Monopoly: tick
Frame Color：■（Gray-50）
Add two texts and function keys in Frame10 and Frame11, and then draw a alarm symbol.
Set attributes of text as follows:
Content
Abnormal Temp./Abnormal Pressure
Font Type
Vector Font
Font Attribute
Font：Arial Black
Size：12 Color：■（Red）
205
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Set attributes of function key as follows：
Switch Window
Close window
Graphics
No use
Set the size of function key to the same as the size of window.
Add event information in【Project Database】—【Event Information Logon】.Set event information as follows:
Temperature Alarm:
Data Type
Word
Address
VW 0(PLC register)
Condition
>80
Pop-up window
Tick,[10：Alarm window_1]
Use buzzer
Tick,1 second
Text
Abnormal Temp.！
Pressure Alarm:
Data Type
Word
Address
VW 2(PLC register)
Condition
>120
Pop-up window
Tick，[10：Alarm window_2]
Use buzzer
Tick,1 second
Text
Abnormal Pressure！
Add “Event Display” component in Frame0,set its attribute as follows:：
Read Address
LW 0（HMI local register）
Format
Tick Sequence No., Event Trig. Time, Acknowledge Time, Return
to Normal Time, Standard Time Format (H:M:S).
Add two “Multiple State Setting” components in Frame0, and set their attributes as follows:
Write Address
LW 0（HMI local register）
Setting Mode
Sub/Add
Subtrahend/Addend
1/1
Lower/Upper
0/100
Graphics
Use vector graphics，Button6-27.vg/Button6-28.vg
Historical events storage setting
206
Advanced Part Component
Open【HMI Attribute】—【Historical Events Storage】,tick【Save to Recipe Data Field】, set【Save Count】to 100，set
【Start Addr.】as 0,means events will be saved in the registers start from RW0.
When the value of VW0 is larger than 80℃:
NO.2
Return to
Normal
Trig. Acknowledge
Event
15:22:54Time
15:25:13
Abno
Time
Time
1 14:01:00 14:44:20 14:44:23
Abno
0 10:50:01 11:40:10 10:54:20
Abno
Beep...
Temperature/Pressure
VW0
90
VW2
100
Return to
Trig. Acknowledge Normal
NO.
Event
Time
Time
Time 15:25:13
2 15:22:54
Abnornal T
1 14:01:00 14:44:20 14:44:23 Abnornal
T
0 10:50:01 11:40:10 10:54:20 Abnornal
T
Temperature/Pressure
VW0
90
VW2
100
4.7.2 Historical Event Display
Historical event display is used to query the triggered historical event information, which are added in
“Event Information Logon”, and display them as form format.
!
1.【Read Address】in “Historical Event Display” component is used to query historical event. Word length is
2 by default.
2.It must tick the option “Save to External Device” in【HMI Attribute】—【Historical Event Storage】and
set the subdirectory when using “Historical Event Display” component.
Descriptions for Table Display Attribute
Time
Date
Table Display
Background Setting
It is used to set whether display time for trigger, acknowledge and recovery events
and time format. Therein, YY means year, MM means month, DD means day.
It is used to set whether display date for trigger, acknowledge and recovery events
and time format. Therein, YY means year, MM means month, DD means day.
Separator
Choose the separator for date, there are three format options. Such as 11/06/24.
Sequence No.
Set whether display the sequence no. of event information
Ascending
Selecting it indicates the event information is sequenced by ascending order
Order
according to time. Or it is sequenced by descending order.
Set the border width and the color of background, title bar and border of Historical Event Display
207
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
component.
If selecting it, then when the value of the specific register is 0,it means to display
the historical event information of today or the latest day. When the value is 1,it
means to display the historical event information of the previous day. And by
Historical
Query by File
parity of reasoning.
Order
For example, there are two files in extended memory, 20110621.csv and
20110624.csv.When the value of the specific register is 0, then it will display the
Event
historical event in Jun.24th, 2011.When the value is 1, then it will display the
Query
events in Jun.21st, 2011.
If selecting it, then when input the date in the specific register, it will display the
historical event in this day. The format of inputting date is yyyymmdd (yyyy
Query by Date
means year, mm means month, dd means day).
For example, when input 20110624 in the specific register, then it will display the
historical events in Jun.24th, 2011.
Set the color, line style, line width of separator line, and row space and column space. The unit of
Separator Setting
row space and column space is pixel.
Tick “Horizontal Line” to display horizontal separator line. Tick “Vertical Line” to display vertical
separator line.
Trigger
Status display
Confirm
Resume
Title Bar Setting
Set the status information which is used to display in status column of the table
when event is triggered. It is set as 0 by default.
Set the status information which is used to display in status column of the table
when event is confirmed. It is set as 1 by default.
Set the status information used to display in status column of the table when event
is resumed. It is set as 2 by default.
Set the name and font attribute of title bar.
4.7.3 Event Bar
Event Bar is used to display and roll the triggered information from right to left which is already set in
“Event Information Logon”.
208
Advanced Part Component
Attribute Descriptions of Event Information
Display Type
Set type range of event information, only this type range will display in the Event Bar. The type of event
Range
information is set in “Event Information Logon”.
Moving Step
Moving Rate
Gap Space
Set the moving step of event information. The unit is pixel. The bigger the value, the faster the moving
speed.
Set the interval time of moving the event information. The unit is 100ms.The bigger the value, the slower
the moving speed.
Set the space between two events ranging from1-7 pixel.
Set the display format of event information. All the format information will display in front of event
information.
Format
Event Trig. Time
The time when event is triggered.
Extended Time Format (D/H:M)
Time format is Day/Hour: Minute.
Short Time Format (H:M)
Time format is Hour: Minute.
Standard Time Format (H:M:S)
Time format is Hour: Minute: Second.
Precise Time Format (H:M:S:MS)
Time format is Hour: Minute: Second: Millisecond.
Extended Date Format (Y/M/D)
Date format is Year/Month/Day.
Event Trig. Date(M/D)
Date format is Month/Day.
Selecting it to display the event information by time ascending
Time Ascending Order Display
order.
For example,2011/06/23 15:22:54 Event 1
209
2011/06/23 16:20:40
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Event 2
Cancel it to display the event information by time descending order.
For example, 2011/06/23 16:20:40 Event 2
2011/06/23 15:22:54
Event 1
4.7.4 Alarm Display
Alarm Display component is used to display the triggered alarm information which is already set in
“Alarm Information Logon”. The alarm information will not remove until the alarm condition is cleared.
Logon
Display
！
Abnormal Temp.!
Abnormal Temp.!
Alarm
Remove
Recovery

【Read Address】in Alarm Display component is used to roll the alarm information(Upward or downward)
Attribute Descriptions for Alarm Display
Row Space
Set the interval between two alarm information. The unit is pixel.
Column Space
Set the interval between two characters or words in the alarm information. The unit is pixel.
Display
Type
Range
Set the type range of alarm information, only this type range will display in the alarm display. The
type of alarm information is set in “Alarm Information Logon”.
4.7.5 Alarm Bar
Alarm Bar is used to display and roll the triggered alarm information which is already set in “Alarm
Information Logon”.
210
Advanced Part Component
Attribute Descriptions of Alarm Bar
Set the moving step of alarm information. The unit is pixel. The bigger the value, the faster the
Moving Step
moving speed.
Set the interval time of moving the alarm information. The unit is 100ms.The bigger the value, the
Moving Rate
Display
slower the moving speed.
Type
Range
Set type range of alarm information, only this type range will display in the Alarm Bar. The type of
alarm information is set in “Alarm Information Logon”.
4.8 Window Component
Kinco HMIware provides two window components, Direct Window and Indirect Window, which are used for popup window.
The main differences between the two window components and 【Popup Window】in Function Key are as follows:
Component
Read Address
Control Method
Window No.
Direct Window
Bit
According to the state of Read Address
Specify in the attribute
Indirect Window
Word
According to the value of Read Address
According to the value of Read Address
Function Key
None
Touch
Specify in the attribute
4.8.1 Direct Window
Direct Window is used to define a display area and display the specific window in this area according to
the state of Read Address.
211
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

1. Direct Window’s open or close depends on the state of Read Address, it means that it will popup window
when the state of Read Address is ON, and close window when the state is OFF.
2. Generally the size of Direct Window should be set the same as the size of specific popup window.
3. There is no limit for the quantity of Direct Window.
Attribute Descriptions of Direct Window
Frame ID
Specify the window which will display in the display area of Direct Window
Select it to set the coordinates of Direct Window as variable. [Address] is used for X
coordinate,[Address+1] is used for Y coordinate.
Variable
Display
Coordinates
Cancel it to set the coordinates of Direct Window as constant.
!
Direct Window can be closed by the “Close Window” function in Function Key
212
Advanced Part Component
4.8.2 Indirect Window
Indirect Window is used to define a display area and display the window whose number is the same as the
value of Read Address.

1. It will close window when the value of Read Address is 0.And it will popup window 0 when the value
is-1.
2. Generally the size of Indirect Window should be set the same as the size of specific popup window.
3. There is no limit for the quantity of Indirect Window.
Explanation of Indirect Window attributes
Select it to set the coordinates of Indirect Window as variable. [Address] is used for X coordinate,
[Address+1] is used for Y coordinate.
Variable
Display
Coordinates
Cancel it to set the coordinates of Indirect Window as constant.
213
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
4.9 Graphic Components
Kinco HMIware provides Vector Graph and Bitmap which can be used to display vg or bg pictures in system graph library
and graph library in project files window.
☞For details about how to build and edit Bitmap and Vector Graph, refer to [Advanced Part 5.3 Graphic Library]
4.9.1 Vector Graph
Vector Graph component is used to display vg pictures in system graph library and Project Files Window
graph library.
There is no register control in Vector Graph component, and graph doesn’t support multiple states

switching display.
If you want to control vector graph by register, you can chose corresponding vector
graphics-Graphics option of other components, like Bit State Switch, Multiple State Setting etc.
☞For details about vector graphics in graphics option, refer to [Advanced Part 4.1.6 Graphics Setting]
4.9.2 Bitmap
Bitmap component is used to display bg pictures in system graph library and Project Files Window graph
library.
There is no register control in Bitmap component, and graph doesn’t support multiple states switching

display.
If you want to control bitmap by register, you can chose corresponding bitmap in Graphics option
of other components, like Bit State Switch, Multiple State Setting etc.
☞For details about bitmap in graphics option, refer to [Advanced Part 4.1.6 Graphics Setting]
4.9.3 Free Plotting
Free Plotting component plots graph according the states of specified bit or word register. This
component doesn’t open to ordinary customer.
214
Advanced Part Component
4.9.4 Dynamic Graph
Dynamic Graph can change the position and size of rectangle, ellipse or line according to value in the
specified HMI/ PLC register.
Attribute explanation of Dynamic Graph
Graphic Type
Chose the graph type, rectangle, ellipse and line are optional
Line
Set the frame line color, line width and line type
Filling
Set the filling color and picture of rectangle and ellipse
Attribute explanation of Dynamic Graph Position
The Upper-left Corner of Variable
Unchecked
Checked
The Width/Height of Variable
Unchecked
Checked
The dynamic graph position(X, Y) are constant.
The dynamic graph position(X, Y) read from specified register. X
position=specified register, Y position = specified register +1.
The dynamic graph width and height are constant.
The dynamic graph width and height read from specified register.
Width=specified register, Height= specified register +1.

The component takes the upper-left as base point, X direction moving means increasing towards right. Y
direction moving means increasing towards down. The moving unit is pixel
4.9.5 GIF
GIF component is used to display the gif picture, and the switching frequency of gif picture can be
controlled.
215
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Description of GIF Attributes
Use Start Address
If checked, when the specified register is ON, GIF displays animation, when register is OFF, GIF
displays static picture.
Use GIF Default Freq
Use the default frequency of gif picture.
Use defined Freq
User set frequency for the gif picture.
Switching
Different frequencies mean different switching speed of gif picture; the larger
Frequency
value means the slower switching speed. Unit: 100ms.
Use Variable
The switching frequency is read from specified register. Unit: 100ms.
Frequency
Note: If the specified register is PLC register, but the HMI does not
communication successfully with the PLC all the time, the gif use the default
frequency. If the communication is cut off, the gif uses the latest historical value
in the specified PLC register.
Load GIF
Load the gif picture from PC, and preview the loaded gif picture in Preview area.
GIF Preview
Preview the loaded gif picture in this area.
Use Original Size
If checked, the component size is the same as the gif original size.
GIF component only support the gif format picture.
4.10 Video Input Component
4.10.1 Video
Video component is used to monitor the industrial site picture in real time, supporting the CVBS signal.
!
1. Only the HMI with BNC connector can support the Video component
2. Supports PAL and NTSC format. And the video mode are optional in HMI Attribute>>HMI Extended
Attributes
3. If the video is displayed in pup up window, the pop up window should be set Video Page in Window
Attribute>> Special Attribute
216
Advanced Part Component
The default Word Length of Read Address is 4, each word corresponds to different function attribute as follows:
Explanation of Video component Read Address
Read Address
Function
Description
Switch channels, if the value is 0 , the component displays the video
Specified Address
Switch channel
image from channel 0 ; if the value is 1 , the component displays the video
image from channel 1;
Specified Address+1
Adjust brightness
Adjustable range: 0~255
Specified Address +2
Adjust contrast
Adjustable range: 0~255
Specified Address +3
Adjust chromaticity
Adjustable range: 0~255
[Example] Take MT5620T for example, build a new project.
Multiple State Setting component, it is used to switch the channels (There are only 2 CVBS port on MT5620T), its
attributes are as followings:
Write Address
LW 0(HMI local register)
LW 0(HMI local register)
Setting Mode
Jog++; Addend:1; Upper:1
Jog--; Subtrahend:1; Lower:0
Tag
Use Tag; 0: Channel+; 1:Channel+
Use Tag; 0: Channel-; 1:Channel-
217
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Graphics
Use Vector Graphics
 Multiple State Setting component, it is used to adjust brightness, it attributes are as followings:
Write Address
LW 1(HMI local register)
LW 1(HMI local register)
Setting Mode
Jog++; Addend:1; Upper:255
Jog--; Subtrahend:1; Lower:0
Tag
Use Tag; 0: Brightness+; 1: Brightness +
Use
Tag;
0:
Brightness-;
1:
Brightness Graphics
Use Vector Graphics
 Multiple State Setting component, it is used to adjust contrast, it attributes are as followings:
Write Address
LW 2(HMI local register)
LW 2(HMI local register)
Setting Mode
Jog++; Addend:1; Upper:255
Jog--; Subtrahend:1; Lower:0
Tag
Use Tag; 0: contrast+; 1: contrast +
Use Tag; 0: contrast-; 1: contrast -
Graphics
Use Vector Graphics：
 Multiple State Setting component, it is used to adjust chromaticity, it attributes are as followings:
Write Address
LW 3(HMI local register)
LW 3(HMI local register)
Setting Mode
Jog++; Addend:1; Upper:255
Jog--; Subtrahend:1; Lower:0
Tag
Use Tag; 0: chromaticity +; 1: chromaticity +
Use
Tag;
0:
chromaticity-;
1:
chromaticity Graphics
Use Vector Graph:
The Video component, its attributes is as followings:
Read Address
LW 0（HMI local register）
4.10.2 Camera
Camera component is also used to monitor the industrial image as the Video component, and the Camera
component supports the USB camera video input.
218
Advanced Part Component
Camera component uses the Read Address to open, close, switch the camera.
For example, suppose the Read Address is LW0 (HMI local register), when LW0 is 0, the camera is close; when LW0 is 1,
the camera on USB HOST1 is open; when LW0 is 2 , the camera on the USB HOST2 is open.
!
1． The Camera component is only suitable for the HMI with USB HOST port.
2． If there are cameras on both USB HOST1 and USB HOST2, the two cameras can not be open at the
same time. That is to say when one camera is open, the other is closed automatically.
4.11 Multiple State Neon Lamp
The Multiple States Neon Lamp component displays text content circularly in neon. Knico HMIware provides Bit State
Neon Lamp and Multiple State Neon Lamp, their differences are as followings:
Component
Control Address
Code Type
State Number
Bit State Neon Lamp
Bit
BIN
1~2
Multiple State Neon Lamp
Word
BIN、BCD or LSB
1~256
4.11.1 Bit State Neon Lamp
The Bit States Neon Lamp component displays tag content circularly in neon, supports tag content in state
0 and state 1.

Change the states of Read Address to switching display the tag content in corresponding states.
219
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Detail Description of Bit States Neon Lamp
Moving Style
From left to right
The text moves from left frame to right frame circularly.
From right to left
The text moves from right frame to left frame circularly.
From top to bottom
The text moves from top frame to bottom frame circularly.
Form bottom to top
The text moves from bottom frame to top frame circularly.
Step Length
The distance of each movement, the unit is pixel point.
Speed
The time interval between previous moving text and next moving text, the unit is ms.
4.11.2 Bit State Neon Lamp
The Bit State Neon Lamp component displays tag content circularly in neon, supports 256 states tag
content at most.

Change the value of Read Address to switching display the tag contents corresponding to the value.
Detail Description of Multiple State Neon Lamp
From left to right
The text moves from left frame to right frame circularly.
Moving
From right to left
The text moves from right frame to left frame circularly.
Style
From top to bottom
The text moves from top frame to bottom frame circularly.
Form bottom to top
The text moves from bottom frame to top frame circularly.
Step Length
The distance of each movement, the unit is pixel point.
Speed
The time interval between previous moving text and next moving text, the unit is ms.
State Num
Set the state number of Multiple State Neon lamp, 256 states at most.
220
Advanced Part Component
Data
Set the mapping value of each state. When the value in Read Address equals to the corresponding value, the
Mapping
component displays the corresponding tag content of this value.
4.12 Animation Components
In Kinco HMIware, the Animation and Moving Components are used to realize animation effect and make the HMI picture
more vivid.
4.12.1 Animation
Animation component can preset the trace of moving component, and change the component state and
preset trace position according to value of the HMI register or PLC register.
Steps to preset the Animation trace:
Drag the Animation component to the edit area, there will be a “+”icon, press the left mouse button at appropriate position,
so a moving position is preset. Press the right mouse button to end the presetting after all the all the positions are set.
The default word length of Animation component is 2, each word corresponding to the different control function , see the
details follows:
Read Address description of Animation Component
Read Address
Control Function
Description
221
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Specified
Address
Component State
When the value in control address equals to the state number of component, the
Animation Component display corresponding tag or picture.
Specified
Number of preset
When the value in control address equals to the number , the Animation Component
Address +1
trace
moves to corresponding position.
Attribution Description of Animation Component.
No.
Moving Node
List
and
Set the coordinate position of the moving node on HMI.
coordinates
The number 0 means the first moving node, the number 1 means the second moving node.
Add Node
Add a moving node at the end of preset trace
Insert Node
Insert a moving node after the selected moving node
Delete Node
Delete the selected moving node
Shift Up
Exchange the position of the selected node and the previous node
Shift Down
Exchange the position of the selected node and the next node
Size(Width, Height)
Set the display size of Animation component
State Num:
Set the state number of Animation component.
4.12.2 Moving Component
The Moving Component can change the display state and position according to the value of HMI register
or PLC register.
222
Advanced Part Component
The default word length of Moving Component is 3, each word corresponding to the different control function, see the
details follows:
Read Address Description of Moving Component
Type
Specified Address
Specified Address +1
Specified Address +2
X Axis Only
Y Axis Only
X&Y Axis
Component State
Component State
Component State
256 states at most
256 states at most
256 states at most
X axis displacement (pixel
Y axis displacement (pixel
point)
point)
Reserved
Reserved
X axis displacement (pixel point)
Y axis displacement (pixel point)
Moving Type Description
The component moves along the X axis horizontally
Type
X axis only
The component moves along the Y axis vertically
Y axis only
The component moves along the X and Y axis at the same time.
X & Y axis
The component moves along the X axis horizontally, but the relative moving
position can be set by the input value and proportional value.
X Scaling
223
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The component moves along the Y axis vertically, but the relative moving
position can be set by the input value and proportional value.
0
When the
value in
register that
controls Y
movement is
1000
Y Scaling
(Proportional)
Min
Proportional
Max
50
Maximum
1000
Y
It is similar with the X Scaling, but with the reverse direction.
When the value in register that controls X movement is 1000
X Reverse Scaling
X
1000
Maximum
50
0
Proportional Min
Proportional Max
It is similar with the Y Scaling, but with the reverse direction.
Y
1000
Maximum
Y Reverse Scaling
50
When the value in
register that controls
Y movement is 1000
0
Proportional
Maximum
(Proportional)
Minimun
The component moves along the X and Y axis at the same time, the relative
moving position can be set by the input value and proportional value.
X Scaling, Y Scaling
X Scaling, Y Reverse
The component moves along the X and Y axis at the same time, and the
224
Advanced Part Component
Scaling
relative moving position can be set by the input value and proportional value,
but in reverse direction in Y axis.
Y
500
Maximu
m
Proportional
Maximum
50
(Proportional)
Minimum
0
When the value in
register that
controls X
movement is 1000 ,
controls Y
movement is 500
X
0
50
Proportional
Minimum
1000
Proportional
Maximum
Maximum
The component moves along the X and Y axis at the same time, and the
relative moving position can be set by the input value and proportional value,
but in reverse direction in X axis.
X Reverse Scaling, Y
Scaling
The component moves along the X and Y axis with reverse direction, and the
relative moving position can be set by the input value and proportional value
Maximum
Proportional
Maximum
1000
X Reverse Scaling, Y
Reverse Scaling
X
When the value in
register that controls
X movement is 1000 ,
controls Y movement
is 500
50
Proportional
Minimum
0
0
Proportiona
Minimum
50
Proportional
Maximum
500
Y
Status
Number
Set the status number that can be switching display.
225
Maximum
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Variable
According to different Type, the Maximum/Minimum of X, Maximum/Minimum of Y, Proportional
Min/Max
Upper/Lower Limit of X and Proportional Upper/Lower Limit of Y are read from specified registers.
※1.X Scaling or Y Scaling
Suppose the read data is A, and the actual display position is B. You can get the B according to the following formula:
B=Current Position + (A-Minimum)*Proportional Value, and Proportional Value=(Proportional Upper Limit –
Proportional Lower Limit )/(Maximum-Minimum)
2.
X Reverse Scaling or Y Scaling
Suppose the read data is A, and the actual display position is B. You can get the B according to the following formula:
B=Current Position + (Maximum-A)*Proportional Value, and Proportional Value= (Proportional Upper Limit –
Proportional Lower Limit )/(Maximum-Minimum)
4.12.3 Pipeline
Pipeline component is used to build pipeline effect in the HMI program.
Basic Attributes of Pipeline
Basic Attributes
Default
Effect
Flow
Radius
Set the radius of pipeline.
Thickness
Set the thickness of pipeline border.
Body color
Set the color of pipeline(the first color)
Border color
Set the color of pipe border.
Body Color Changeable
If checked, the pipeline color can be changed by specified register.
Body color 2
Set the second color of pipeline
Body color 3
Set the third color of pipeline
Default color
View the display effect of pipeline
Flicker
If checked, use specified register to switch on/off the flicker effect.
Use Flow Effect
If checked, use specified register to control the flow effect.
Symbol
Select the flow symbol
Copy Symbol to All Pipe
Copy the current flow symbol to all the pipes
Symbol Color
Set the color of flow symbol.
Copy Color to All Pipe
Copy the current flow symbol color to all the pipes
Display Length
Set the length percentage of flow symbol in the pipe, 1~100 are
optional.
Copy Length to All Pipe
Copy the length percentage to all the pipes
User Flowinfo to All Pipe
Copy the flow effect to all pipes.
226
Advanced Part Component
Not use Flowinfo to All Pipe
Control Address
All the pipes do not use flow effect.
If the bit1 of specified register is ON, Pipeline uses the second color; if the bit2 is ON, Pipeline uses the
third color; Bit3 is on, Pipeline starts to flicker(when the Flicker is checked), that is to say the pipeline
switching displays the first color , second color(bit1 is ON) or third color(bit 2 is ON). If the bit3 is ON,
the pipeline display the flow effect(the Use Flow Effect is checked).
Note: if the bit1 and bit2 are ON or OFF at the same time, pipeline displays the first color, the flicker is
invalid.
For example, the Control Address is LW0 (HMI local address), word length is 1.
When the LW0 =1 or LW.B0.0 is ON, the Pipeline display the second color; When the LW0 =2 or
LW.B0.1 is ON, the Pipeline display the third color; When the LW0 =5 or LW.B0.0 and LWB0.2 are
ON at the same time, the Pipeline switching display the first color and the second color. When the LW0
=8 or LW.B0.3 is ON, the Pipeline display the flow effect.
Description of Pipe Info
Pipe List
Number
Number 0 is the first pipeline; Number 1 is the second pipeline and so on.
Coordinates
The start coordinates of the pipeline component.
Type
Display the current pipe type, there are HLNE (Horizontal), Bend Node (Bend),
VLINE (Vertical).
Pipe Setting
Follow Effect
Select the corresponding pipe number, and set its parameters.
Type
Set the type of current pipe.
Coordinates
Set coordinates of current pipe.
Select the corresponding pipe number, and set its flow effect.
Symbol
Set the flow symbol of current pipeline.
Color
Set the color of flow symbol
Display Length
Set the display percentage of current pipeline.
4.13 Grid Components
4.13.1 Grid
The Grid can be selected in row, column or cell. User can set the row number , column number, Select
Color, Background Color, Border Color, and the Grid writes the column number and row number to the
specified HMI or PLC register.
227
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Grid component takes different register number according to the different Type, see the detail as follows:
Type
Row register
Column register
Register number
Select in row
Specified address
—
1
Select in col
—
Specified address
1
Select in cell
Specified address
Specified address +1
2
Description of Grid Attributes
Set the select type.
Type
Row/Column
Set the row number and column number.
Color
Set the Select Color, Background Color and Border Color.
4.13.2 Historical Data Display
Historical Data Display component read data from specified HMI or PLC continuous registers
periodically, and display them in grid.
!
1. The Read Address of Historical Data Display component is register address of the first channel.
2. The Word Length of Historical Data Display depends on the channel number, if the channel number is m
(0<m<17), the Word Length is m.
3. When use the Historical Data Display component, one of the Save to Recipe Data Field and Save to
228
Advanced Part Component
External Device option, or both must be checked.
Detail Description of Display Properties
※If the information in Historical Data Display component cannot be displayed entirely, the scroll bar will be built
automatically to make user to view the whole information. And the width of system scroll bar can be set in HMI
Attributes >> HMI Extended Attributes, ranges from 20~120 pixel.
Channel
The continuous register number, 16 channels at most.
Sequence No.
Display the sequence number or not.
Checked means the sampling data information is arranged in ascending order, that is to say the latest
Ascending Order
sampling data is displayed at bottom; Unchecked means the sampling data information is arranged
in descending order, that is to say the latest sampling data is displayed at top.
Checked means to display the sampling date, and choose the date format, three
Date
formats are optional, in the date format, YY means year, MM means month, DD
means day.
Date/Time Display
Date Separator
Choose the date separator; three formats are optional, for example 11/06/24.
Checked means to display the sampling time, and choose the time format, three
Time
formats are optional, in the date format, HH means hour, MM means minute, SS
means second, MS means millisecond.
Color Setting
Set the color for grid background and tile bar.
Border Setting
Set the border color and border line width of grid.
Set the separator color, style and width of each row and column in grid, the unit of Row Space and
Separator Setting
Column Space is pixel point. And check the Horizontal Line means to display horizontal line, check
the Vertical Line means to display vertical line.
Historical
Query
Data
The data that is saved to the external device can be queried by specified register in Historical Data
Query. The default length of specified register is 2.
229
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Check the “Query by file order”, when the value in specified register is 0, it
means to query today or the latest day’s historical data, 1 means to query the
Query by file
order
previous day’s historical data and so on. For example, there are two csv file in
the external device, when the value in specified register is 0, the historical data
file saved on 24th, June, 2011 is queried and displayed, when the value in
specified register is 1, the historical data file saved on 21st, June, 2011 is queried
and displayed.
Check the “Query by date” and input the date to the specified register, then the
historical data in corresponding date is queried and displayed. The format of
Query by date
inputting date is yyyymmdd, yyyy means year, mm means month, and dd means
day, for example, input 20110624 in the specified register, the historical data
sampled on 24th, June, 2011 is queried and displayed.
Variable Circle
!
The sampling circle is read from specified register in Time Sampling mode.

If the Variable Circle is configured, the Variable Circle value will be used preferentially; and the preset
value is called when the Variable Circle value cannot not be read because of losing communication..
Detail Description of Background Attribute
Sampling Methods
Time Sampling
Sample the data periodically.
OFFON
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, the sampling is
trigger sampling
triggered.
ONOFF
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OF, the sampling is
trigger sampling
triggered.
OFFNO
trigger sampling
Cycle
Sam. Type
Only when the specified register changes its status, the sampling is triggered.
OFFON reset
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, the sampling is
trigger sampling
triggered, and the specified register resets automatically.
ONOFF reset
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, the sampling is
trigger sampling
triggered, and the specified register resets automatically.
Time interval between every two sampling points, the sampling points can be second or hundred
milliseconds.
Continuous
The sampling will continue after all the sampling points are finished.
230
Advanced Part Component
Once
Sampling Points
Trigger
Register
Setting
The sampling will stop after all the sampling points are finished, the sampling is
executed once.
In the “Once”Sam.Type , the sampling will stop after all the Sampling Points are finished
It is the specified register in the “Trigger Sampling” Sampling Method.
The default word length is 2. The pause function is used to stop the sampling, the pause address is
the specified address. The clear function is used to clear the sample data saved in the flash, the clear
Pause
address is the specified address+1.
Note: If “Historical Data Query”is selected, the display data is from external device, at the time
the clear function is disable.
Description of Channel Properties
Display
Checked means displaying this channel data information in grid.
Set the data format of sampling data, supporting format is 16-bit signed, 16-bit unsigned, 32-bit
Data Type
signed, 32-bit unsigned, float, double.
Min/Max Limit
N/A
Integer
N/A
Decimal
N/A
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.1.10 Save Historical Data]
!
Historical Data Display component and Trend Curve can be used together, but when they sample the same

registers and save the data in external device, the sub routine of saving file must be different, or chose only
one historical data (Historical Data Display component or Trend Curve.) to save.
Select [Use Background Data Print] to enable realtime print historical data. If [Net Print] is select, historical data can be
printed in network.
Description of Background Data Print
Use Background Data Print
Enable the background data print
231
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Print Type
Net Print
Real-time
Print every sampling data in real-time.
Batch
Trigger printing when the sampling point number equals the set value.
Point
Set the sampling points number in batch printing
Trig
Trigger printing when the specified register satisfies the set condition.
Enable the Net Print, download the program to HMI, and then run the Net Print.exe to
connect the network printer to print historical data.
Note: If the Net Print is checked, the local printing is invalid. Even if the local printer is
connected to HMI, the HMI still cannot print via local printer.
Print Content
Print
Serial
Print serial number of each sampling point.
Number
Print Table Header
Print the table header of Historical Data Display component.
Print Grid
Pint the grid ground of Historical Data Display component.
Print Date
Print date of each sampling data, and select the date format and
separator. There are three date format and separator, YY means year ,
MM means month, DD means day.
Print Time
Print time of each sampling data, and select the time format and
separator. There are three date formats and separators, HH means
hour, MM means minute, SS means second, MS means millisecond.
Grid
Set the line type, line width and color of grid background.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 13.3.2 Network Print]
5
User can set the title name a font in this page, see as follows:
232
Advanced Part Component
4.13.3 User Info Display
When configure the “User Permission Setting” function, use the User Info Display component to dispay
the user information(system registered or added on line.) in table format.
User Permission registered in system
User
Name
Permission Permission Permission
2
3
1
...
Permission
32
User1
User2
NO.
User Name
1
User2
111000000000000000
0
User1
100000000000000000
Permission
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.3.2 User Permission Protection for Components]
5
Description of Table Display Attributes
*1. Users that registered in User Permission Setting of HMI Attribute cannot be deleted on line, so the Editable option in
the User Infor Display component is “NO”.
*2. When the user information cannot be wholly displayed in vertical or horizontal direction, system will provide scroll
bar automatically. The width of system scroll bar can be set in HMI Extend Attributes of HMI Attributes, the width
are optional from 20 to 120(pixel).
Table
Attributes
Display
Checked means displaying sequence number before each item.
233
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Back Ground Setting
Set the background, title bar, frame color and frame width of table.
Set the separator color, line style, width and row space, column space. The unit of row space and
Separator Setting
column space are pixel point. Check the “Vertical Line” means displaying the vertical separator
line, and check the “Horizontal Line” means displaying the horizontal separator line.
Set the display name and font attribute of table title bar.
Title Bar Setting
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.13.2 Historical Data Display]
4.13.4 Operation Log
The Operation Log component recode the all the operations on the HMI and display them in table, these
recode can be saved as CSV file in external memory device.
!
1. The Read Address of Operation Log is the specified register that is used to query the operation log, the

default word length is
2. The Operation Log can display operation result of Bit State Setting, Number Input , Text Input
component and so on.
3. The Operation Log component is only suitable for HMI with SD card or U disk.
Description of Table Display Attributes
234
Advanced Part Component
* When the operation log cannot be wholly displayed in vertical or horizontal direction, system will provide scroll bar
automatically. The width of system scroll bar can be set in HMI Extend Attributes of HMI Attributes, the width are optional
from 20 to 120(pixel).
Table Display
Time
Checked means displaying the operation time and chose the time format, three
formats are operational. HH means hour, MM means minute, SS means second,
MS means millisecond.
Date
Checked means displaying the operation date and chose the time format, three
formats are operational, YY means year, MM means month, DD means day.
Date Separator
Choose the date separator, three formats are operation, for example 11/06/24
Sequence No.
Checked mean displaying sequence number of each operation log.
User Name*
Checked means displaying operation user name.
Ascending Order
Checked means that the operation logs are arrange in ascending time order, that is
to say the latest log is at the bottom; unchecked means that the operation logs
are arrange in descending time order, that is to say the latest log is on the top.
Background
Set the background, title bar, frame color and frame width of operation log table.
Setting
Historical
Query
Logs
Query
by
Order
File
If the “Query by File Order” is checked, 0 in specified register means to call
today’s log or latest day’s log; 1 means to call the previous day’s log and so on.
For example, there are two operation log csv file in external memory device, they
are 20110621.csv and 20110624.csv, when the value in specified register is 0, the
csv file that is saved on 24th , June, 2011 is called, when the value in specified
register is 1, the csv file that is saved on 21st , June, 2011 is called and displayed.
Query by Date
If the “Query By Date” is checked, input date in specified register to call the
corresponding operation log. The inputting date format is yyyymmdd, yyyy
means year, mm means month, dd means day. For example, input 20110624 to
specified register, the operation log that is saved on 24th, June, 2011 is called
and displayed.
235
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Separator Setting
Set the separator color, line style, width and row space, column space. The unit of row space and
column space are pixel point. Check the “Vertical Line” means displaying the vertical separator line,
and check the “Horizontal Line” means displaying the horizontal separator line.
Title Bar Setting
Set the display name and font attribute of table title bar.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.13.2 Historical Data Display]
*When using the User Permission function, the User Name column displays the current user name.
Related attributes settings of Operation Log.
>> Operation Recode Storage Setting
User needs to set the storage path for Operation Log storage file in HMI Attributes>> HMI Extended Attributes>>
Operation Recode Storage Setting.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.3 HMI Extended Attributes]
If the CSV file is stored by Daily File type, the storage path is log/subdirectory/yyyymmmdd.csv; if the CSV file is
stored by Signal File type, the storage path is log/subdirectory/subdirectory.csv. Note: yyyymmdd is the date on which
the operation log is built, for example 20110101.
Recode Operations setting in component attributes.
The components whose operation log needs recoding must check the Recodes Operations in Control Setting of
component attributes and input description information in the text frame.
4.13.5 Data Report
Data Report is used to display the data that is logged in the Data Logger and stored in external memory
device on the HMI in report. The logged registers can be continuous or discontinuous registers.
Detail Description of Data Report
Data
Report mode
Report
Attribute
Report type
Real time
Update the report data timely according to the settings.
History
Input the time range to query the historical report.
Trigger Report
In the user defined time interval, trigger the sampling to get the instant
236
Advanced Part Component
data.
Free Report
Display all the data in the user defined time interval.
Note: In the real-time Report Mode, if the Free Report exceeds the
user defined length, the earliest data will be deleted, then the whole
report moves up
Daily Report
Display the data of one day.
Note: In the real-time Report Mode, the Daily Report is displayed in
circle. The new data is displayed at the bottom of report. If the report
exceeds the length of row number, the newest data displays at the top
of report, and all the data in previous circle will be deleted, only the
newest row data is reserved, and then start a new circle.
Monthly Report
Display the data of the moth
Quarterly Report
Display the data of three months
Annual Report
Display the data of a year.
By Order
The sampling data is sequenced by time order; the newest data is at
the bottom.
Dis. Order
Reverse
The sampling data is sequenced by reverse time order, the newest data
is at the top
Set the displaying lines of report, this parameter is only suitable for the Trigger Report and
Free Report.
Note:
1.
Report Line
The line number of Daily Report is created automatically according to the Timer
Interval, for example, the time interval is 1 hour, so the line number is 24.
2.
The line number of Monthly Report is 31, Quarterly Report is 3, and Annual Report is
12.
3.
In the “History” Report mode, the line number of Free Report and Free Report depends
on the user defined time interval.
There are five options; they are Instantaneous Value, Min Value, Max Value, Average Value
Get Value
Type
and Added Value.
When the Get value Type is one of Min Value, Max Value, Average Value or Added Value,
the report displays the min value, max value, average value or added value of all the
sampling values in a circle.
Time Record
Empty Data
There are Begin Time, Mid Time, and End Time.
The time that displayed in the report can be begin time, middle time or end time.
Specified Value
When there is no value in sampling register, the report displays specified
237
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
value, the default value is 0.
Process
Last Valid Value
When there is no value in sampling register, the report displays the last
valid value.
The time interval of report, there are two options, they are minute and hour.
Time Interval
Note: This option is only suitable when the Free Report and Daily Report are selected.
Because the time interval of Monthly Port and Quarterly Report are month, and time
interval of Annual Report is year.
History
History Inquire Address, the word length is 8.
Inquire
Start Date: specified address, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
Address
Start Time: specified address +2, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and minute)
in this address.
End Date: specified address +4, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
End Time: specified address +6, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and second)
in this address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data between 9:30:40 14th, Aug, 2012 and 14:16:30 15th, Aug, 2012.
Trigger Report
So the specified addresses are as follows:
Start Date：LW200=20120814
Start Time：LW202=93040
End Date：LW204=20120815
End Time：LW206=141630
Start Date: specified address, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
Start Time: specified address +2, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and minute)
in this address.
End Date: specified address +4, word length is 2, input year and date in this address.
Trigger Report
End Time: specified address +6, word length is 2, input time (hour, minute and second)
in this address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data between 9:30:40 14th, Aug, 2012 and 14:16:30 15th, Aug, 2012.
238
Advanced Part Component
So the specified addresses are as follows:
Start Date：LW200=20120814
Start Time：LW202=93040
End Date：LW204=20120815
End Time：LW206=141630
The specified address, word length is 2, and input year and date in this address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data on 14th, Aug, 2012.
Daily Report
So the specified address is as follows：
LW200=20120814
The specified address, word length is 2, and input year and month in this address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data in Aug, 2012.
Monthly Report
So the specified address is as follows：
LW200=201208
Quarterly Report
The specified address, word length is 2, and input year and quarter number in this
239
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data of the third quarter 2012.
So the specified address is as follows：
LW200=201203
The specified address, word length is 2, and input year in this address.
Take the following picture for example, the specified address is LW200, and user wants
to query the data of 2012.
Annual Report
So the specified address is as follows：
LW200=2012
When the specified register satisfies the set condition, output report data.
Trig
history
inquire
OFFON
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI outputs report data.
ONOFF
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI outputs report data.
OFFON
Only when the specified register changes its status, HMI outputs report data.
OFFON(reset)
ONOFF(Reset)
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI outputs report data, and
then reset the specified register automatically.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI outputs report data, and
then reset the specified register automatically.
Detail Description of Data Report Channel
240
Advanced Part Component
Data Logger
Click this button to pop up Data Logger library.
Click this button pop up the dialog box to choose channels.
Data Report Channel List
Data report channel.
Data Sample List
Display all the sampling data in the Data Logger library.
Data Sample Channel
Display all channel information of one sampling data.
The data-report channel list
Display the selected channels of current report.
Set the title, integer and decimal of report channel.
Details of Data report display attributes
Serial number
Display the serial number of sampling data or not.
If checked, report displays the sampling time, and chooses the time format and separator.
Display time
There are three formats optional, HH means hour, MM means minute, SS means second,
MS means millisecond.
Back color
Set the background color and title bar color.
Date Format
Display sampling date, and choose the date format, there are three formats
optional, YY means year, MM means month and DD mans day.
Display date
Separator
Select the date separator, three formats are optional, for example
12/07/19.
Set the color, type and width of separating line, and set the width of each row and column,
Separator border settings
the unit is pixel
If the Horizontal Line is checked, report displays horizontal separator, if the Vertical Line is
checked, report displays vertical separator,
Title bar settings
Set the display name and font of title bar.
Details of Data Report Control attributes
Pause Address
Data clear address
In real-time report mode, use a bit register to pause data sampling, ON means pause, OFF means
outputting data.
In real-time report mode, use a bit register to clear the sampling data in Data Report Display.
OFFON
ONOFF
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI clears the
sampling data in Data Report Display.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI clears the
241
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
sampling data in Data Report Display.
Only when the specified register changes its status, HMI clears the sampling
OFFON
data in Data Report Display.
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI clears the
OFFON(Reset)
sampling data in Data Report Display, and then reset the specified register
automatically.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI clears the
ONOFF(Reset)
sampling data in Data Report Display., and then reset the specified register
automatically.
Export Dir
The subroutine name of the exported sample data file in the external
memory device, the default name is ReportToCSV, user can modify it
himself and the detail routine in external memory device is :\external
memory device\export\Export Dir, the file name is named according to the
saving time: year-month-day, hour: minute: second: millisecond, for
example 20120903-110552.csv
File format: csv.
Save Disk
Save the exported data to the external memory device: SD card, USB1 or
USB2.
Export
data
When the specified register satisfies the set condition, HMI exports data.
Trigger Param.
Sample Data Export
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to
OFFON
ON, HMI exports report data.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to
ONOFF
OFF, HMI exports report data.
OFFON
Only when the specified register changes its status,
HMI exports report data.
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to
OFFON(reset)
ON, HMI exports report data, and then reset the
specified register automatically.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to
ONOFF(Reset)
OFF, HMI exports report data, and then reset the
specified register automatically.
242
Advanced Part Component
1.
Do not put multiple free reports in a same window, it will affect the communicate speed.
2.
Do not add too many data channels in a signal Free Report.
3.
If there are multiple free reports or multiple channels report in a same window, please use the minute
or hour as Time Interval.
4.
If you want to plug off the external memory device when HMI is in operation, we suggest using the
safe mode, but not plug it off directly. Safe Mode: set the LB9153 (SD card), LB9154 (USB1),
LB9155 (USB2) OFF first, then plug of the corresponding memory device.
5.
When you download the project again, check the Clear data report option in KHDownload, or the
residual information may cause the data error for the new sampling data.
Take the MT4522T for example, suppose the sampling address is Dword0, three channels’ data, and the sampling data is
stored in SD card, user can query the data in any time interval.
Build a new project, and add a Data Logger, the parameters are as follows:
Data Sample HMI
HMI0
Sample Point
10
Sample Type
Circling Sample
Get Data Type
Sample Continue
Channel
3
Sample Circle
10
Sample channel
Data Type
16-bit signed/32-bit signed/float
Description
Channel 0/Channel 1/Channel 2
Data Sample Control
Sample Address
D0
Sample Data Save
Save Disk
SD Card
Save Dir
SampleDataStore
Build a Data Report in Frame0 to display data in the Data Logger , the attributes setting is as follows:：
Data report attribute
Report mode
History
Report type
Trig type
Disp.type
By order
Get value type
InstantantaneousValue
Empty data process
0
History inquire address
LW0
Trig history inquire
LB0，Trigger type: OFF>>ON, Reset
Data report channel:
The data-report channel list
Add channel 0 and chann2 to this list
243
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Data report Channel
Integer
4
Decimal
2
Data report display attribute
Serial Number
Checked
Display time
Checked, the format is HH:MM:SS
Back color
Back：
Display date
Date format：YY*MM*DD；separator：/
（light yellow）；title：
（light blue）
Separator/border
setting
Title Bar Setting
Default setting.
Put 4 Number Input components and a Bit State Switch in frame0:
Start Date
LW0，DWORD
Start Time
LW2，DWORD
End Date
LW4，DWORD
End Time
LW6，DWORD
Inquire Trigger
LB0；Switch Type: toggle.
Put 3 Timer components in frame0 to simulate the change of D_Word registers, the attributes setting are as follows:
Mode
Periodical Jog++(circle)
Data Type
Word
Asc Value
1/6/3
Upper
100/150/200
Addr.Type
D_word
Address
0/1/3
Value Type
Unsigned Int (word length 1)/Signed Int (word length 2)/float (word
length 2)
Timer
Trigger mode: All time, Execution Cycle:10
After a period of time, suppose the HMI system time is 2012/11/09, 16:50:00, we want to query the data between 16:40:30
and 16:41:00, the operation is as follows.
244
Advanced Part Component
事件信
息
4.14 Data Transmission Component
Data Transmission component is used to exchange the data between HMI and PLC or controller. In Kinco HMIware, the
following components can be used to exchange data: Recipe Data, Data Transmission, Data Transmission function in Timer
and General PLC control in PLC Control component.
4.14.1 Recipe
Recipe Data component can transmit HMI data that can be stored even powered off to specified
PLC/controller registers, or transmit data in PLC/controller data to HMI registers that can be stored even
powered off.
FRW0 FRW1
FLASH
D100 D101
20
120
...
78
...
...
98
20
...
120
...
78
98
...
...
...
SRAM
ERW0 0 ERW0 1
20
...
120
...
78
98
...
...
USB

RW0 RW1
20
120
...
...
78
98
SD
The Write Address of Recipe Data is the start register of transmitting PLC/controller
245
...
...
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Detail description of Recipe Data
Upload from PLC to Recipe
Download from Recipe to
PLC
Upload from PLC ERW0*1
Download from ERW0 to PLC
Upload from PLC to ERW1*1
Function
Download from ERW1 to PLC
Upload from PLC to ERW2*1
Download from ERW2 to PLC
Upload from PLC to FRW*2
Download from FRW PLC
Data
Length
Key
Transmit data in specified PLC/controller registers to HMI RW registers
Transmit data in HMI RW registers to specified PLC/controller registers
Transmit data in specified PLC/controller registers to external memory
device(the default is SD card)
Transmit data in external memory device (the default is SD card) to
specified PLC/controller registers.
Transmit data in specified PLC/controller registers to external memory
device(the default is USB DISK1)
Transmit data in external memory device (the default is USB DISK1) to
specified PLC/controller registers.
Transmit data in specified PLC/controller registers to external memory
device(the default is USB DISK2)
Transmit data in external memory device (the default is USB DISK2) to
specified PLC/controller registers.
Transmit data in specified PLC/controller registers to HMI FLASH
memory FRW.
Transmit data in HMI FLASH memory FRW to specified PLC/controller
registers.
The length of transmitting data, unit is word.
Map the function to the external keys (F1~F2) or HMI keys (F1~F8). The HMI with USB host slot or keys
supports this function. The HMI with USB host or keys supports this function.
*1.ERW0, ERW1, ERW2 are special registers for the external memory device, users can distribute them to U disk or SD card
in the Extended Memory of the HMI Attributes
2. FRW is a special register type for the HMI flash memory.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 11 Recipe/ Recipe Editor]
4.14.2 Data Transmission
Data Transmission component transmits data in specified HMI or PLC/controller registers to the other
HMI or PLC/controller registers. The transmission can be triggered by touching or change of specified
register.
246
Advanced Part Component
Basic Attributes of Data Transition
Data Type
Key
Set the transmitting data type: bit or word
Data Length
Map the function to the external keys (F1~F2) or HMI keys (F1~F8). The HMI with USB host slot
or keys supports this function. The HMI with USB host or keys supports this function
Source Address
Set the source address of transmitting data
Destination Address
Set the destination address of transmitting data
Variable Parameters
Set the transmitting data length
The offset of Source Address, Destination Address and Data Length are read from specified
registers
Take the following picture for example, the Source Address, Destination Address and Data Length use variable parameters,
set the D register (PLC register) for Source Address, and the LW100 (HMI register) controls the offset of Source Register;
Set LW register (HMI register) for Destination Address, and the LW101 (HMI register) controls the offset of Destination
Register; LW103 controls the Data Length.
247
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Check the “Use Trigger Address” in Trigger Address page to trigger the transmission by status of specified register.

If use the trigger address to trigger the transmission but not by touch, user can set the Always Invalid in the
Control Setting page.
Detail Description of Trigger Address
Trigger Type
Description
OFFON
When specified register changes from OFF to ON, the transmission is triggered
ONOFF
When specified register changes from ON to OFF, the transmission is triggered
OFFON
When specified register changes its status, the transmission is triggered
OFFON (Reset)
ONOFF (Reset)
When specified register changes from OFF to ON, the transmission is triggered, at the same time
reset the trigger address
When specified register changes from ON to OFF, the transmission is triggered, at the same time
reset the trigger address
4.15 Project Database
In Kinco Builder, user can put the repeat information or background function in the specified area, in this way, it is easy to
248
Advanced Part Component
control and call this information and function, at the same time it can reduce the data redundancy. The specified area are in
the project Data Base components, they are: Text Library, Address Tag, Alarm Information, Event Information, PLC Control ,
Sound Lib and so on.
4.15.1 Text Library
Text Library component is used to store the text content in the project, so that it can avoid the input the
same text tag many times. Text Library supports multiple language, it makes the HMI can switch the
display languages. Kinco HMIware supports 32 languages switching at most.
 Text Library Interface
Display the text content
Import csv file*1
Export csv file*2
Open【Language Setting】
*1. Import csv file (text library file) to Text Library of current project
2. Export the Text Library to the CSV file, User can use Microsoft EXCEL to open and edit this CSV file.
Language attributes
Click the Language in the Text Library to open the Language Setting dialog box, in this dialog box, user can set the font
attributes of each language, refer to the following table for details:
Description of Language Setting
Max Lang Num
Text Library supports 32 different languages setting at most; the default max language number is 8.
Note: If customer needs to display more than 8 languages, he should set the Max Lang Num.
Current Lang
Choose the current language.
Font Type
Choose the data type for current language: Vector Font or Dot Matrix Font.
Font Attribute
Set the font attributes of current language: Size, Alignment, Color, Italic/Bold and so on.
Copy Font Attribute
to All Language
Language
Copy the current font attributes to the font of all the languages.
It is related to the OS and input method, take Windows XP for example, if user wants to add the
English (America) and Japanese language, click the
249
on the system language bar, then choose
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
the “set” to add English(America) and Japanese as the following picture.
1
2
3
4
After add the English(America) and Japanese languages, user can finde the English(America) and
Japanese in the dropdown menu of Language
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.1 Text Library]
5
4.15.2 Address Tag
Address Tag component can be used to store the address information , and user can add description to
these addresses.
 Tag Address Interface
250
Advanced Part Component
*1. Import the address information (CSV file) to the Address Tag.
2. Export the address information of Address Tag to a CSV file, user can use Microsoft EXECEL to pen an edit this CSV file.
Build Address Tag attributes
Click the Add in Address Tag to open the Build Address Tag box, see the following table for details:
Description of Build Address Tag
Tag Name
Set the name of this address tag.
HMI
Choose the HMI number of this address tag.
PLC NO.
Choose PLC/controller number of this address tag.
Data Type
Choose the data type: word or bit.
Address Type
Choose the address type of address tag, it can be HMI register or PLC/controller register.
Address
Set the address of address tag.
Code Type
Display the code type of address tag: BIN or BCD
Format(range)
Display the address format and address range.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.2 Address Tag Library]
5
4.15.3 Event Information
Event Information is used to configure the event content and trigger conditions; it is used with the Event
Display and Event Bar together. Event Information supports bit register and word register to trigger
event.
☞For details about Event Display and Event Bar, refer to [Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm Component]
 Event Information Interface
*1. Import the event information (in CSV file) to the Event Information library.
2. Export the event information to a CSV file, user can use Microsoft EXECEL to pen an edit this CSV file.
251
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Event Attributes
Click the Add in the Event Information to open the Event attributes dialog box, see the following table for details:
Triggered
HMI
Type
In multiple HMI program, set the HMI where the Event Display or Event Bar displays this event information.
Set the event type: 0~255 are optional.
Event Display and Event Bar can display the event information conditionally according to the event type.
Address
Set the read address of trigger register, choose the bit or word type in Data Type.
Attributes
On
When specified bit register’s status changes from OFF to ON, an event log will be generated.
Off
When specified bit register’s status changes from ON to OFF, an event log will be generated.
<
When the value in specified register smaller than the specified value, an event log will be generated.
>
When the value in specified register larger than a specified value, an event log will be generated.
Bit
When the value in specified register equals the specified value, an event log will be generated.
Value Range: When the value in specified register equals is in the specified value range, an event log
will be generated.
Take the following picture for example, check the “Value Range”, set 5 to the Min Value and 10 to
==
Max Value , suppose the data in specified register is N , if 5<=N<=10, an event log will be generated.
Word
When the data in specified register is not equal to the set value, an event log will be generated.
For example, check the “Value Range”, set the Min Value to 15, set the Max Value to 30, suppose the
data in specified register is N , if N<15 or N>30, an event log will be generated.
<>
<=
When the data in specified register is less than or equal to the set value, an event log will be generated.
>=
When the data in specified register is more than or equal to the set value, an event log will be generated.
Print
Configure the Event Printing in the Printing Setting of HMI Attributes.
252
Advanced Part Component
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.8 Print Setting]
On Trigger
Print the event when event is triggered.
Return to Normal
Print the event when the event returns to normal.
Trigger Function
Execute Macro
The specified macro is triggered when the event happens.
Confirm Pop
When the event is touched in the Event Display component, pop up specified window.
2 2011/06/23 15:22:54
15
1 2011/06/23 14:01:00 14:44:20 14
0 2011/06/23 10:50:01 11:40:10 10
！
Pop-up Window
2 2011/06/23 15:22:54
15
1 2011/06/23 14:01:00 14:44:20 14
0 2011/06/23 10:50:01 11:40:10 10
2 2011/06/23 15:22:54
15
1 2011/06/23 14:01:00 14:44:20 14
0 2011/06/23 10:50:01 11:40:10 10
Note: please use the “Close window” function in Function Key to close the pop-up
window.
Trigger Pop
When the event is triggered, pop up specified window.
253
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Note: please use the “Close window” function in Function Key to close the pop-up
window.
Write Data
Word length is 3. Write (Trig) address is the specified address; Write (Confirm) address is the specified
address+1; Write (Resume) address is the specified address+2;
Write(Trig)
Write(Confirm)
Write(Resume)
0
When the event happens, set OFF to specified register.
1
When the event happens, set ON to specified register.
Not
When the event happens, reverse specified register status.
0
When the event confirm, set OFF to specified register.
1
When the event confirm, set ON to specified register.
Not
When the event confirm, reverse specified register status.
0
When the event resume, set OFF to specified register.
1
When the event resume, set ON to specified register.
Not
When the event resume, reverse specified register status.
When the event happens, trigger the buzzer. Buzzing Time ranges from 1 to 65535, the units is second.
User Buzzer
Text
Input text content that needs to be displayed in Event Display after event happens, click the Font to set the font attributes.
Data in LW register can be displayed in the event information, user can configure it according to the following format:
^xxxx^: Print header, which means print this content when the event is triggered the first time or a different event is triggered.
For example, print “water” as a header, the format is ^water^
%h:mm:s#: Print time;
%y:mm:d#: Print date;
%nnfmd: Print variable, % means the start sign, nn means register number of LW, ranges from 00 to 99, that is to say , it is from
LW0 to LW99, f means there is decimal in the data , d means the end sign. If there is no decimal in the data, the format can be
%nnd. Take printing the data in LW20 for example; there is a decimal in this data, use the %20f1d in the Text of the Event
Information. Note: If customer wants to print data in PLC register, use the Timer to transmit the dat to LW0~LW99.
Use
Text
The Text content reads from the text library, but not writes in the text box.
Library
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.1 Text Library]
Use Graph Font
Set the graph font for the text content in event display, user can set the font attribute after the “Use Graph
254
Advanced Part Component
Font” is checked.
When multiple languages is used in Text Library, user can choose language then set the font attributes of this
Language
language.
Sound
Play selected audio file when this event is triggered.
Select Sound
Note: Only the HMI with audio output port supports this function.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.6 Sound Lib]
Open
Text
Open the Text Library dialog box.
Library
Open
Address
Open the Address Tag dialog box.
Tag Library
4.15.4 Alarm Information
Alarm Information is used to configure the alarm content and trigger conditions; it is used with the Alarm
Display and Alarm Bar together. Alarm Information only supports bit register to trigger alarm.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm Component]
Alarm Information
*1. Import the alarm information (in CSV file) to the Alarm Information library.
2. Export the alarm information to a CSV file, user can use Microsoft EXECEL to pen an edit this CSV file.
255
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Alarm Attributes
Click the Add in the Alarm Information to configure the alarm information, see the following table for details:
Triggered HMI
In multiple HMI program, set the HMI where the Alarm Display or Event Bar displays this alarm
information.
Set the event type: 0~255 are optional.
Type
Alarm Display and Alarm Bar can display the event information conditionally according to the
event type.
PLC Address
Set the read address of trigger register, supports bit address only.
Use Address Tag
Use the address in the Address Tag library.
Address Tag Library
Open the Address Tag library dialog box.
Attributes
Trigger
On
When specified bit register changes from OFF to ON, an alarm log is generated.
Off
When specified bit register changes from ON to OFF, an alarm log is generated.
When the alarm is triggered, the buzzer will be buzzing. Buzzing Time: 1~65535 are optional , the
units is second.
User Buzzer
Text
Input the displaying constant when the alarm is triggered; click the Font to set the font attributes.
The Text content reads from the text library, but not writes in the text box.
Use Text Library
Use Graph Font
Language
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.1 Text Library]
Set the graph font for the text content in event display, user can set the font attribute after the “Use
Graph Font” is checked.
When multiple languages is used in Text Library, user can choose language then set the font
attributes of this language.
Sound
Play selected audio file when current alarm is triggered.
Select Sound
Note: Only the HMI with audio output port supports this function.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.15.6 Sound Lib]
256
Advanced Part Component
Text Library
Open the Text Library dialog box.
4.15.5 PLC Control
PLC Control is used to log in the trigger condition of some functions, when specified register satisfies the
setting condition, the corresponding function will be executed.


The function in PLC Control will not be limited by window, the function will execute as soon as the
condition is satisfied.
PLC Control Interface
*1. Import the control file constant (in CSV file) to the PLC Control library.
2. Export the control file constant to a CSV file, user can use Microsoft EXECEL to pen and edit this CSV file.
Alarm Attributes
 PLC Control Attributes
Click the Add in the PLC Control to open the dialog box, chose the control function in the Control Type and set the control
register and trigger condition.
The control type that PLC Control supports are as followings: Change Window (Ignore the window 0), Write Data to PLC
(Current Base Window number); Report Printout; Screen Hard Copy; General PLC Control; General PLC Control(Extended);
Backlight Close; Backlight Close (Write Back); Execute Macro Program; Backlight Open; Backlight Open(Write Back);
Sound Ctrl; Save Screen Shoot Data to Extended Memory.
See the following for details of the control type.
(1) Change Window
When the value in specified register changes to a valid window number, HMI will switch to the window with this window
257
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
number automatically. And write the new window number to the specified register+1 address.
For example, Suppose the current window number is 0, specified register address is D100, when the D100 is 10, the HMI
switches to the window 10, and return the new window number 10 to D101.
If the “Change Window” in PLC Control and “Change Common Window” in Function Key are used

at the same time, user can set an invalid window number to the control register by “Set at Window
Close” of Multiple State Setting component, in this way to avoid inputting the same window number, but
cannot change the window at the next time.
（2）Change Window (Ignore the window 0)
Change common window function, when the value in specified register is 0, HMI will not change to Window 0.
（3）Write Data to PLC (Current Base Window)
When switching common window, write the window number to specified register.
(4) Report Printout
Print the HMI screen according to the value in the specified register. When value in specified register changes and this value
is a valid window number, the constant in this window will be printed out.
1. HMI will not switch to the printed window when printing out this window in Print Out function.

2. The data in specified register will be reset to 0 automatically after printing.
3. Report Printout cannot print the constant in window 0.
258
Advanced Part Component
User can set the printing constant by the following two methods:
Method 1: Check the Custom Print Options
Attributes of Custom Print Options
Custom Print Attributes
Printer Color
Monochrome
Detail Description
Only the color printer supports switching printer color.
Color
Magnification
Ranges from 0.1 to 5.0(Zoom-out printing may causes anamorphous, we do not advice zoom-out
printing.)
Current Page
Start the printing at the first paper in printer.
Change page to print
Print a blank paper first, and then start the HMI screen printing.
Print the screen horizontally.
Horizontal print
Print Page
Print the screen vertically.
Vertical print
Automatically Take The
Paper
Print Text
Print a whole paper automatically when finishing the printing. This option
is only suitable for the stylus printer, micro printer does not support, and
laser printer has this setting itself, user needs not to set on HMI.
Print Text
Print the static text and tag text of current window.
Print Meter
Print meter component in current window.
Print Trend Curve
Print trend curve component in current window.
Print Bit Map
Print bit map component in current window.
Print All The Vector Graph
Print all vector graph component in current window.
Print Background Color
Print meter component in current window.
Method 2: Do not check the Custom Print Options; use the bits of LW9054 and LW9055 to set the print.
LW9054 Setting
Bit No.
Name
0（OFF）
1（ON）
Bit0
Print Text
Do not print
Print
Bit 1
Print Meter
Do not print
Print
Bit 2
Print Trend Curve
Do not print
Print
259
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Bit 3
Print Bit Map
Do not print
Print
Bit 4
Print All The Vector Graph
Do not print
Print
Bit 5
Print Background Color
Do not print
Print

Use the Multiple States Setting component to set the value of LW9054, if all the constant needs printing,
put the Multiple State Setting component in the common window(frame 1) and the setting mode is Set at
Window Open, set value is 255.
LW9055 Setting
0（OFF）
1（ON）
Each bits means zoom out 0.1
Each bits means zoom in 0.1 times (LW9055
times
ranges from 1 to 50, which means 0. 1 to 5 times.)
Bit NO.
Name
Bit 0~ Bit 7
Magnification
Bit 8
Printer Color
Color
Monochrome
Bit 9
Print page
Current page
Change page to print
For example, if the Magnification is 0.3, Monochrome printing and print current page, that is to say, set the LW.B9055.0,
LW.B9055.1, LW.B9055.8 and LW.B9055.9 On. User also can set the above configuration by LW9055 directly, set LW9055
to 259(bit 0, 1, 8 and 9 on means 259)
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 13.3 Print Function Setting Method]
5
（5）Screen Hard Copy
Screen Hard Copy is used to print current screen: when the specified bit register changes from OFF to ON, the current screen
is printed.
The Custom Print Options setting is the same as the Report Printout.
（6）General PLC Control
General PLC Control is used to transmit data between PLC/controller registers and HMI local registers.
When the Control Type is General PLC Control, system will distribute 4 registers to control transmit type, transmit data
length, offset of PLC/controller register address and offset of HMI register address. See the following table for details:
Address
Specified address
Function
Description
Store the transmit type code, different
There are 4 transmit type, see details in table 4.15.5_5,
codes
when the register is write new code, HMI executes
mean
different
transmitting
direction.
corresponding transmit and the register will be reset to 0
260
Advanced Part Component
after the transmitting finishes.
Specified address+1
Data length
The transmitting data length, units is word.
Specified address+2
offset of PLC/controller register address
This offset is for the “specified address +4”.
Specified address+3
Set the start address of HMI recipe register(RW) or local
offset of HMI register address
register(LW).
See the following table for details of transmit type.
Code
Data transmit type
Code
Data transmit type
1
PLC  RW(HMI Recipe register)
2
PLC  LW(HMI local register)
3
RW(HMI Recipe register)  PLC
4
LW(HMI local register)  PLC
For example: Transmit the data in D100~D104 (PLC register) to the RS100 ~RW104 (HMI recipe register).
Set D0 as the specified address in PLC Control, that is to say, D0 controls the Transmit Type, D1 controls the Transmit Data
Length, D2 controls the offset of data source register (PLC) and D3 controls the offset of destination register (HMI).
According to the example, D0=1 means transmit data from PLC to RW; D1=5 means there are 5 words (D100~D104)
needs transmitting; D2=96 which means PLC source address is D100=(96+0)+4, 0 means the start address in General PLC
Control. As the D0 to D3 are used for control register, so the source address is D4 , and the offset(96) is also for D4 , so the
PLC source register address is D2+ start address in General PLC Control(D0)+4. D3=100 means that the start address of
destination register is RW100.
(7)General PLC Control (Extend)
General PLC Control (Extend) is similar as the General PLC Control, it is also used to transmit data between PLC/controller
register sand HMI registers; the difference is that it distributes 6 registers to transmit type, transmit data length, offset of
PLC/controller register address and offset of HMI register address. See the following table for details
Address
Function
Description
Store the transmit type code,
There are 4 transmit type, see details in table 4.15.5_5, when the
different codes mean different
register is write new code, HMI executes corresponding transmit
transmitting direction
and the register will be reset to 0 after the transmitting finishes
Specified Address+1
Data length
The transmitting data length, units is word
Specified Address+2
offset of PLC/controller
Specified Address+3
register address
Specified Address
Specified Address+4
Specified Address+5
offset of HMI register address
This offset is for the “specified address +6”
Set the start address of HMI recipe register (RW) or local
register(LW)
（8）Backlight Close
When the specified bit register changes from OFF to ON, HMI turns off the backlight, and the backlight will be on again if
the screen is touched.
261
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
（9）Backlight Close(Write Back)
When the specified bit register changes from OFF to ON, HMI turns off the backlight, and reset the specified register to OFF.
The backlight will be on again if the screen is touched.
(10)Execute Macro Program
When the specified register satisfies the execute method, the specified macro will be executed.
The execute methods are as follows:
Execute Method
Description
ONOFF
When the status of specified register changes, HMI executes specified macro
OFFON
When the status of specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI executes specified macro
ONOFF
When the status of specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI executes specified macro
ON
When the status of specified register keeps ON, HMI executes specified macro
OFFON, reset
ONOFF, reset
When the status of specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI executes specified macro
At the same time reset the specified register to OFF automatically
When the status of specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI executes specified macro
At the same time reset the specified register to ON automatically
（11）Backlight Open
When the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI will turn on the backlight.
（12）Backlight Open (Write Back)
When the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI will turn on the backlight. At the same time HMI resets the
register to OFF.
262
Advanced Part Component
（13）Sound Control
When the specified register satisfies the setting condition, HMI plays specified audio file.
Execute Method
Description
ONOFF
When the status of specified register changes, HMI plays specified audio file
OFFON
When the status of specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI plays specified audio file
ONOFF
When the status of specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI plays specified audio file
OFFON, reset
ONOFF, reset
When the status of specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI plays specified audio file
At the same time reset the specified register to OFF automatically
When the status of specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI plays specified audio file
At the same time reset the specified register to ON automatically
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.4 Sound Lib Application]
!

Only the HMI with audio output port supports this Sound Control function
（14）Save Screenshot Data to Extended Memory.
When specified register changes from OFF to ON, save the current screen constant to the extended memory in picture.
!
1. Only the HMI with USB host and SD card supports this function

2. This function supports offline simulation, indirect online simulation and direct simulation. The
screenshot pictures are saved in the \disk\sd(usb1 or usb2)\scr file folder of Kinco HHMIware installation
route
User needs to set the extended device in the HMI Attributes>> HMI.
263
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The bmp pictures are named as year-month-day, hour: minute: second: millisecond, for example: 2010-09-01,
10:12:50:203.bmp. User also can define the picture name by system special register. The LW9470~LW9485 define the prefix
of file name, for example the constant in LW9470~LW9485 is “Version Num .20100001-”, then the screenshot picture
name is Version Num .20100001-2010-09-01,10:15:28:421.bmp.
!

After the save screenshot is executed, please do not plug out the extended memory device in 1 minute, or
the picture may cannot be saved.
4.15.6 Sound Lib
Sound Lib is used to save the wav or mp3 audio file. The system will transfer the audio file to snd format
file automatically, and user can call this file, the original audio file (WAV or mp3 file) are saved in the
sound file folder of current project.
Display the audio file
Import from extended memory
!
1. One imported audio file must be smaller than 256KB, but the audio file from the Using audio from

extended memory does not limit the file size.
2. Supports WAV, MP3 format audio file.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 5.4 Sound Lib Application]
264
Advanced Part Component
4.15.7 Data Logger
Data Logger is used to sample data and set sampling method, these data can be displayed on Data Report
component.
●Interface of Data Logger
Display logged data
1. Import: .Import the data sampling information in CSV file format to the Data Logger
2. Export: Export all logged in sampling data to a CSV file; this file is editable by Microsoft EXCEL.
 Data Logger Attributes
Click the Add to open the Data Logger attributes dialog window, the detail attributes are as follows:
Detail Description of Data sampling properties.
Sample Point
The total sample point number, it ranges from 1~999999
Circle Sampling
Sample the data periodically.
Trigger Sampling
Trigger sampling when the specified register satisfies the condition.
Sample Continue
The sampling continues even if all the sampling points are finished.
Sample Once
The sampling stops when all the sampling points are finished, that is to say , the
Sample Type
Get Datatype
sampling is executed only once.
Channel
The continuous sampling registers number, 16 channels at most.
It is invalid if the Sampling Type is Circle Sampling.
Circle
Sample
Param
Trigger Type
Sample Circle
The time interval between each two sampling points, the unit is millisecond.
Viable Circle
Read sample circle from specified register in circle sampling.
It is invalid if the Sampling Type is Trigger Sampling.
OFFON
ONOFF
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI triggers the
sampling..
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI triggers the
sampling..
265
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
OFFON
OFFON(reset)
ONOFF(Reset)
Data Type
Only when the specified register changes its status, HMI triggers the sampling..
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI triggers the
sampling, and then reset the specified register automatically.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI triggers the
sampling, and then reset the specified register automatically.
Set the display data format for the sampling data, there are six formats , they are
Sample
16-bit signed, 16-bit unsigned, 32-bit signed, 32-bit unsigned, float, double and
Channel
string.
Description
Set the description name for the channel
If the Variable Circle is checked, the variable value is used preferentially, if the variable value cannot be get
because of communication lost , HMI uses the default value(the Sample Circle) .
Detail Description of Data Sample Control
Set the start address of sampling data, the word length depends on the channel and data type. Take the
following picture for example: there are 4 channels, their data types are 16-bit signed, 32-bit signed,
float and double. So the word length is 9, because the 16-bit signed is one word, 32-bit signed is two
words; float is two words and double is 4 words.
Sample Address
Save Disk
The external memory device of HMI, the SD Card, USB1 and USB2 are
optional.
Save Dir
Sample Data
The subdirectory where sampling data is saved in the external memory device.
The default name is SampleDataStore, customers can change this name
Save
themselves,
and
the
detail
route
of
this
file
is
\external
device\database\subdirectory name\export file name.db.
The file format is .db.
Variable Dir
Sample Data
Clear
The subdirectory name is read from specified register, the max word length is 16.
Use a bit register to clear the sample data and delete the file in the database.
OFFON
ONOFF
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI clears the
sample data.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF, HMI clears the
sample data.
266
Advanced Part Component
OFFON
Only when the specified register changes its status, HMI clears the sample data.
Only when the specified register changes from OFF to ON, HMI clears the
OFFON(reset)
sample data. and then reset the specified register automatically.
Only when the specified register changes from ON to OFF,
ONOFF(Reset)
HMI clears the
sample data., and then reset the specified register automatically.
Use a specified bit register to pause the sampling, ON means HMI stops sampling and OFF means
HMI starts sampling.
Pause Sample
Note: In Sample Once mode, this register will be set ON automatically when the sampling is finished,
user can set this register OFF to trigger the sampling again.
4.15.8 Schedule List
Schedule List is used to configure the operation which will be executed in specific time.

【Schedule List】Interface
※1.Import the CSV file which include schedule list format into【Schedule List】in the current project.
2.Export all the schedule information in current project to specific directory and saved as CSV file.This file can be open
by Microsoft EXCEL.
 【Schedule List】Setting
Click 【Add】 in【Schedule List】to open the setting window of【Schedule List】,its attributes are shown as follows.
Descriptions
Execute HMI List
Select the HMI which will execute the schedule.
Basic Pro.
Execute when power on
Select
If HMI power on after the setting time of schedule, then it will execute the “Begin
267
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
item param” automatically.
If HMI power on before setting time of schedule and select “End item
param”,then it will execute the “End item param” automatically.
If HMI power on after setting time of schedule and select “End item param”, then
it won’t execute “Begin item param” automatically,but it will execute the end item
param automatically.If “End item param” is not selected,then no item will be
executed.
Unselect
If HMI power on before setting time of schedule and
not select “End item
param”,then it will execute
Trig Beep.It is used to set the buzzer when start executing preset operation.The range of buzzer is
1~65535s.
When selecting this option,then the begin date and end date can be different,but
there can only select one begin date and one end date.
For example, begin date is 9:00:00 Sunday,end date is 17:30:00 Tuesday.
Date and Time
UseSingleDate
Begin item param End item param
9:00
17:30
Sunday
Tuesday
268
Advanced Part Component
When unselecting this option, then the schedule is executed within one day(means
from the begin date to end date is within 24 hours) ,but it can set multiple begin
date and end date.
Note:If the time of end date is earlier than the time of begin date,then the end item
param will be executed in next day.
Set
Begin Date
time
and
day
for
begin
item
param.Format
is
HH:MM:SS
(Hour:Minute:Second).Range:hour（0~23），minute（0~59），second（0~59）
End Date
When selecting [Use end date],the time of end date can be set.
When selecting[UseSingleDate],the day of end date can be set.
It is used to set schedule time and date by local or PLC address.
If unselecting [Use end date]，it will occupy 4 words,these addresses are only used
for begin date.
The variable date addr.=Week. Bit0:Sunday(0:Invalid, 1:Valid)……Bit6:Saturday
(0:Invalid, 1:Valid).The format is as following figure.
Variable
Addr.
Date
The variable date addr.+1=Hour
The variable date addr.+2=Minute
The variable date addr.+3=Second
Exammple 1:The variable date addr. is LW0,then Week=LW0,Hour=LW1,
Mintue=LW2,Second=LW3.
If selecting [Use end date],it will occupy 8 words,then these addresses are used
for begin date and end date.
Example 2:if the variable date addr. is LW0,then the begin date is:Week=LW0,
Hour=LW1,Minute=LW2,Second=LW3.End date is:Week=LW4,Hour=LW5,
Minute=LW6,Second=LW7.
269
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Descriptions
Control Info.
Execute Type
Descriptions as follows.
On: it will set the specific bit address as on at the beginning time.
For example, beginning time is 9:30:00.
Off:it will set the specific bit address as off at the beginning time.
For example:beginning time is 9:30:00
Bit Set
Toggle:it will switch the status of the specific bit address at beginning time.If the orginal
status of the bit address is off,then it will switch to on.Or it will switch to off.
For example,beginning time is 9:30:00
Set Constant:it will write a constant to specific register at the beginning time.
For example:beginning time is 9:30:00,constant value is 100 and specific register is 4x1.
Word Set
Add Value:it will use the original value of specific register to add an addend at the
beginning time,and its final value will not exceed the upper limit.
For example:beginning time is 9:30:00,addend is 3,upper limit is 80 and specific register
is 4x1.
270
Advanced Part Component
Sub Value: it will use the original value of specific register to subtract a subtrahend at
the beginning time,and its final value will not exceed the lower limit.
For example:beginning time is 9:30:00,subtrahend is 3,lower limit is 9 and specific
register is 4x1.
Data type
It is used to select the data type of setting value.It supports 16-bit signed\16-bit
unsigned,32-bit signed\32-bit unsigned,float,double.
Write Address
Set the address which is used for execution.
Variable Param
Use variables to change the set value(for set constant),Addend,upper(for add),subtrahend and lower(for
Address
sub)
!
1.
If the write addresses are the same in schedule list,it is forbidden to set the same time and date to
them.
2.
Every time in schedule list only executes once.When it reaches execution time,the specific address
will be written a value once.
3.
Because it needs to read the data of [Word Set] and [Control Setting],the execution maybe delay
according to the data communication.
4.
When selecting [Variable Date Address],system will read the address cyclically,the cycle time depends
on the busyness of system.
5.
When the value of the variable date address exceeds the range of standard time,then the setting
schedule will be wrong.
4.16 Auxiliary Component
4.16.1 Scale
Scale Component is used to set equal scale label for some components, like Bar Picture, Meter and so on.
So components has scale itself, they also can use the Scale component.
271
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Description of Scale component
Horizontal
Vertical
Arc
Circularity
Style
Equal Division
Set the equal division number
Line Length
Set the scale length of Arc and Circularity style
Start/End Angle
Set the start and end angle of Acr style
Line Color
Set the line color
4.16.2 Timer
When the setting time is up, Timer will execute corresponding functions, like macro, setting parameters,
data transmission and so on.
Description of Timer Attributes.
Timer function will be executed as soon as the timer is initialized, and stopped
All time
automatically after the Repeat Count. Then the timer will not be triggered till the next
initialization. If the Repeat Count is 0, that means the function is executed all the time.
Timer function will be executed as soon as the frame is initialized, and stopped
Initial frame
automatically after the Repeat Count. Then the timer will not be triggered till the next
initialization. It is the almost the same the “All time” Trigger Mode.
Trigger Mode
Close frame
Timer function will be executed when the frame is close.
The function will be triggered according to the Trigger Address. When the Repeat Count
By
is 0, it means that the function will be executed till the trigger condition is canceled.
re-address
When the repeat Count is N, it means that the function will be executed N times if
address is triggered, then it will stop automatically.
Execution Cycle
Response Mode
The execution cycle of timer, the unit is hundred milliseconds. The timer executes the Timer Function
one time in every execution cycle.
Immediate
Timer executes the function immediately when the condition is triggered.
272
Advanced Part Component
Delay
Trigger State
Repeat Count
Trigger Address
Timer executes the function in the next execution cycle when the condition is triggered.
That is to say, there will be one circle delay.
In the By reg-address mode, the Trigger State is On or Off.
The execution number of timer function. If the Repeat Count is 0, it means the function will be
executed all the time.
In the By reg-address mode, set the register address for trigger register.
Execute Macro
Execute the specified macro program. That is to say, when the timing time is up, the macro will be executed
Data Transmission
Transmit the data in batch. When the timing time is up, timer transmits corresponding length data from Source Address to
Destination Address
Source Address
Set the source address of data
Destination Address
Set the destination address of transmitting data
Data Type
Set the type of transmitting data, bit or word
Data Length
Set the number of transmitting data
State Setting
Change the state or value of specified register. When the timing time is up, timer changes the state of corresponding bit
register or write value to the word register.
Bit
Set Value
When the “Execution Cycle” time is up, set the bit register to 0 or 1.
Periodical Toggle
When the “Execution Cycle” time is up, toggle the bit register between 0 and 1.
Periodical
Add an Asc value (K) to the data (V) of specified register automatically in every execution
JOG++(circle)
circle. When the data reaches to the Upper limit, it will start from 0 again.
Periodical
Subtract a Desc value (K) from the data (V) of specified register automatically in every
JOG--(one way)
execution circle. When the data reaches to the Lower limit, the data will stop at the lower
Word
limit.
273
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Add an Asc value (K) to the data (V) of specified register automatically in every execution
circle. When the data reaches to the Upper limit, it will stop at the Upper limit.
Periodical
JOG++(one way)
Add a Step value (K) to the data (V) of specified register automatically in every execution
circle. When the data reaches to the Upper limit, subtract a Step value (K) in every
execution circle till 0, then start add Step a value (K) to the data again, repeat the above
Periodical
process circularly.
Bounce(turnover
Lower
limit
upon limit)
T
V+K
Upper limit
NO
YES
YES
NO
Lower limit
V-K
Add a Step value (K) to the data (V) of specified register automatically in every execution
circle, when the data reaches to the Upper limit, it will be reset to the Lower limit, then start
to add step value again from the Lower limit.
Step Up(circle)
Step
Subtract a Desc value (K) from the data (V) of specified register automatically in every
Down(circle)
execution circle, when the data reaches the Lower limit, it will be reset to the Upper limit,
then start to subtract step value again from the Upper limit.
Set Constant
When the timing time is up, the preset constant will be written to the specified register.
274
Advanced Part Component
4.16.3 Scroll Bar
Scroll Bar is used to change the value of HMI or PLC register by moving the slider, and the scaling
relation between actual value and Min/Max is displayed by the position of slider.
Description of Scroll Bar Attributes
Word Length of Index Number
Word and Double Word are optional.
Direction
Set the direction of scroll bar, there are four directions; they are From Left To Right,
From Right To Left, From Up to Down and From Down to UP.
Background Image
Set the background image of scroll bar, there are three options; they are Not Used,
Vector Graphics and Bitmap.
Import Image
Import the background image from the system image library.
Button Image
Set the button image of scroll bar, there are three options; they are Not Used, Vector
Graphics and Bitmap.
Import Image
Import the button image from the system image library.
Description of Scroll Bar Extended Attributes
Slider Width
Set the width of slider, ranges from 1 to 99. Uncheck means that the slider uses the
default width, which is 10 pixels.
Max/Min Value Setting
Variable
Max/Min
Set the start value and max value of scroll bar.
Value
Set the variable for the Min and Max for the scroll bar, and set the register address, the
Setting
specified address is the Min, and the specified address+1 is the Max.
Set Scroll Mode
Ranging from 1 to 100, each time user clicks scroll bar , it adds or subs the setting value.
!

The Scroll Bar will not takes 3 words after V1.4.0.0, because the Min and Max can be set as constant, if the
Min and Max use variable, user can set the register separately.
275
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
4.16.4 Date/Time
Date/Time component is used to display HMI system date and time in specified format.
Description of Time attributes
Display Date
Set the component to display date or not
Date format
Four formats are optional. DD means day, MM means month, YY means year.
Date Separator
Three formats are optional, for example, 2011.01.01.
Year
Checked means Timer displays year in 4 numbers, for example 2011; unchecked
4-digital
Display
means Timer displays year in 2 numbers, for example 11.
Zero suppress for
Checked means there is not a 0 before year and month take June for example, when
Year and Day
this option is checked, Timer displays 6, if unchecked, and Timer displays 06.
Display Week
Set the component to display week or not, the week is displayed in abbr.
Display Time
Set the component to display the time or not.
Time
Two formats are optional: HH means hour, MM means minutes, SS means second.
12-hour System
Checked means Time is displayed in 12-hour system, take the three o'clock in the
(AM/PM)
afternoon for example, if this option is checked, it displays 3:00 PM , if
unchecked , it displays 15:00.
The Date/Time component can read the RTC time in the HMI, but cannot change it. If user need to change

the date or time, they can change it in HMI SETUP screen or via system special
registers(LW10000~LW10006)
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.7 RTC Set]
5
4.16.5 Note Pad
Note Pad is the message board function; it is used together with the Message Board function in the
Function Key.
276
Advanced Part Component
4.16.6 File List
File List is used to display the file information in the external memory device. It is divided into three area:
the left part displays the file folder information of current catalog. Upper right part displays the file
information of current catalog; the Lower right part displays the chosen project file (.pkg file) or recipe file
(.rcp file) of current catalog.
..\
event\
exmem\
historystore
log\
\scr\
trend\
Test.pkg
File information
of current catalog
HMI0:
Chosen file HMI
information of current
catalog
File folder information
of current catalog
File list component is a special component; it is usually used together with the Import/Export function of Function Key.
System also provides [Frame5: File List Window] as file list when user import/export project file or recipe file in the SETUP
screen. And the File Browser Window can be changed in the HMI Attributes.
4.16.7 Trigger Touch
Trigger Touch is used to trigger multiple components without touching them, when the specified address
satisfies the setting Trigger Type condition, all the components in the Trigger Touch area will be
triggered.
Take the following component for example:
The components (1, 3 and 4) are in the Trigger Touch area.
277
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
The component 2 is not in the Trigger Touch area.
When the specified address satisfies the setting Trigger Type condition, the 1, 3 and 4 will be trigged, but 2 will not be
triggered, because it is out of the Trigger Touch area.
Detail Description of Trigger Touch
Trigger Touch
OFFON
ONOFF
OFFON
OFFON (reset)
ONOFF (reset)
Description
When the specified register changes from OFF to ON, the components in the Trigger Touch area will
be triggered.
When the specified register changes from ON to OF, the components in the Trigger Touch area will be
triggered.
When the specified register changes its state, the components in the Trigger Touch area will be
triggered.
When the specified register changes from OFF to ON, the components in the Trigger Touch area will
be triggered. At the same time, reset the specified register to OFF.
When the specified register changes from ON to OFF, the components in the Trigger Touch area will
be triggered. At the same time, reset the specified register to ON.
278
5 Better Understanding of Library
In Kinco HMIware, user can load the text, address tag, graphic and sound in the database, when they need to use this
information, they can call it from the database directly, this database is called library in Kinco HMIware. This chapter will
give you a detail description of how to use library.
5.1 Text Library
We will describe how to use Text Library in this section.
5.1.1 Create a Text Library
(1) Click on the Option (O) menu>>Text Library (T) or the
icon in the tool bar or the Text Library in the Project
Database of Graph element window to open the Text Library dialog box.
(2) Click on the Add to pop up the Add Text dialog box.
For example, build a text item named “Start Motor”, the State Num is 2, each text supports 256 states at most. Click on
the Ok to finish building the text, and click on the Cancel to give up this text.
!
The Name of text cannot be modified after it is built
After setting the Name and State Num, click on the OK to the next step.
(3) The text named “Start Motor” has been added to the Text Library, click on the
icon before “Start Motor” to
view the states of this text, there are two states: 0 and 1. Click on the blank area under the each language to input text content.
In this example , we input “启动” in the language1 of state 0，and “停止”in the language1 of state 1; Input “Start” in
the language2 of state 0，and “Stop” in the language2 of state 1.
279
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Besides, user can add/delete/modify the text state by right click option, take the following picture for
example:
(4) Click on the OK to close the Text Library dialog box after editing. Check the “Use Textlib” in Tag option of a
component and then select a already built text in list.
280
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
5.1.2 Export/Import Text Library
The built text library can be exported in a csv file, and the csv file also can be import into the Text Library.
!
Import/export the whole text library, but cannot import/export a single text item
(1) Export text library
The exported csv file can be edit by Microsoft Excel.
(2) Import text library
5.1.3 Set the Language of Text Library
Click on the Language Setting in the HMI Extended Attributes option of HMI Attributes or the Language in the Text Library
dialog box to open the Language Setting dialog box, and then set the global font attributes of each language.
281
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

1. The font attributes in Language Setting is global, and the font attributes in the tag option is only for the
tag content of current component.
2. If the font attributes in Language Setting change, it will not affect the font attributes of the tag which
has already used the text in text library, if user want this font attributes to be the same as the Language
Setting, they can cancel the “Use Textlib”in the tag and then recheck it, so the font attributes is
refreshed.
5.1.4 Text Library Application

Edit the Text Library quickly
When there is a lot of text content in text library, user can export the text library in a csv file , then edit it in the Microsoft
excel, it is very conveniently to edit in this way.
Firstly, build a text library, and then set the state number and text content.
Export the text library to a csv file in your PC, and then open and edit it by Microsoft Excel, you can edit the text name, state
number, text content and add new text item.
!
The Name, Status, Language1~32 are fixed formwork, if they are modified, there will be problem when
the csv file is imported to the Text Library.
Save the csv file before close it：
282
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
At last, import the text library file (textlib.csv) to the project.
!
When importing the text library file, if there is a text in the project text library has the same name as the text
in the file, there will be a tip to warn that whether you want to cover the same name text or not, the covered
text cannot be regained.

Use Text Library to switch multiple languages
Use the special system register LW9130 to switch the languages in text library
When LW9130=0, HMI displays the text content in Language1; when LW9130=1, HMI displays the text content in
Language2….and so on, When LW9130=31, HMI displays the text content in Language32; if the LW9130>31, HMI
displays the text content in Language1.
!
The Number of Language in the HMI Extended Attributes of HMI Attributes will limit the language number
in Text Library. The default language number is 8 in Text Library, even if the LW9130>8 , HMI only
displays the Language1~Language8. If user wants to use more than 8 languages, he needs to set the Max
Lang Num in Language Setting, and the Number of Language must be smaller than Max Lang Num. The
283
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Default Language means the default language that HMI displays, for example, the language2 is English in
Text Library, if the Default Language is 2, HMI will display the text content in English till LW9130 changes.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.6 Language Switching]
5.2 Address Tag Library
We will describe how to use Address Tag library in this section
5.2.1 Build a Address tag Library
(1) Click on the Option (O) menu>>Address Tag (A) or the
icon in the tool bar or the Address Tag in the Project
Database of Graph element window to open the Text Library dialog box.
(2) Click on the Add to pop Build Address Tag dialog box
For example, build an address tag named “Start Motor”, the address is M0. Click on the OK to finish building this address
tag, and click on Cancel to give up this address tag.
5.2.2 Address Tag Application
After building the address tag in Address Tag Library, check the Use Address Tag, and chose the corresponding address tag
name. Take the following picture for example:
284
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library

Bit component can only use the bit address tag; and the word component can only use the word address tag.
The Address Tag library supports being imported and exported; the import/export operation is the same as
the Text Library.
5.3 Graphic Library
Kinco HMiware provides user rich vector graphic and bit map. User can draw vector graphics, like, switch, lamp and so on.
User also can import external pictures to bit map. We will describe how to use the Graphic Library in this section.
5.3.1 Import Graphics
(1) Import Graphics
There are three methods to open the Import Graphic dialog box
1. Click on the icon
2. Click on the Import Graphics Library in Draw (D) menu.
3. Click on the Import Graphics in the Graphics option of a component attributes.
a. Switch the states of selected graphic.
b. When all graphic are not displayed in above area, click on Refresh to display them all.
c. Choose a wanted graphic in above area, click on the Import to load this graphic (vg or bg) to current project.
d. Close the Import Graphic dialog box
e. Set the graphic type that needs displaying in following area.
f. Open the route selection dialog box.
There are two sources for graphic library
System graphic library: The graphic library in software, it is in the vg_bg_lib file folder of Kinco HMIware installation file
folder.
285
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
There are two parts for graphic display area, the upper half displays all thumbnail in graphic library, the lower half displays
all states’ preview graphic of selected graphic
Import graphic from system graphic library, for example, import the button named “Button1-00.vg”from the System
Graphic Library>>Vg>> Button, the operation steps are as follows:
286
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library


If the imported vector graphic (vg) or bit graphic (bg) has the same name as the graphic in current project
graphic library, there will be a Modify Image Name dialog box to input a new name.
User-defined Library Path: user can import a vg or bg from a specified route, that is , user can import the graphics from
the vg file folder of other project files. For example , import graphic from D:\Program Files\Kinco\Kinco HMIware\
project \control system\ vg, the steps are as follows:
Image Liarary
System Image Library
User-Defined Library Path
......
Type All graphs（.vg,.bg）
2
1
Image Library State
State
System Image Library
User-Defined Library Path
......
3
Image Library State
State
Refresh
287
Import
Exit
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Multiple vg/ bg cannot be imported/exported at the same time
2. Export Graphic
The imported vg/bg from system library or the new build vg/bg graphics are stored in the vg file folder of project file folder.
There are two methods to save the graphic in current project to system graphic; they are stored in vg_bg_lib>>vg /BG
>>UserselPath file folder of Kinco HMIware installation file folder. So user can use these graphics in the other project.
1. Project File Window>> Vector Graph
2. Graphic option of component attributes
288
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
5.3.2 Build New Graphics
If the vg/bg in system graph library cannot satisfy user’s application, he can build new vg/bg himself.
(1) Build a new vector graph
The New Graphics button
For example, draw a indicator light name “Lamp” and has two states: Click on the icon
Draw (D) menu to open the New Graphics dialog box:
289
or New Graphics (N) of
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
New Graphics dialog box
Name
The name of new graph
State Num
Set the state number of new graph, it is 256 at most
Type
The type of new graphic: vector graph or bit map
Width/Height
Set the width and height of new graph, the unit is pixel
File Name
The store route of new graph
Description
The note information for new graph
!
The width and height cannot be modified after being built.
Choose the Vector Graph type, input “Lamp” as its name and set 3 to State Number, use the default width (100) and height
(100). Click on OK to enter the graphics edit window:
View Area
Edit Area
Draw the graphics for State0 and State1; see the drawing steps as follows:
Example
Draw a base for the lamp
290
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
1.Choose State0
2. Choose the Ellipse in the draw tool
bar.
3. Move the mouse to edit area, and left
click when the + icon appears.
4. Draw a ellipse
☞For details about how to draw a
ellipse, refer to [Advanced Part 2.2
Draw]
Example
Set the graph attributes
2
1. Double click the ellipse to open
1
graphic dialog box.
2. Set the ellipse attributes as follows:
Example
Line Color
RGB(230,230,250)
Filling Color
RGB(230,230,250)
Draw lamp and flashing effect
1. Draw a ellipse which is smaller than
the base.
2. Set the ellipse attributes as follows:
Line Color
RGB(0,255,0)
Filling Color
RGB(0,255,0)
3. Draw a short line on lamp as the
flashing effect.
☞For details about how to draw a
line, refer to [Advanced Part 2.2 Draw]
Example
Draw graph for State1
291
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1. Select all the graphics of State0 and
state0
state1
copy(Ctrl+A and Ctrl+C)
state0
2. Select the State1, paste the graphics
state1
to state1(Ctrl+V)
3. Set the lamp attributes of Stae1 as
1
2
state0
state1
follows:
Line Color
RGB(255,0,0)
Filling Color
RGB(255,0,0)
3
After drawing the lamp graphics, click on the Save in File menu or icon
the
to save the new graphic, at last click on
icon to close the graph edit window.
The new vector graphics will be saved as vg format file, they are in the vg file folder of current project file folder

User can only use the draw bar to draw pictures on vector, but cannot add some text or external picture to
vector graph.
Save to the VG map
User also can draw vector graphics in project edit window and then save them as VG map.
For example, draw a vector graph named “button”, and has two states. The drawing steps are as follows:
Example
Draw graphics for State0
1. Draw a polygon in HMI Edit
Window
2. Double click the polygon, setits
attributes as follows:
Line Color
RGB(0,0,0)
Filling Color
RGB(165,165,165)
3. Copy (Ctrl +C) and paste (Ctrl +V)
the polygon.
4. Rotate the polygon2 horizontally and
then vertically.
5. Double click the polygon2 to set its
292
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
attributes as follows:
Line Color
RGB(0,0,0)
Filling Color
RGB(255,255,255)
6. Draw a rectangle, and double click to
set its attributes as follows:
Line Color
RGB(0,0,0)
Filling Color
RGB(0,255,0)
Now finish drawing the graphics of
State0.
☞For details about how to draw a
rectangle, refer to [Advanced Part 2.2
Draw]
Example
Save the graphics of State0
1. Select all the graphics of State0, then
right click.
2. Choose the Save to the VG map in
the right click option
3. Set a name for this vector graph in
the popped up dialog box, and then
click on OK to save.
Example
Draw graphics for State1
1. Select all he graphics of State0, and
then copy (Ctrl +C) and paste (Ctrl
+V)
2. After pasting , exchange the two
polygon, and set the rectangle’s
attributes as follow:
Line Color
RGB(0,0,0)
Filing Color
RGB(255,0,0)
Now finish drawing the graphics of
State1.
Example
Save the graphics of State1
293
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1. Select all the graphics of State1, then
right click.
2. Choose the “Save as VG map” in
right click options.
3. Choose the “Save to VG map” in
the popped up dialog box.
4. Choose the “New State” in the
Graphics States.

The New States in Save VG map dialog box means add a new state to the vg, Update Current State means
replace a specified state.
User can view the saved vg in Vector Graph of Project file window.
(2) Build a new bit map
For example, build a new bit graph named “Button”, and it has two states. Click on the New Graphics (N) of Draw (D)
menu or icon
to open the New Graphic dialog box.
294
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
Choose the Bit Map type and input “Button” as its name, set the State Num to 2, and then click on the OK to enter the
graph edit window
Import a picture for State0:
Import a picture for State1
295
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
After import pictures to bit map, click on the Save in the File menu or the icon
icon
to save bit map, at last click on the
to exit the graph edit window.
The new build bit graph will be saved as bg format file, it is saved in the vg file folder of current project file folder. The
imported original bmp, jpg, gif pictures are saved in the image file folder of project file folder.
!
1. Do not delete any file in the vg file folder, or the vg/bg cannot display normally in the project.
2. User can only load external picture to bit graph, but cannot use draw tool to draw pictures or add text on it.
3. If user load gif format picture to bit graph, the gif cannot be controlled by component state, for example, if
the Bit State Switch uses the gif picture, the component displays the gif animation effect, no matter the
component is ON or OFF.
Kinco HMIware supports reading the pictures from extended memory devices to bit map; it can save the HMI memory.

Only the HMI with USB host and SD card port support reading picture from extended memory device.
Example: Put a picture (background.bmp) in the U disk or SD card (It is USB1 in this example), the HMI project read this
picture (background.bmp) in the U disk.
1. Copy the picture (background.bmp) to the U disk.
296
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
2. Build a new bitmap: Click on the icon
or the New Graphics(N) in the Draw(D) menu to pop up New Graphics dialog
box: Name: background, State Num: 1, Type: Bitmap.
3. Using picture from extended memory
297
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

1. The File Name must be the same as the picture name in the extended memory.
2. The picture can be bmp, jpg or gif or png format.
3. The picture must be in the root directory of extended memory.
After above setting, click the icon
to save the bitmap, and click on the icon
at the upper right to close the graph edit
window.
5.3.3 Edit Graphics

How to open the Graph Edit Window
Open the Graph Edit Window as shown in following picture:

Delete the graph
Delete the vg/bg graph in current project as shown in following picture:
Click on the Yes to delete the chosen vg/bg, and click on the No to cancel this operation.
Add/delete states for graphics
User can add/delete graphics states in the Graph Edit Window.
298
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
Add state
(1) Add States in the right click options
state0
state1
state0
1
state1
2
3
state0
(2) The icon
state1
in the tool bar: choose one state, and then click on the icon
Delete States
(1) Delete States in the right click options.
299
to add state.
state2
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
(2) The icon
in the tool bar: choose one state, and then click on the icon
to delete this sate.
Delete States

The icons
and
are used to add/delete window in HMI Edit Window, and add/delete graph states in
Graph Edit Window.
Zoom in/Zoom out edit area
In the graph edit window, it is not easy to edit graph if the edit area is too small, user can use the zoom in function to zoom in
the edit area.
In the graph edit window, click on the icon
the icon
to zoom in the work space, the maximum is 300%; In the same way, click on
to zoom out the work space, the minimum is 25%. See the 200% effect as follows:
Gray level of graph
Click on the icon
to switch the gray level of current graph.
300
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
The transparent color of bit graph
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.2.6 About Transparent Color]
6
5.3.4 How to Use the Graphics
(1) How to use the vector and bit graphics.
Take the lamp, button and background pictures for example:
Add a Bit State Switch to the edit window, and use the Bitmap in Graphics option.
Add a Bit State Lamp, and use the Vector Graph in Graphics option.
301
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Add a Bitmap component as a background picture.

The bitmap which uses the picture from extended memory device does not support the “Use Original
Size” function; user needs to adjust the size according to the original size himself.
The simulation effect is as follows:
(2)Optimize the bitmap
302
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library
The bitmap supports the multiple formats picture, like BMP, JPG, JPE, JPEG, GIF, and PNG. But the color and size of
imported pictures will affect the HMI project size and execution speed. Please note the following issues when you import a
picture to the bitmap:

The resolution of imported picture cannot be higher than HMI’s resolution, for example the HMI’s resolution is
640*480, and the imported picture’s resolution should be lower than 640*480. User can edit the picture to the same
size as component by picture edit tool before importing this picture to the project, for example, a bitmap is used in a
component with the width and height 100*100, and user can edit the picture to resolution 100*100 before importing
this picture to bitmap. If you do not need the high resolution display, edit the picture as small as possible before
importing, and then zoom in the program.

The pictures saved in HMI are lossless compression in BMP format, if the imported pictures are loss compression in
JPG, the pictures will be larger after compiling, and the resolutions will loss. That is, when using bit map. Please
optimize the picture size, and chose compression format according to the actual application.

Relatively Speaking, the vector graph takes much smaller size than bit map. That is, do not use too many bit maps in
the program, use vector graphics as possible, it also can make HMI execute faster.
5.4 Sound Lib Application
Kinco HMIware supports sound files, like WAV, MP3 formats. They can be used for touch sound or Event/Alarm sound.

1. The audio output port does not support OPAMP function; user needs to connect a loud speaking to this
port.
2. A signal imported sound file must be smaller than 256K, but if the sound file is saved in extended memory,
the size is not limited.
3. Supports WAV and MP3 formats only.
4. Only the HMI with audio output port support Sound Lib function.
5.4.1 Import Audio File
Click on the icon
or Graph element window>>Project Database>>Sound Lib to open the Sound Library box.
303
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Name
Size(Byte)
Current Sound:
Sound Processing
2
Import...
play
Using audio from
Delete

1
3
The system will convert the imported sound file to snd file automatically; the original sound file is saved in
the sound file folder of current project file.
The sound file also can be read from extended memory, which can save HMI’s memory.
[Example]: Read the sound file named “sound4.mp3” from U disk. First, save the sound4.mp3 file to the root catalog of U
disk.
Root directory
Choose the “Using audio from extended memory” in Sound Library.
304
Advanced Part Better Understanding of Library

1. The File Name must be the same as the name of sound file in the extended memory.
2. The audio file read from extended memory must be mp4 format, the wav is not supported.
3. The audio file must be saved in the root catalog of extended memory.
4. The size of audio file is not limited , it depends on the memory size of extended memory device.
5.4.2 How to Use Audio File
(1)How to use audio file
Only the HMI with audio output port has the Sound option in component attributes. The audio file will be played till the it is
over when the component is touched, and this sound cannot be paused.
The Alarm/Event Information also can use the sound as the alarm sound.
305
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
(2)Adjust the audio volume
User can use the system register LW9464 to adjust the volume, if LW9464=0, it means sound off. The value of LW9464 is
from 1 to 100, which means the volume is larger.
306
6 System Parameters
6.1 HMI Attributes
Double the HMI icon or right click the HMI icon and choose the Attribute to open the HMI Attributes box. User can
configure some HMI system parameters in this box.
6.1.1 HMI
Detail description of HMI Attributes option
Network Setting
IP
Set the IP address for the HMI with Ethernet port
Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask for the HMI with Ethernet port
Default Gateway
Set the gateway of LAN which HMI is connected to
Enable the FTP function and set a password.
Open FTP
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 14.2.4 FTP Function]
Network Device
Configure the Ethernet protocol when HMI communicates with
Setting
PLC/controller via Ethernet
Display Setting
Display the HMI display mode
Field Bus Setting
Configure the field bus protocol and parameters when HMI communicates with
PLC/controller via field bus
Save Screenshots to The
Extended Memory
Choose the extended memory device where the screenshots are saved. Only the HMI with
extended memory supports this function
307
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Description
Input description for HMI , this description will distinguish different HMI when
downloading and simulating
6.1.2 Task Bar
The display effect on HMI is as follows:
a. Fast Selection Window button b. Task Bar button c. Task Bar d. Touch Indicator
Indicator
g. Fast Selection Window
Detail Descriptions of Task Bar
Display Task Bar
Display the task bar on HMI or not
308
e. CPU Indicator f. Alarm
Advanced Part System Parameters
Use Touch Indicator
Display touch indicator on tool bar.
Undefined Area Color
Set the indicator color when touching the undefined area.
Touch
Set the indicator color when touching the blank area, where there
Nonclient
Color
are no components orders.
Touch Client Color
Set the indicator color when touching the workplace area, where
there are components and orders.
Touch
Indicating
Set the color for indicator frame.
Lamp Frame Color
CPU Indicating Lamp
Display CPU indictor on task bar.
CPU Indicating Lamp
Set the color for CPU indicating lamp.
Color
Alarm Indicating Lamp
Display alarm indictor on task bar.
Alarm
Indicating
Set the color for alarm indicating lamp.
Lamp
Fast Selection Window
Only Show Fast Selection
Button
When clicking on the Menu button , pop up the fast selection window or not.
Set this option to display fast selection button only.
309
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Button Area Size
Set the size of buttons on fast selection window and task bar, the unit is pixel.
Font Size/Color
Set the font size and color of text on fast selection window and task bar, the unit is pixel.
Button Position
Set the position of buttons on fast selection window and task bar.
Text Align
Set the align method of text on fast selection window and task bar.
Hide the buttons of fast
Delete the text in the text box to hide the buttons.
section window and task bar
6.1.3 HMI Extended Attributes
310
Advanced Part System Parameters
Back Light/Screen Saver Setting
Backlight
HMI turns off the backlight if there is no touch within set time, and the backlight will turn on when
the HMI screen is touched again. The unit of set time is minute, and the default time is 10 minutes.
Screen Saver
Backlight automatically turns when
In the backlight off state, The backlight will turn on
alarm/event occurs.
automatically if alarm or event is triggered.
HMI displays the screen saver window if there is no touch within set time, user can set the screen
saver window in the Window of Screensavers. HMI will display the normal screen again if the
screen is touched in screen saver mode. The default screen saver time is 10 minutes.
The Window of Screensavers
Select a window as screensaver screen picture.
Return to Original Window when
If this option is checked, the HMI returns to original
Screensaver Ends.
window when screensaver ends, if it is not checked, HMI
goes to the screensaver window when screensaver ends.
Upload/Decompile function settings
Allow Upload
Allow user uploads the project in HMI to PC, the default password is 888888. Note: the Password
can not be empty or 0.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 8.4 Upload]
Allow Decompile
Allow user decompile the pkg file to wpj file, which Kinco HMIware can edit, the default password
is 888888. Note: the Password cannot be empty or 0.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 8.7 Decompile Operation]
Use Download
Allow user download the pkg file to HMI, the default password is 888888.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10.1.4 Download Password Protection]
Video function settings
Video Mode
Set the signal format of video input, the PAL and NTSC are optional. Only the HMI with BNC port
supports this function, and uses the Video component in the program.
Text library settings
Number of
Set the language number in the Text Library, there are 32 languages at most. This function is used
Language
together with Text Library.
Default Language
Language Setting
The default display language of the texts which use text library. This function is used together with
Text Library.
Open the Language Setting dialog box .This function is used together with Text Library.
System function setting
311
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Use INIT Macro
Trigger the macro when HMI is powered on.
Use Buzzer
Enable the buzzer in HMI
Screen Flip Display
Display a 180 degrees turn over screen.
Auxiliary parameters setting
System Scroll Bar
Width.
Set the width of system scroll bar, it ranges from 20 to 120, the unit is pixel.
Chinese Font Box
Set the height of Chinese character input box, it ranges from 24 to 99, and the unit is pixel. This
Height
function is used when input Chinese character to Text Input component.
Invalided
Set the color of invalid components, this function is used together with component which is set the
Components Color
Conditional Enabling option.
Cursor Color
Set the cursor color in the input status of Number/Text Input component.
Use External Time
Set the time source of the data sample in Datalogger and Data Report.
for Datalogger
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.7.3 System Time and PLC Time Synchronization]
Use External Time
Set the time source of Event Trig time and Return to Normal Time in the Event Display and Event
for Event
Bar.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 2.7.3 System Time and PLC Time Synchronization]
User defines
datalogger’s
Set the description in created *.db file same as the sample channel description.
channel description
Operational
Storage Devices
The SD, USB DISK1*, USB DISK2* , HMI are optional.
Records Storage
Save MS
Save the millisecond of operation log and save them in the CSV file.
Settings
Subdirectory
Set the subdirectory where CSV file is storage, user can modify it.
The default subdirectory is Record.
Storage Type
Daily File
Save the daily operation log in CSV file, the file name is
named by date,“yyyy mmdd”.
Single
Save the every recodes of operation log in CSV file, the
File
Bulk Storage
filename is the Subdirectory.
Select a cache mode, when the data in buffer memory reaches the set
size; write data to SD card or USB drive. The Default means no buffer
memory, data is write to SD card or USB drive directly.
Max Storage
Set the upper limit of storage.
The unit of Daily File is Day , and the unit of Single File is item
If the Storage Type is Daily File, the CSV file is named as
312
Advanced Part System Parameters
“yyyymmdd”and the Max Storage is upper limit of CSV file number in
this route. The early file will be delete if the file number exceeds the
Max Storage; If the Storage Type is Single File, The file is named as
Subdirectory, the Max Storage means the upper limit of the item number
in this file, if item number exceeds the Max Storage , the data will not
be stored any more.(yyyymmdd means the date when the operation log
happens)
Related Settings of Window
Public Window Attributes
Display Public Window above the basic window or below the basic window
Pop_up Window Attributes
Display pop-up window on the top or not
Initial Window
Set the first window when HMI is powered on. The default is [0:Frame0]
Public Window
Set a window as Public Window. The default is [1: Common Window]
Fast Selection Window
File Brower Window
Operation Confirmation
Window
Set a window as Fast Selection Window, The default is [2:Fast Selection]. The Fast
Selection is used together with the fast selection button in the task bar.
Set a window as File Brower Window, The default is[5:File List Window]. The File Brower
Window is used together with the Import/Export in Function Key.
Set a window as Operation Confirmation Window, the default is [7: Confirm Action
Window].The Operation Confirmation Window is used together with Operator Confirm of a
component.
Set a window as Login Window of User Permission and Security Level, the default is
Login Window
[9:Login Window]. The Login Window is used together with the User Permission and
Security Level function.
※Some models have two USB Host ports; the number of USB DISK is according to the sequence when the USB drives are
plugged in HMI, but not the position of the USB slot. The USB drive which is plugged in first is the USD DISK1 and
the second one is USB DISK2.
6.1.4 HMI System Information Text
User can define the display content for the system error information in the User-Defined System Information. When the error
happens, if user defines the display content for system error, HMI will display the user-defined content, or HMI displays the
default system error information.
313
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Select the default system error information in the red frame, then check the Use User-Defined Information and input
user-defined content in the input box.

User can define multiple system error information
6.1.5 Security Levels Setting
In this option, user can set the security levels and their passwords. There are 16 levels at most
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10 Password]
6.1.6 User Permissions Setting
In this option, user can configure user name, password, logoff time and permission and so on. There are 32 users at most, and
each user has 32 permissions at most.
314
Advanced Part System Parameters
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 10 Password]
6.1.7 Historical Events Storage
In this option, user can set the route where the historical events are stored; this function is used together with Event
components.
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 4.7 Alarm Component]
Descriptions of Historical Events Storage
Save to
Save the historical event information in the recipe memory.
Recipe
Save Count
Data Field
Set the item number of historical events, which are saved in recipe memory. If the
event item is larger than the set Save Count, the early information will be deleted,
and save new information.
Note：If the Save Count is 0, the historical event will not be stored.
Start Addr
Set the start address from which the historical events are stored in recipe memory.
End Addr
Software will calculate the End Address according to the Save Count and Start Addr.
Save to
Save the historical event information to external devices.
External
Storage Devices
The SD card, USB DISK1*, and USB DISK2* are optional.
Device
Outage Keepin
When HMI is restarted by power outage，HMI can recover 1024 items historical
event which are triggered before power outage, and display them in the Event
Display component.
315
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Export to CSV file
Save the historical event information in CSV file,
and save this CSV file to
external memory device, the storage route is :/event/subdirectory name/file name
Save MS
Save the millisecond of operation log and save them in the CSV file.
Subdirectory
Set the subdirectory where CSV file is storage, user can modify it.
The default subdirectory for historical event is Event.
Storage Type
Daily File
Save the daily historical event information in CSV file, the file is
named by date, “yyyy mmdd”.
Single File
Save the every recodes of operation log in CSV file, the filename is
the Subdirectory.
Bulk Storage
Select a cache mode, when the data in buffer memory reaches the set size; write data
to SD card or USB drive. The Default means no buffer memory, data is write to SD
card or USB drive directly.
Max Storage
Set the upper limit of storage.
The unit of Daily File is Day , and the unit of Single File is item
If the Storage Type is Daily File, the CSV file is named as “yyyymmdd”and the Max
Storage is upper limit of CSV file number in this route. The early file will be delete
if the file number exceeds the Max Storage; If the Storage Type is Single File, The
file is named as Subdirectory, the Max Storage means the upper limit of the item
number in this file, if item number exceeds the Max Storage , the data will not be
stored any more.(yyyymmdd means the date when the operation log happens)
6.1.8 Print Setting
In the Print Setting option, user can enable print functions and set its parameters.
316
Advanced Part System Parameters
Descriptions of Printing Setting
Enable Print
Enable print function of HMI
Printer
Select a communication protocol for printer
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 13 Print]
Net Print
port
Select a communication port for HMI and printer
Baud Rate/Data Bit/Parity
If the printing port is serial port, set the corresponding parameters of
Check/Stop Bit
serial port
IP
The IP address of the PC which connects to the network printer
Setting
Print Setting of
in the LAN
Port
The port of the PC which connects to the network printer in the LAN
Print Date
Print the date when the event is triggered and returns to normal.
Event Display
Format:mm/dd
Print Standard Time(h:m:s)
Print the standard time when the event is triggered and returns to
normal, If this option is checked the Print Time will be checked
automatically. Format: h:m:s
Print Sequence NO.
Print sequence NO. of event
Print Extended Date(d:h:m)
Print the extended date when the event is triggered and returns to
normal, If this option is checked the Print Date will be checked
automatically. Format: yyyyy/mm/dd
Print Precise Time(h:m:s:ms)
Print the precise time when the event is triggered and the returns to
normal, If this option is checked the Print Time will be checked
automatically. Format: h:m:s:ms
Print Time
Print the time when the event is triggered and the returns to normal.
Format: m:s
Print Extended Time(d:h:m)
Print the extended time when the event is triggered and the returns to
normal, If this option is checked the Print Time will be checked
automatically. Format: h:m:s:ms. Format: d:h:m
Check Window Error
Check if there is error in this window when printing
Network Printing
Enable the Network Printing function
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 13 Print]
6.1.9 Serial Port Setting
In the CMO0/1/2 Setting, user can set the HMI communication parameters when HMI communicates with PLC.
317
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Descriptions of COM0/1/2 Setting
Type
Select a communication type when HMI communicates with PLC, the RS232 (RS-232C),
RS485-2(RS-485), RS485-4(RS-422A) are optional.
Note: the COM2 only supports the RS232(RS232C)
Baud Rate/Data Bit/Parity
Set the HMI communication parameters when HMI communicates with PLC
Check/Stop Bit
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 14 HMI Communication]
Device No.
When HMI works as a slave device, set the HMI station number.
Broadcast
When HMI works as MODBUS RTU master, HMI only sends command to PLC, but
ignores any response from PLC. The Broadcast can only be 0.
PLC Communication Time
The time HMI waits response from PLC/controller, unit is millisecond or second. If
Out
PLC/controller has no response within this time, it is time out; HMI gives up this request
and try the next request. If there is no response after several requests, HMI display PLC
no response. Do not suggest customers to modify this parameter.
Protocol Time Out1(ms)
Time out of character. The protocol takes this time as time interval to cut frame; In other
words, it is the max time interval between each character. If the communication is not
stable, user can increase this value to improve the communication. It ranges from 1to
500. This parameter is set when you connect a PLC to HMI port in the software. Do not
suggest customers to modify this parameter.
Protocol Time Out2(ms)
E5time out，
the communication speed will be slow, but the communication error and error
package will also be reduced. This value cannot exceed 100. Do not suggest customers
to modify this parameter.
Max Inter of bit/word block
These parameters decide that how many registers can be read in a package when the
pack
registers are not continual. Do not suggest customers to modify this parameter.
318
Advanced Part System Parameters
Max word block word/bit
package size
Use Default Setting
These parameters decide the max length of package. That is, how many the registers that
can be read as one frame at a time. Do not suggest customers to modify this parameter.
If users modify the default communication parameters, and HMI and PLC does not
communicate successfully, they can use this button to set the parameters to default value.
6.1.10 Extended Memory
In the Extended Memory option, user can define address type ERW0, ERW1, ERW2 in the extended memory devices, USB
drive or SD card.
The ERW data will stored in the extended memory in erp file, its route is /exmem/erw.erp, (x=0, 1, 2)
6.2 PLC Attribute
In the Construct window, double click PLC icon or right click PLC icon and choose the Attributes to open the PLC Attribute
option. User can configure PLC communication parameters
PLC Attribute Description
319
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Station No.
When PLC/controller works as slave device, set the station No. for PLC/controller.
Network Device Setting
When HMI communicates with PLC/controller via Ethernet, configure the Ethernet
protocol and communication parameters here.
IP Address
Set the IP address for PLC/controller.
Port No.
Set the port No. for PLC/controller.
PLC Communication Time
☞For details, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.9 Serial Port Setting]
Out……Use Default Setting
320
7 Compile/Simulate/Download/Upload
7.1 Compilation
Compilation can be divided into:【Compile】,【Compile All】,【Clear Build Result】.
7.1.1 Methods of Compilation
icons in toolbar，or select 【Compile】/【Compile All】/【Clear Build Result】in the【Tools】
Click the
menu.
Name
Description
When there are Macro files in the project, click【Compile】will do not compile the Macro files that has
Compile
been compiled
Compile All
Compile all the files
Clear Build Result
Clear all the compiled files, including .pkg files, Macro files .so/.dll, .hmi files, .logo files
7.2 Simulation
Kinco HMIware supports 3 modes of simulation: Offline Simulation, Indirect Online Simulation, Direct Online Simulation
Name
PLC/Controller
HMI
Description
Connections with PLC and HMI are not needed, so the time for each
Offline
—
Simulation
—
download is shortened significantly. But the program cannot acquire
data from the PLC, only read data from the local address. Therefore
all data displayed on the configuration windows are static data
Need to connect PLC and HMI. PLC data can be obtained
Indirect Online
√
Simulation
√
dynamically. The operating environment of the program is the same as
downloaded into HMI, but does not need to download the project to
HMI repeatedly, which is quickly and convenient
Only PLC needs to be connected, while HMI doesn’t. PLC data can be
Direct Online
√
Simulation
—
obtained dynamically. This mode can be used to check whether
communication is normal without connecting with an HMI
7.2.1 Modes of Simulation
Click the
icons in toolbar，or select 【Offline simulation】/【Indirect Online Simulation】/【Direct Online
Simulation】in the【Tools】 menu. Select an HMI to be simulated, and click 【Simulation】to start simulation.
!
1. The maximum test time for the direct online simulation is 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the system will
prompt “Online Simulation overtime and Program is end, if want, Please Simulate again.”
2. Mostly only the RS232 communication mode can be used for direct online simulation. Some PLCs
321
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
communicating through Ethernet port can execute direct online simulation through Ethernet port.
3. Connection of direct online simulation for RS232 communication: program cable of PLC connects with
the serial port of PC directly. Connection of direct online simulation for Ethernet port communication
mode: connect directly through cross-over cable or through a Switch.
4. The port used for direct online simulation cannot be used by other programs, otherwise, communication
will fail when simulating.
7.2.2 Exit Simulation
To exit simulation by the space key of the keyboard, or click the right mouse button in the simulation box blank, select
【Close】to exit simulation.
7.3 Download
Kinco HMIware provides 3 ways of download: USB, Serial port, Ethernet port (Download via Ethernet port is only suitable
for HMIs with Ethernet ports).
7.3.1 Download Method Selection
Click the
icon in toolbar, or select from【Tools】menu—【Download Method】
：
The Properties dialog box of【Project Setting Option】pops up, the default download method is via USB port, single click the
drop-down list of【Download Method】to select download way.
!
1. Download way is saved according to HMI. For example: there are 2 HMIs in a project, HMI0 and HMI1.
The download way of HMI0 is via serial port before closed, and HMI1 is via USB cable before closed.
Then open the project again, download way of HMI0 is still via serial port, and HMI1 is still via USB cable.
2. When USB downloading cable is used for the first time, the USB device driver should be installed
manually.
☞For more details about the installation of USB driver, please refer to【Basic Part 2.8 Install USB Driver】
3. For downloading through serial port, users should weld the cable by themselves.
☞For
more details about welding downloading cable for serial port, please refer to the manual of
【Communication Connection Guide】
322
Advanced Part Compile/Simulate/Download/Upload

Notes for downloading through Ethernet and setting of IP:

The IPs of PC and HMI should be in the same section. That means the first three digits should be the same and the last
digit should be different. If the devices are connected in local area network, then the IPs should not conflict with other
device in the local area network.

Modify the current IP and PORT of HMI
Click【HMI Attribute】—【HMI】, set the target IP to HMI, compile and download into HMI, then the IP of HMI is in line
with the set value in project.

Set IP in SETUP Interface
☞For more details about setting IP in SETUP interface，please refer to【Hardware Part 3 System Setting Mode】
323
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Set IP via【Update IP/PORT】in KHManager
☞For more details about setting IP via【Update IP/PORT】in KHManager，please refer to【Advanced Part 8 KHManager】
7.3.2 Download via U disk or SD card
☞For more details about downloading via U disk or SD card，please refer to【Hardware Part 3 System Setting Mode】
7.3.3 Download Selection
In the property box of 【KHDownload】，select the related options in 【Select Section】 to download the files needed.
Detailed description for【Select Section】
Name
Description
Data file
Download user project files in .pkg format
Recipe file
Download recipe files in .rcp format
LOGO file
Download Initial Start Window in .logo format
Clear recipe
Clear recipe data saved in RB/RBI/RW/RWI
Clear history event data
Clear the record in【Event Display】/【Historical Event Display】parts
Clear history record data
Clear the record in【Historical Event Display】/【Trend Curve】/【Trend Curve】parts
Clear data report
Clear data saved in【Data Report】parts
Clear ERW data
Clear the data saved in external register ERW/ERWI
Clear FRW data
Clear the data saved in FLASH register FRB/FRBI/FRW/FRWI
Download to USB1
Download the project files to external register USB1
Download to USB2
Download the project files to external register USB2
324
Advanced Part Compile/Simulate/Download/Upload
Download to SD
Download the project files to external register SD
Timeout
Set the timeout time of download, the unit is millisecond, and it ranges from 0 to 65535

Download recipe files
Recipe files should be imported before downloading. Single click
icon in toolbar or single click 【Options】menu —
【Import Recipe】，then dialog box of 【Open】pops up，select the recipe files to be downloaded and single click【Open】
to load the recipe files:
Compile and then download, select 【Recipe File】as shown in the below figure：

Kinco HMIware will record the directories of recipe files, when the selected recipe files is loaded into
HMIKinco HMIware. If the directories of recipe files changed, warning information will appear in the
compilation message window, the recipe files will no longer be selected when download again.
325
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Download LOGO file (Initial Start Window)
☞For more details about【LOGO file】，please refer to【Advanced Part 2.8 LOGO Screen（LOGO）】

Clear data when download
When download project, user could select【Clear recipe】【
, Clear history event】【
, Clear history record】【
, Clear data report】,
【Clear ERW data】,【Clear FRW data】. Select the data to be deleted, then the related data in HMI will be deleted when
downloading.

Project runs directly in external storage devices
When there are too many pictures in project, then the project will be too big to download into HMI. Prompt: When compress
bitmap of large size, users could download the project to external devices.
Select【Download to USB1】,【Download to USB2】,【Download to USB3】when download as shown in the below picture:
326
Advanced Part Compile/Simulate/Download/Upload
Single click【Download】，the project will be downloaded to external memory device.
!
1. The function that project runs directly in the external storage device is only applicable for HMIs
supporting external storage devices.
2. The projects copied directly into external storage devices cannot run.
3. The external storage devices cannot be removed during running, otherwise, the project stored in external
device will be abnormal.

The timeout time of KHDownload can be set by user
If the timeout option is checked, user can set the timeout time of download, the unit is millisecond, and it ranges from 0 to
65535.The function can improve download timeout error of serial port, USB and Ethernet port.
327
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
7.4 Upload/ Download/Compile Project via KHManager
☞For more details about upload, download, compile project, please refer to【Advanced Part 8 KHManager】
328
8 KHManager
8.1 Introduction to KHManager
KHManager consists of six processing modules: 【Download】, 【Upload】, 【System Operation】, 【Get Version】,
【Decompile Operate】, 【Pass Through Communication】.
【Communication parameter setting】：The current download way selected in KHManager will be displayed. Click 【Set】
to modify the current download way.
Download way
Parameter setting
Download via USB port
No need to set communication parameters
Download via serial port
Choose the current used serial port NO.
Download via network
Set the IP address and port number of the current HMI
329
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
【PageUP】/【PageDown】：Click 【PageUP/PageDown】to skip among the 6 processing modules.
【Exit】：Exit KHManager.

【Pass Through Communication】is not supported temporarily
8.2 Methods of Open KHManager

Open from the【Start】menu of PC.

Double click the shortcut of KHManager on desktop.

Open from【Tools】menu of Kinco HMIware software.
Click【Tools】menu—【System Manager】/【HMI Version Manager】/【Upload Manager】/【Upload Init Window】/
【Download Init Window】/【Upload project】/【Decompile Manager】to open【KHManager】

Double click【KHManager.exe】in the installation directory of Kinco HMIware software.
8.3 Download
Detailed descriptions of【Download】
Download
Download User Data
Download .pkg files to HMI
Section
Download LOGO
Download Initial Start Window of .logo files to HMI
Download Recipe
Download .rcp files to HMI
Recipe Editor
Open【Recipe Editor】
Download FRW Data
Download .frp files to HMI
Initial
Start
Show LOGO
Window
setting Area
Clear Section
UnShow LOGO
Clear Recipe
Clear FRW Data
Clear ERW Data
Select【Show LOGO】，click【Set】，HMI will display Initial Start Window
when boots up.
Select【UnShow LOGO】，and click【Set】，HMI will do not display Initial Start
Window when boots up, but keeps white screen until project window displays.
Select【Clear Recipe】，and click【Execute】,to clear the data that is saved in
physical storage area of SRAM RB/RBI/RW/RWI.
To clear the data that is saved in physical storage area of FLASH
FRB/FRBI/FRW/FRWI.
To clear the data that is saved in physical storage area of external memory
330
Advanced Part KHManager
ERW/ERWI.
To clear the displayed history data that is recorded in【History Data Display】
Clear History Data
【Trend
/
Curve】
【XY
/
Curve】parts, at the same time the history data and files
that are saved in recipe memories and external memories will also be
cleared.
To clear the displayed history events that are recorded in【Event Display】/
Clear History Event
【Historical Event Display】, at the same time the history data and files that
are saved in recipe memories and external memories will also be cleared.
8.4 Upload
Detailed descriptions of【Upload】
Upload User Data
Upload project files of .pkg format
Recipe Editor
Open【Recipe Editor】
Upload Recipe
Upload .rcp files in HMI
Upload FRW
Upload .frw files in HMI
Upload LOGO
Upload .logo files in HMI
8.5 System Operation
Detailed descriptions of【System Operation】
Get HMI IP / PORT
Information Area
Update IP/PORT Area
Jumping Section Area
Obtain the IP address and port number information of the target HMI
Update the IP address and port number to the set value
Return to User Application Status
HMI jumps to run the configuration program
Return to Set Application Status
HMI changes to the embedded SETUP interface
Update firmware of HMI
Update Operation Area
☞For
Update the kernel/ file system
more details please refer to [Hardware Part 5
Firmware Update Mode]
8.6 Get Version
User could view firmware version information of HMI through 【Get Version】 in KHManager, click 【Version Get】, HMI
firmware version information will be displayed. Otherwise please check whether the current communication
mode is correct or other reasons.
8.7 Decompile Operation
The configuration screen edited by Kinco HMIware is saved as wpj files. Compile to generate pkg files which are required
for running in HMI and download into HMI. So the files uploaded from HMI are in pkg format. Before open the projects
uploaded from HMI, users should decompile the pkg files by KHManager to generate a project file in which wpj file and
other files are included, then users can open wpj file and edit.
331
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
a
b
c
d
a. Select the target pkg files to be decompiled
b. Delete the redundant pkg files no need to be compiled.
c. Select a saving path for the decompiling project files.
d. Execute decompilation operation
Regardless of whether the file allow decompiling or not, upload password dialog box will pop up and request for
decompilation password. If decompilation is prohibited, user cannot move to the next step. While if decompilation is allowed
and no password is set, and then enter the default password 888888 to move to the next step.
1. When there are more than one (2 or more) HMIs in a project, users need to add all the pkg files of each
HMI to execute decompilation operation.
2. When there are more than one (2 or more) HMIs in a project, all the pkg files uploaded from the HMIs
must be compiled at the same time, otherwise, the the pkg files cannot be decompiled.
8.8 Data Decryption
To decrypt the encrypted CSV files.
☞For more details about [Data Encryption], please refer to [Advanced Part 2.15 Data Encryption]
332
9 Macro
Macro uses C language to release logic and arithmetic calculation. User can use macro and other components together to
release some complex calculation and make HMI strong function. The macro instructions in Kinco HMIware are compatible
with standard C language（ANSI C89）.
9.1 Macro Editing Environment
There are three parts in this edit environment, they are macro edit window, Macro variables window and macro file list in the
project files window.
The detail description of macro edit environment
detail description of macro edit environment
Macro edit window
User writes C language code in this window, the variables are defined in the Parameters list;
you can use them in the C code.
Macro variables window
Macro file list
The write and read variables in this macro, which are external variable of this macro.
User can rename and delete macro in this list. If there are multiple macro, user also can switch
macro among different macro.
9.2 Macro Edit
9.2.1 Build Macro
There are two ways to build macro：

Click on the icon
333
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Click on the “Option”>>Macrocode…(M)
There is a New Macrocode dialog window when you build the macro:
1.
Choose the HMI where the macro is build, for example HMI0.
2.
There is a default macro name(macro_0.C) in the File Name, user can rename it .
2. Click on OK to enter the macro edit window.
9.2.2 Delete Macro
Right click the macro in the Project files window; choose the delete to delet the macro. As shown in the following picture:
Note that the delete operation of macro does not support undo operation,
9.2.3 Rename Macro
Right click the macro in the Project files window; choose the Rename Macro to rename the macro. As shown in the
following picture:
334
Advanced Part Macro
9.2.4 Program Macro
1 Define the macro variables before program the macro.
Macro Variables
In macro, the unit whose value can be changed is called variable, each variable has a name and a initial value, it takes a
memory unit in the memory.
Variable name
When user builds a new variable, the default name is Param and user can modify the name. The definition of macro name
must follow the principle of C language, the following are exceptional case:
1.
Cannot use the reserved word of language C code.
2.
The variable name is not case sensitive(not C language standard)
3.
The variable name must start with 26 English letters
4.
The variable name only supports 26 English letters, number and underline.
5.
The number of group data must be from 2 to 1024, but the number of (unsigned) shot group data cannot be 4, the
number of int/float group data be 2.( (not C language standard))
The type of macro variable
There are internal variables and external variables in the macro variables
Internal variables: they are the registers in HMI. The internal variables can be defined in the Parameters window; it also can
be defined in the macro edit window directly.
External variables: they are the registers in the PLC/controller which is connected to HMI. The external variables must be
defined in the parameters window, and then they can used in the macro edit window.
The data type which is supported in macro variable
Data Type
Bit
Data Length
1bit
Description
Bit variable, 0 and 1
335
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Signed short
1word（16bits）
Signed short integer variable， -215~(215 -1)
Unsigned short
1word（16bits）
Unsigned short integer variable，0～(216-1)
Signed int
2word（32bits）
Signed integer variable，-231～(231-1)
Unsigned int
2word（32bits）
Unsigned integer variable，0～(232-1)
Float
2word（32bits）
Single float variable
Double
4word（64bits）
Double float variable
The write & read type of macro variable
write & read
Description
Read
Read the register before the C code is executed, the register will not be read when the C codede is running.
Write
Write the register after the C code is executed, the register will not be write when the C
Read/Write
Read the register before the C code is executed and wirte it after the C code is executed.

Usually, we define the registers which only need reading as Read type; the registers which need writing
have read operation too, so we define them as Read/Write. Regarding some special registers, which are
write only, but cannot be read, we can define them as Read. Therefore , in the assignment instruction, the
variables at the left side of“=”icon are usually defined as Read/Write and variables at the right side of
“=”icon are usually defined as Read
Operation of macro variable
Right click variable list in the macro variable window, user can choose the add/delete/modify/export/import macro
operations.
Detail descriptions of variable operations
Detail descriptions of variable operations
Add Variable
Add the new variable to the macro
Delete Variable
Delete the selected macro
Modify Variable
Modify the attributes of selected macro
336
Advanced Part Macro
Export Variable
Export the defined variables to PC in a CSV file.
Import Variable
Import the variable CSV file to the macro variable window.
The notes of macro variable
(1) When defining the variable, make sure that there is no overlap in the address range, for example, the LW1000 is defined
as a float variable A (double words), that is A takes two addresses: LW1000 and LW1001. If user defines another
variable which uses LW1001, there will be error in the macro calculation.
(2) The macro only supports the logic and arithmetic operation, but do not supports char type operation.
(3) When the variable uses variable station number, especially when the special registers are used as index, the value in the
index registers must be modified before macro execution, so the modified station number can be effective in the macro.
If the index value is set in the macro, the modified station number can be effective in the next execution of macro.
(4) The Export/Import operation only supports export/import all the variables, but not supports export/import a single
variable.
(5) When user uses Excel to edit exported variable CSV file, note that the ParamName~StationNumID are default
formwork, do not modify them or there will be error when you import the CSV file to the macro variable window.
Program the C code in the Macro Edit Window
…………
………………
337
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

1. Add the note information in the macro, so you can check and modify the code conveniently in the
future.
2. Use the tab and line break to make the macro a good structure.
3. Do not delete or modify the default code in the macro edit window, press the Enter before “return” to
add your code.
3. After the macro is build, save and compile the HMI program , then check if there is any error information in the
Message Window
.
9.2.5 Execute Macro
There are 6 methods to execute the macro in Kinco HMIware, user can choose one method according his application.
1.
Triggered when the HMI system starts.
Set initialization macro in HMI Attributes>>HMI Extended Attributes, this macro will be trigged when the HMI starts, user
can use this macro to set the initialization value of some parameters and transmit some recipe value.
2.
Triggered by Function Key
Use the Execute Macro function in the Function Key, when the function is pressed , the macro will be triggered once
3.
Triggered by Timer
There are many trigger method in the Timer, it is very flexible to trigger macro by timer.
4.
Triggered by PLC Control
When the certain register satisfies the setting condition, the macro will be triggered.
5.
Triggered by Event
The macro is triggered when the event is triggered
6.
Triggered by Notification
User can use notification in Control Setting to trigger macro.
9.3 Macro Application
For example, we use the value of D100 (PLC register) to change the state of M0 (PLC register), we make this in a macro as
an example: when the value of D100 is 123, M0 is 1, or the M0 is 0.
338
Advanced Part Macro
First, build a macro, set the macro name “ouput status.c”
Then define the variable D100 and M0 in the Parameters Window in macro.
Write the following macro code in the macro edit window.
Save the project, close the macro edit window then switch to the HMI program edit screen, make the program as follows:
 Bit State Lamp, which is used to display the state of M0. Its attribute are as follows:
Read Address
M0（PLC register）
Graphics
Use Vector Graphics，
Number Input Component, which is used to input the value of D100, its attributes are as follows:
Read/Write Address
D100（PLC Registers）
Graphics
User Vector Graphics，
Timer Component，which is used to execute the macro, its attributes are as follows:
Exectution Cylcle
1×100ms
Execute Macro
Output status
Save, Compile and Execute:
339
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
123
0
123
9.4 Local Variable Function
When you use the internal (local)l variable, you do not need to define the variable in the macro parameters window, you can
define it macro directly, that is to use the local variable of HMI.
The advantage of using local variable is that the local variable in the macro can be read/write in real time and the execution
speed is faster, performance is better. At the same time, it also saves the time of defining variables in the macro parameters
window.
In the macro edit window ,there is demo code(example) to read/write the local variable, user can write the macro code to
read/write local variable according the demo code, see as follows
In this demo code, we transfer the values in LW200 and LW201 to the LW202 and LW203.
We will explain to you how to use the local variable function in the following example.
For example, use the macro to achieve the addition calculation:
LW100(HMI local register) adds LW101(HMI local
register) and transfer this result to LW102(HMI local register), the macro code is as follows：
340
Advanced Part Macro
In this example ，
ReadLocal ("LW", 100, 2, (void*)buf, 0) means read the value in LW100 and LW101 and give this value to
buf[0] and buf[1].
buf[0]=buf[0]+buf[1] means addition calculation
WriteLocal ("LW", 102, 1, (void*)buf, 0) means write the calculation result to the LW102.
Save, Compile and Execute:
9.5 Array Application
Array is a group of variables, who has the same data type and name. These variables are called element of array. Each
element has its own serial number in the array, this number is called index. User can distinguish these elements by their
index. The total number of the element of an array is also called the array length.
We explain the array to you in the following example:
For example, use macro to assign values to 100 continuous registers which starts from D100(PLC register), if we do not use
array , we need to define 100 registers in macro parameters window and assign value one by one in the macro code. See as
follows:
Macro code：
341
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In the above macro code, the variable name has no unified rule, at the same time , it also takes too much time on define the
variables. If users use the array, they can define these variables in one array, see as follows:
Macro code：
User can use a name and index to representation a variable in the array. For example, data [0] means the first variable in a
array, data[1] means the second variable in a array. The data is the variable name of this array, the number after data is the
index of this array, we need to put the index to a [].
342
Advanced Part Macro
For example, the following example is to define a array variable, then use loop statement to assign 10~15 to the array
elements, these data will be displayed on the Number Display Components. The variable is defined as follows:
Macro code：
Save , compile and execute：
Actually, array is a list of data which has the same data type in the memory. Take the above array for example; a[i] starts
from the number 100 in the memory. The content and value of this array are as follows:
Variable
a[0]
a[1]
a[2]
a[3]
a[4]
a[5]
Value
10
11
12
13
14
15
343
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Memory Unit
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
1. When users visits or assign array variable, they need to according to the defined data type.
2. The indexes of array are inter, which starts from 0, not 1. The index n means the (n+1) variable
3. The array a[n] has n elements, but there is no a[n] in these elements. If user uses the nonexistent elements
in macro, there will be a overflow error.
9.6 Some Notes on the Macro

The values of external variables in the macro are read once when the macro is triggered. The macro will not read it
again or in real time in the macro execution process. So the macro result will not be changed if the registers are changed
from outside during the macro execution process. When we use the macro, we need to make sure that all the input value are
ready before we trigger the macro, or we may cannot get the expect result.

The macro result is output once when the macro is finished. The external variable value will not be changed during the
macro execution process When we use the macro , we need to make sure that the macro is finished and all the outputs are
updated, then we can get the right result..

It is meanness to write the Read Only variable and it is meanness to read the Write Only variable. If the variable
needs to be read and write, please define it as R/W. Besides, user must assign value to the variable which has write operation
attributes(Write Only or R/W variable)

User can define the temporary variable in the macro according to the C language, but can not set the global variable
and static variable. If the global variable is needed, please use the LW, LB register.

One macro can not call other macros in Kinco HMIware, if user wants to use the Function Call as the C language, they
can use a trigger bit in one macro to trigger other macros.
344
10 Password
Kinco HMIware provides powerful password function for users, to ensure the security of user’s intellectual property.
The passwords are used for project protection, window protection, and important component protection.


Project protection functions:

Password protection for opening project

Password protection for uploading project from HMI

Prohibit uploading project from HMI

Password protection for decompiling project

Prohibit decompiling project
Operation window protection: To protect important windows, passwords must be entered when accessing important
windows.

Component protection: To avoid disoperation, user name and password must be entered to access some important
components.
!
1.
When project password, uploading password and decompilation password are used, please keep the
passwords in mind. The manufacture does not provide factory recovery and universal password
service.
2.
The system default passwords for decompiling and uploading are 888888.
3. When the password is 0 or Null, system will automatically default to not using password. When
passwords begin with 0, 0 is invalid.
Differences between User level and User permission：
Difference
Security Level
User Permission
Level Range
16 levels(0~15), level 0 is invalid
32 users, 32 operation permissions, User 0 is valid
User Name
None
Available
Logout time
None
Available
Not support
Support
Support
Not support
Users with low security level password
A user can possess multiple operation permissions,
cannot access high security levels;
and different users can possess the same operation
high security level is the “authority”.
permission. There is no hierarchy of user
Add/Delete
levels
or
permissions in HMI
Modify password in HMI
Access Restriction
345
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
System reserved register
Users with high level password can
permissions,
access low security level windows or
password are needed to execute corresponding
components.
operation.
only
user
name
and
correct
The involved system reserved registers are different.
10.1 Project Protection
10.1.1 Project Password Protection
To prevent unauthorized access and protect user’s intellectual property, passwords are required to open project file of .wpj.

Set project password for first time
Open the software， single click【File】—【Project Password】, then attribute box of 【Project Password Setting】will pop
up，input the password and confirm it. The project password will take effect when open the project next time.

Enter password to open project
Once project password is set, password entry box will pop up when opening the project again.
Enter correct password to open the project, otherwise, error prompt box will pop up.
If entering password wrong continuously for 3 times, it would pop up a dialog box showing【Invalid Password. Project
cannot be opened!】，then user needs to single click【File】menu—【Open】.

Modify or cancel project encryption
Open the encrypted project, single click【File】menu—【Project Password】,the attribute box of 【Setting Project Password】
will pop up. To modify password, users need to enter old password, and at the same time set new password. To cancel the
password, users only need to enter the old password, leave the new password box blank. Single click 【OK】button., then
the modification will take effect when opening the project next time.
10.1.2 Upload Password Protection and Prohibit Uploading

Upload Password setting
Project allows uploading by default, but upload password is required to prevent unauthorized operation. Default password is
“888888”.
346
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Upload Password setting: Check the option of 【Allow Upload】in 【HMI Attributes】—【HMI Extended Attributes】page.
After upload password is set, dialog box of 【Password input】will pop up when uploading, as shown in following pictures:
1. Upload password cannot be null.

2. Data package loss may occur during uploading, then restart the HMI and upload again.
3. Project allows uploading by default, but upload password is required to prevent unauthorized
operation. Default password is “888888”.

Prohibit uploading: prohibit uploading project from HMI. The specific setting is: 【HMI Attribute】—【HMI Extended
Attributes】，do not select the option of【Allow Upload】.
When prohibit uploading is set, prompt box will pop up if forcibly upload:
347
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
10.1.3 Decompilation Password Protection and Prohibit Decompiling

Decompilation setting
Decompilation is used to convert the pkg files running in HMI to wpj files， which can be opened and edited by Kinco
HMIware. For new project, system allows decompilation by default, and the default password is“888888”.
Setting of decompilation: Select“Allow Decompile”in 【HMI Attribute】—【HMI Extended Attributes】， and set password.
For projects that decompilation passwords have been set, when clicking decompilation, password entry box will pop up as
shown in following picture：

Prohibit decompilation
Prohibit decompiling: Prohibit decompiling project from HMI. Do not check the option of【Allow Upload】in【HMI
Attribute】—【HMI Extended Attributes】 page， to prohibit user decompiling.pkg file to wpj.
348
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
The pkg files that are set to prohibit decompiling can still be downloaded into HMI.
When prohibiting decompilation is set, prompt box will pop up if forcibly decompile:
10.1.4 Download Password Protection
Set download password to HMI, to prevent user project saved in HMI being covered by unauthorized operation.

Do not use download password
Projects do not use password by default. Settings of no use of password: Do not select the option of【Use Download
Password】in【HMI Attribute】—【HMI Extended Attributes】 page to do not use password. If download password is not set,
the dialog box of download password will not pop up the next time when you download project into HMI. Users can
download project into HMI directly.
349
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Use password
Use password: Select the option of【Use Download Password】in【HMI Attribute】—【HMI Extended Attributes】 page and
set password. The default password is “888888”.
When project running in HMI is set to use download password, then【Download Password Dialog】box will pop up next time
when user download project into HMI， as follows:
If input password is wrong, password error prompt will pop up.
Only enter password correctly then project can be downloaded into HMI.
1. When set or modify download password in HMI attributes, users have to download project into
!

HMI for the first time and restart HMI, then download password will take effect.
2. After the password is set, please keep it in mind, otherwise, configuration project download will
fail. Manufacture does not provide factory recovery and universal password service.
10.2 Window Protection
For windows with important parameters or components, user could protect these important windows by security level
function.
10.2.1 Window Password Setting
Set the number of security levels and corresponding passwords in【HMI Attribute】—【Security Levels Setting】, and system
default passwords are“888888”.
350
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
!
1. Support at most 16 security levels from 0 to 15. Level 0 indicates that there is no password;
Level 15 is the highest security level. The bigger the number is the higher the level.
2. The password cannot be zero or empty; when passwords begin with 0, 0 is invalid.
3. The maximum value of password is 99999999.
4. Security level is valid only for base window and not available for other windows.
5. Users with high security level can access low security level windows; While users with low
security level cannot access high security level windows.
10.2.2 Security Level Setting of Window
Access【Window Attribute】page—【Security Level】and choose the corresponding security level.
351
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
Software will remember the password input for the first time by default, as long as HMI is powered
continuously, do not need to enter the password again when enter into the window next time.
If the option of 【Switching to the lowest security level when window closed】is checked, then the
password need to be entered again when accessing the window next time.
10.2.3 System reserved registers related to security level
Address
Description
LW9040~9041
Double words, is for inputting password of 【Security Level】
LW9042
Display the security level of current base window
LW9043
Force to lower the security level
10.2.4 Security level password input window
【Frame9：Login Window】is provided by the system for security level password input.
352
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
[Frame9：Login Window] is for inputting passwords of security levels and user permissions. User using security level
function only need to input appropriate password of security level.
1. The system reserved registers referred in【Frame9：Login Window】could be found in 【Chapter 14

Registers】of this manual
2. User could move the window by the control bar on the top of 【Frame9：Login Window】
10.2.5 Modifying Password Online
Kinco HMIware supports security level password modifying online.
!
User permission password does not support online modification
System reserved registers for modifying security levels
Addresses of system
reserved registers
Addresses of system
Description
reserved registers
Description
LW10024～10025
Level 1 password. Double word
LW10026～10027
Level 2 password. Double word
LW10118～10119
Level 3 password. Double word
LW10120～10121
Level 4 password. Double word
LW10122～10123
Level 5 password. Double word
LW10124～10125
Level 6 password. Double word
LW10126～10127
Level 7 password. Double word
LW10128～10129
Level 8 password. Double word
LW10130～10131
Level 9 password. Double word
LW10132～10133
Level 10 password. Double word
LW10134～10135
Level 11 password. Double word
LW10136～10137
Level 12 password. Double word
LW10138～10139
Level 13 password. Double word
LW10140～10141
Level 14 password. Double word
LW10142～10143
Level 15 password. Double word
353
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
10.2.6 Application of Passwords Required for Switching Windows
The following example describes how to protect the window by the security level function.
【Example】Switch the window from window 0 to window 10 by switch window function of “Function Key” component,
the window will switch only when the password is entered correctly.
In this example, set security level of window 0 to 0, set security level of window 10 to 1 and the password is 123456.
 Set security level password
In the attribute page of【HMI Attribute】—【Security Level Setting】，set level 1 password to 123456.
 Create a Function Key component in window 0, and the attributes setting is as follows:
Function
Switch Window: Chang window【10：Frame10】
Tag
Use Tag; State 0: Switching window 10; State 1: Switching window 10.
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
Control Setting
Select【Conditional Enabling】；Check【Permission Control】； Check 【Select
Permission：1】；Check【Auto show login window】.
 Set the attributes of window 10 and create a Function Key component to switch to window 0.
Double click at the blank area of window 10 to open the 【Window Attribute】, and set its attributes as follows:
Security Level
1
Switching to the lowest security
Check
level when window closed*
※ When the option is checked, the current window will be set to the lowest security level when window closed. Password
is required to input again when access high level windows;
When the option is not checked, there is no need to input password when access windows with the same security level.
Set the attributes of Function Key as follows:
Function
Switch Window: Chang window【0：Frame0】
Tag
Use Tag; State 0: Switching window 0; State 1: Switching window 0.
354
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
 Save and compile
During running, touch Function Key component in window 0 to pop up password input window 【Frame9：Login Window】,
and input “123456”to the【LEVEL PASSWORD】box to switch to window 10.
10.3 Component Protection
Some important components are set with permission /security level control. Only users with higher or equal permission/
security level could operate to prevent wrong operation.
There are two ways for component protection: security level protection, user permission protection.
10.3.1 Security Level Protection for Components
Settings of Security level protection for components are similar with window protection.
☞For more details about components using [Security level protection]，please refer to [Advanced Part 10.2.6 Application
of passwords required for switching windows]
10.3.2 User Permission Protection for Components
When【Permission control】is set to a component，then only users with corresponding permission can operate this component.

User name and access password setting
Open【HMI Attribute】—【User Permissions Setting】，in the box of 【User Permissions Setting】，select 【Enabled】and
input User Name，Password， Logoff Time and Permissions.
355
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
1. Password only supports number, but does not support other characters. The range of password is
0~2147483647. When password is set to 0, indicating no password in use.
2. Range of logout time is 0~2147483647 minutes. 0 indicates that do not log off and permission remains in
effect. The logoff time is timed from the last time operation finished after login.
10.3.3 System Reserved Registers Related to User Permissions
Besides set user permission in【HMI Attributes】—【User Permissions Setting】
，the following system reserved registers can
also be used for user permissions setting:
Address
Function
Description
LW9486~LW9501
Input user name for login
32 characters at most
LW9502~LW9503
Input user password for login
Double word
LW9504~LW9505
Display permission of current user
LB9165
User login confirmation
LB9166
User logout
confirmation
Double word ， read only, display 32 bits corresponding
permission
Set ON to execute login operation, then set OFF automatically
Set ON to execute logoff operation, then set OFF
automatically
10.3.4 System Reserved Registers Related to Add/Delete Users and User Permissions Online
Besides add/delete users and user permissions in 【HMI Attributes】—【User Permissions Setting】，user also can add/delete
users and user permissions online. See the table below for system reserved registers related to add/delete users and user
permissions online:
356
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Address
Function
Description
LW9486~LW9501
Input user name for login
32 characters at most
LW9502~LW9503
Input password
Double word
corresponding to user name
LW9506~LW9507
User permission assignment
Double words, readable/writable, 32 permissions assignment, LW
9506~9507 corresponds to permission 0~31 separately. LW.B
corresponds to bits of LW 9506~9507. For example: LW.B 9506.0
indicates permission no. 0. LW.B 9506.A indicates permission no. 10
LW9508~LW9509
Logout time for user
Double words, in minutes
permission
LW9510~LW9511
Confirm password for
Double word
adding/deleting user
LB9167
Confirm to add user
Set ON to execute adding user, then set OFF automatically
LB9168
Confirm to delete user
Set ON to execute deleting user, then set OFF automatically
LB9190
Executive mark of user
The bit will be set to ON when execute operations of Add/Delete
management
users
Operation failure of user
The bit will be set to ON when operation of user management fails
LB9191
management
!
1. Only users and user permissions added online can be deleted online.
2. User permissions do not support modify passwords online, but user could modify password through
adding/deleting users online.
10.3.5 Window for User Permission Password Input
【Frame9：Login Window】 is provide by the system to input user permission password.
357
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
If user permission function is use, users only need to input corresponding “USER NAME” and “ACCESS
PASSWORD” then click “Login”.

1. System reserved registers referred in【Frame9：Login Window】can be found in 【Chapter 14 Registers】.
2. User could move【Frame9：Login Window】by the control bar on the top of the window.
10.3.6 Application of Security Level Protection for Components
【Example】Correct password required before operation of “Bit State Switch” component.
In the example, security level is used to protect component, and set minimum level at least 2 to operate this component.
 Open
【HMI Attributes】—【Security Levels Setting】. Detailed settings are as follows:
Create a bit state switch component in window 0, and set its attributes as follows: address LB0. Switch Type: Toggle.
【Control Setting】—【Conditional Enabling】—【Security Level】—【Minimum level: 2】—【Auto show login window】.
Read/Write address
LB 0（HMI local register）
Switch Type
Toggle
Graphics
Use Vector Graphics：
Control Setting
Select【Conditional Enabling】；Check【Permission Control】； Check
【Select Permission：2】；Check【Auto show login window】
 Save and compile
During running, when touch the bit state switch component, password input window【Frame9：Login Window]】will pop up,
then input level 2 password“222222” or level 3 password “333333” in the password level box.
After confirm, user
could operate the bit state switch component; If input level 1 password or wrong password, then the operation will fail.
358
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
10.3.7 Application of User Permission Protection for Component
【Example】Set 3 users: Administrator，Engineer，Operator. The 3 users have different permissions. Operator can
operate number input component; Engineer can operate bit state switch component; Administrator can operate both the
number Input component and bit state switch component.
User ID
User Name
Password
Logoff Time
Permission
User
0
Operator
111111
10 minutes
Operator permission
User
1
Engineer
222222
10 minutes
Engineer permission
User
2
Administrator
333333
1 minutes
Operator permission and engineer permission
Registered user and corresponding permission in【HMI Attribute】—【User Permission Setting】, the settings are as
follows:
User 0: Enable
User 1: Enable
User 2: Enable
User Name
Operator
Password
111111
Logoff Time
10
Permission
Permission 0：Operator permission
Check
Permission 1：Engineer permission
Uncheck
User Name
Engineer
Password
222222
Logoff Time
10
Permission
Permission 0：Operator permission
Uncheck
Permission 1：Engineer permission
Check
User Name
Administrator
Password
333333
Logoff Time
1
Permission
Permission 0：Operator permission
Check
Permission 1：Engineer permission
Check
359
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
 Set user permission control for components
Create a number input component and a bit state switch component, and the attribute setting is as follows:
Number input component
Read/Write address
LW 0（HMI local register）
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
Control Setting
Select【Conditional Enabling】；Check【Permission Control】，Select Permission：0
Operator permission； Check【Auto show login window】
Bit state switch component
Read/Write address
LB 0（HMI local register）
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
Control Setting
Select【Conditional Enabling】；Check【Permission Control】
，Select Permission：1 Engineer
permission； Check【Auto show login window】
 Save and compile
During running， touch number input component to pop up password input window 【Frame9：Login Window】, and input
“Operator” to the 【USER NAME】box and“111111”to the【ACCESS PASSWORD】box. Then click 【login 】 to login
Operator permission. Now user can operate the number input component. Operations for other components are similar.
360
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
1. Logoff time: it is the valid time after login，user permission will be lapsed automatically after the time

limit.
2. User name is case sensitive.
【Example】Add/Delete user permissions: Take MT5420 for example:
（1）Window 0
1
3
 Function key component is used to pop up window 10, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Switch window: popup window
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
Tag
Use Tag: Add user
 Function key component is used to pop up window 11, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Switch window: popup window
361
2
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Graphics
Use vector graphics:
Tag
Use Tag: Add user
 User info display component is used to display user’s information, and attribute settings are as follows:
Separator Setting
Color: Black; Style: ------
Background Setting
Background Color: White; Title Bar Background Color: Green; Border Color: Black
Border Width
2
（2）Window 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
 Function key component is used to close keyboard, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Keyboard Function: Escape
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
 Function key component is used to move keyboard, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Switch Window: Popup window title bar
362
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
 Text input component is used to input user name, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9486
Word Length
10
Graphics
None
 Number input component is used to input password, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9502
Numeric Data
Word Length：2 words；Data Type: 【password】； Data Width【DWORD】
Graphics
None
 Number input component is used to confirm password, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9510
Numeric Data
Word Length：2 words；Data Type: 【password】； Data Width【DWORD】
Graphics
None
 Number input component is used to set logout time, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9508
Numeric Data
Word Length：2 words； Data Type【unsigned int】，Data Width【DWORD】
Graphics
None
 Bit state switch component is used to select user permissions, and attribute settings are as follows:
Write address
LW.B9506.0
Switch Type
Toggle
Tag
None
LW.B9506.1
LW.B9506.2
LW.B9506.3
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
 Bit state setting component is used to confirm to add users, and attribute settings are as follows:
Write address
LB9167
Switch Type
On
Tag
Use Tag, 0: Add
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
（3）Window 11
363
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2
1
3
4
5
6
 Function key component is used to close keyboard, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Keyboard Function: Escape
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
 Function key component is used to move keyboard, and attribute settings are as follows:
Function
Switch Window：Popup window title bar
Graphics
Use vector graphics：
 Text input component is used to input user name, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9486
Numeric Data
10
Graphics
None
 Number input component is used to input password, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9502
Numeric Data
Word Length：2 words；Data Type: 【password】； Data Width【DWORD】
Graphics
None
 Bit state switch component is used to confirm password, and attribute settings are as follows:
Read/Write address
LW9510
Numeric Data
Word Length：2 words；Data Type: 【password】； Data Width【DWORD】
Graphics
None
 Bit state setting component is used to confirm to delete users, and attribute settings are as follows:
Write address
LB9168
Switch Type
On
Tag
Use Tag; 0: Delete
364
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Graphics
Use vector graphics：

Delete user permission is only valid for the users added in HMI. Users set in the configuration project
cannot be deleted
（4）Save, compile and offline simulation

Touch the 【Add User】button, add user dialog box will pop up.
Input the user name to be added and the corresponding password, confirm it, then click “Add” to complete the operation.

Touch the【Delete User】button, delete user dialog box will pop up.
365
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Input the user name to be deleted and the corresponding password, confirm it, and then click “Delete” to complete the
operation.
366
11 Recipe/ RecipeEditor
Recipe data is saved on the HMI and can be stored inside the area power down. Recipe data can be stored in the RW and
FRW register. For with USB HOST interface or SD card slot on the HMI, the recipe data can also be stored in the ERW
register.
RW, FRW and ERW distinction as follows:
Recipe Register
RW
Description
RW is specially designed for HMI recipe memory SRAM physical storage area that is defined by the
address type. When the HMI is powered down, SRAM backup battery sustains by the HMI, but back-up
battery power is low, or when no electricity, RW data will be lost. SRAM no endurance limit
FRW
FRW is dedicated to the physical storage area HMI FLASH address type definition. The data stored in
FLASH FRW, not because of HMI powered off or HMI backup battery power and loss of data. But
there are erasing times limit FLASH
ERW0~2
ERW0 ~ 2 is dedicated to the physical storage area defined in the external memory address type. The
data stored in the ERW, not because of HMI powered off or HMI backup battery is dead and losing data
RW, FRW, ERW using methods similar, the following content mainly RW, for example, no longer on the FRW and ERW
additionally described.
11.1 Register Related to the Recipe
Register/ Component
Descriptions
RB
The absolute addresses of the recipe bit addresses saved in the SRAM.
RBI
The index addresses of the recipe bit addresses saved in the SRAM.
FRB
The absolute addresses of the recipe bit addresses saved in the flash.
FRBI
The index addresses of the recipe bit addresses saved in the flash.
RW
The absolute addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the SRAM.
RWI
The index addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the SRAM.
FRW
The absolute addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the flash.
FRWI
The index addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the flash.
ERW0~2
The absolute addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the external memory.
ERWI0~2
The index addresses of the recipe word addresses saved in the external memory.
LW9000
The data in LW9000 is the offset of the index address
Data Transmission
Transfer the data in recipe data to the data in PLC or HMI.
Timer
Recipe Data
367
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
General PLC Control/ General PLC
Control (Extend)
11.2 Method for Checking the Recipe Size
11.2.1 Method for Checking the RW Size
The SRAM capacity (RW size) is different from different types of HMI. Through the following ways user can check the RW
size.
For example: Take MT5320T for example:

Check in Kinco HMIware software
Move the mouse to the MT5320 icon in HMI in Graph element window, the system will automatically display the relevant
information of this HMI. The [Recipe Size] is the RW size. The recipe size of MT5320T is 256k words that are 512 K Bits.

Check in selection guide

Check the recipe file attribute after uploading the recipe by KHManager
368
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
 Click [Upload Recipe] in [KHManager], and input [File Name], then click [Save].
 Recipe is uploading until the “Upload Success” dialog box pop up.
 Check the size of recipe file uploaded.
11.2.2 Calculation for Recipe Address Range
There are two following ways for calculating HMI recipe address range.

Calculation based on recipe size
[Example]: Take MT5320T for example, the recipe size is 256K words, that 256Kword= 512K Byte, and 1k byte is occupied
by the system. The calculation is (512-1)×1024 Byte=523264 Byte. Because Kinco HMIware are addressed in words, so
bytes divided by 2 becomes the word address, and then the last three digits become 0,finally get 261000 words.

View through the element address range
[Examples] For example create a new model for the MT5320T HMI configuration, in the Configuration Editor to create a
new screen number input component, set the address type is RW, the user can view the MT5320T in the [address range], RW
register address range is: 0 ~ 261000.
369
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
11.3 Usage of Recipe
11.3.1 Absolute Address
The recipe memory is battery-backed SRAM (static RAM), in words for units as a storage area, each memory cell has an
address corresponding recipe absolute addressing (It is assumed that the initial value of illustration only, to actually quasi) as
shown:
11.3.2 Index Address
Because absolute address too much, find it very difficult, so the index provides a virtual address of a temporary storage area
RWI0, ..., RWIn and an index register LW9000 (occupies 2 words) by changing t LW9000 to find RW.
370
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
[Example] If the value of LW9000 is equal to 105, then the RWI0 will point to the data in address RW105.
11.3.3 Application of Recipe
For example: We take the address 4x of Modbus RTU protocol for example, save the value of 4X1~4X5 to 0 recipe file and 1
recipe file. The address range of 0 recipe file is RW0~RW4, The address range of 1 recipe file is RW5~RW9.
371
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Configuration screen as shown:
 Text: PLC address, recipe 0, recipe 1
 Multiple State Switch component used to change the value of LW9000, its attribute are:
Read/ Write address
LW9000 （HMI system special register）
Function
Control Mode: add, State Num.: 2, State No. 0 map value 0, State No. 1
map value 1
372
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
Graphics
Use vector graphic：
Tag
Use Tag：recipe 0, recipe 1
 Recipe Data component transferring the value of PLC to RW, its attribute are:
Write Address
4X 1 （PLC register）
Function
Recipe Data: Upload from PLC to Recipe, Data Length: 5 words
Graphics
Use vector graphic：
Tag
Use Tag；0：Execute Recipe
 Number Input component inputting the value of the PLC register, its attribute are:
Read/ Write address
4X 1
4X 2
4X 3
4X 4
4X 5
 Number Display component displaying the value of RW0~4, its attribute are:
Read/ Write address
RW0
RW1
RW2
RW3
RW4
 Number Display component displaying the value of RW5~9, its attribute are:
Read/ Write address
RW5
RW6
RW7
RW8
RW9
Run and input 0~4 in the PLC address 4X1~4X5, then press [Execute Recipe] button, the value of RW0~RW4 will display
0~4.
Press [recipe 0] button and switch to [recipe 1], and modify the value of PLC address 4X1~4X5 to 5~9, then press [Execute
Recipe] button, the value of RW5~RW9 will display 5~9.
11.4 RecipeEditor
RecipeEditor is a tool in Kinco HMIware, and it is mainly used for the user to create, check, or edit the recipe file in *.rcp,
*.csv, *.erp and *.frp format.
373
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

The data file in *.rcp, *.erp and *.frp format can save as *.csv file, and can open, check, edit or print by
Excel.
File Format
Descriptions
HMI own the recipe memory corresponding recipe file format, using KHManager tool can upload and
rcp
download files to the format of the recipe (which, file size depends on the HMI recipe memory size) It is
the file format which can be identified by HMI
It usually means the file format is based on the configuration settings and automatically saved to an
csv
external storage device or through the recipe editor to save. This particular binary file format, you can
use Microsoft Excel software to open and can be to edit, save and print, and other related operations, but
can not be freely modified template format, otherwise the recipe editor and HMI can not be resolved
erp
The file format only supported that the HMI with external memory, can be saved in USB DISK, SD card
The recipe file format corresponding to the FLASH address, HMI will be only generated while used,
supports a maximum address is 2G Bits, 2 × 1024 × 1024 × 1024/16 Words = 134217728 Words,
when configuration, placed a number input element, the address type selection FRW, will see the range is
frp
0-134217727. The number of FLASH recipe address using as the same as the HMI is open, when not in
use will be released. Usually used to save the more important and not always erase the data, because the
HMI powered off or battery power is not lost, but erasing times is limited. using KHManager tool can
upload and download the recipe file format (upload FRW, download FRW)
11.4.1 Recipe Editor Start-up

Open from the [Start] menu in the PC operation.

Open from the [Tools] menu in Kinco HMIware.
Click [Recipe Editor] in the [Tools] menu.

Double-click [RecipeEditor.exe] in the [RecipeEditor] file document in Kinco HMIware installation directory.
The RecipeEditor folder is copied to another location can be used alone.

Click [Recipe Editor] button in [KHManager]-[Download Operate].
374
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
11.4.2 Recipe Editor User interface
Menu
ToolBar
Status Bar

Data editing area
Data configuration area
Menu Bar/ Toolbar
Name
Icon
File
Toolbar name
Descriptions
New File
Create a new recipe file
Open File
Open a recipe file
Save File
Save recipe file
Save As
Save as a recipe file
Exit
Exit recipe editor
ToolBar
Start/ Close Toolbar
Status Bar
Start/ Close Status Bar
File Merge
File Merge
HMI Merge some recipe files to a recipe file
Help
About RecipeEditor
The version of RecipeEditor
Bit Browser
Bit Browser
Display word register in bit format
View

Data configuration area
There are [Read Address Setting], [Dataformat Operation], [The detail of current dataformat] and [Dataformat Operation
375
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Usage] in data configuration area.
Name
Read Address Setting
Descriptions
The Start Address
The start address of the reads data segment
Read Data Array
The number of groups to read data
Cur Format length
The sum length of each data type× the number of groups
RefreshData
Click【Refresh Data】,display data as a new setting
Select the current data format
Dataformat Operation
The detail of current
dataformat
Add Dataformat
Click【Add Data format】to add the data format
Delete cur Dataformat
Click【Delete cur Data format】to delete the current data format
Select an entry, double click, pop [Data Type Editor] dialog;
-
blank right-click menu, you can add, modify, delete data type
Auto use dataformat
After modify the data format, automatically read the current file
Use Dataformat
With the same effect [Refresh Data]
Dataformat Operation Usage

Data editing area
Data editing area according to [data configuration area] set the start address, the number of data and data types to display the
corresponding register address, and the user can view and modify data area data corresponding to these addresses.

Hide / Show [Data Configuration area]
Move the mouse to the control bar when the mouse is displayed as
, pulling the control bar or click the left mouse button,
you can hid [Data Configuration area]. At this moment move the mouse to place the control bar when the mouse is displayed
as
, pulling the control bar or click the left mouse button, you can restore the display [Data Configuration area].

【Data editing area】to view, modify, and bit browser
Directly input data in the data field [Desc1] (eg.RW1-RW9 are input 1-9), select the data bar required to bit browser, the data
bar turns blue, right-click or click
on the toolbar, can pop [bit browse] properties box.
376
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor
[Examples] For example RW9 value is 9, bit browser form RW9: 03,00 bit address can be seen in red: ON, decimal 9 to
binary form as 0000 0000 0000 1001.
11.4.3 Usage of RecipeEditor
（1）Add a new recipe file: If you use the RecipeEditor in the first time, you can click
icon in the toolbar and then can
create a new recipe file.
（2）Add Dataformat: Click [Add Dataformat] and input the new format name: e.g. “Mydata”, then click [OK] button.
（3）Add Data Item

The procedure of adding data type is shown as below:
377
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Data Type can be [Single data] or [Array data].

In 【The detail of current dataformats】, if each ID entry is a single data, data area address only corresponds to
one column, if each ID entry is array data, and the array length is N, then the address of the data area
corresponding N columns. If the [read address set area] is M, then the address of the data area corresponding
to M lines. The entire data area of the format is M rows × (N0 + ... + Nx) columns, where Nx represents the
x-th ID entry length of the array, if a single data, Nx = 1, if the array data, and the length of the array number
N, the Nx = N

Single data
Value of RW0~RW9
378
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor

Array data

[String Data] support Unicode code type
（4）Adjustment of Data Start Address and Data Length
379
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
（5）Save: Click
icon, and save the current data to recipe file.

After the completion of number modify, it would be click [save], otherwise the previous data will be lost
after RefreshData button is pressed.
（6）Modify data item
（7）File Merge
HMI can only download a recipe file every time. If you download the second recipe file will overwrite the first file. If you
need to use a different recipe file, you can merge all recipe files to one file, then download the file to HMI.

Create a 1.rcp file, default setting, and input 1~10.

20~29 Create a 2.rcp file, the start address: 20, and input 2~29.
380
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor

Merge 1.rcp and 2.rcp: Click [File Merge] menu-[File Merge].
a：Select merged file type: The merged file will download to 128k words HMI or 256k words HMI.
The files size of merge depends on the file type after the merger, if it is 4000 series, then the size is 256KB, if it is 5000
series, then the size is 512KB. Note: The recipe size of MT4522T is 512KB, this time the file types after merger to choose
5000 Series.
b：Select the path: Select the file needed to merge.
381
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
c：File Length: the size of merged file
[Example]: 1.rcp file is 20 bytes, then the file length is 20 Bytes.
d：The address of the file begins to read: the starting address of recipe file.
[Example]: The starting address of 1.rcp file is 0, so [The Param of the first file] –[The Address in Merged file] is 0 words.
The starting address of 2.rcp file is 20, so [The Param of the second file] –[The Address in Merged file]: 20 words.
e：File length: the length of recipe file.
[Example]: the data type of 1.rcp and 2.rcp are single data, so the [The Param of the first file]/ [The Param of the second
file]-[File length] is 10 words.
f：The Address of the file begins to read: The Address of the file begins to merge.
[Example]: The Starting address of the 1.rcp file is 0, so [The Param of the first file]-[ The Address of the file begins to read]
is 0 words. [File length] is 10 words, that is RW0~RW9.
The Starting address of the 2.rcp file is 20, so [The Param of the second file]-[ The Address of the file begins to read] is 20
words. [File length] is 10 words, that is RW10~RW19.
So [The Param of the first file]-[ The Address in merged file] is 0 words, [The Param of the second file]-[ The Address
merged file] is 10 words.
382
Advanced Part Recipe/RecipeEditor

The Address merged file in the Param of the second file must be greater than the sum of the Address
merged file and the Address of the file begins to read in the Param of the first file.
g：The path for merged file: Set the name and path for the merged recipe file.
h：Merge file: Execute the [Merge file] operation.
The size of the 12.rcp merged file.
Open the 12.rcp merged file in RecipeEditor, and the data will display in [RecipeEditor] as below:
383
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
11.5 Recipe Uploading/ Downloading/ Clearing
☞For details about, refers to [Advaced Part 8
KHmanager]
384
12 KHMonitor
12.1 Descriptions of KHMonitor
KHMonitor is used to monitor the data in HMI and PLC registers through HMI.
12.2 Start KHMonitor
Click【Start】-【All Programs】-【Kinco】-【Kinco HMIware v2.1】-【Tools】-【KHMonitor】
In the installation directory of Kinco HMIware,double click【KHMonitor.exe】
12.3 KHMonitor Interface

Menu/Toolbar
Menu
File
Edit
View
Toolbar Icon
Toolbar
Description
Open
Open an exist monitor file
Save
Save the monitor configuration file
Save as
Save as another configuration file,its format is *.khm
Exit
Close KHMonitor
Select All
Select all the monitor items in monitor window
Add
Add a monitor item
Del
Delete the selected monitor item
Run
Execute selected monitor register
Stop
Stop the status of selected monitor register
Toolbar
Open/Close Toolbar
Status Bar
Open/Close status bar
385
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
About KHMonitor
Help
Version information

Monitor Window

Monitor Window is used to display information such as Name, Value, Status, HMI/PLC, Address, Address type,
Update Cycle (ms).

Double click the monitor item in Monitor Window to change its setting.
12.4 How to Use KHMonitor
1)
Create new monitor item: When it is first time to use KHMonitor, click in toolbar to create data monitor.
2)
Enter monitor name: Enter monitor name in the popup window when creating new monitor.Default name is New
Monitor0, if create another item, the No. will increase automatically.
3)
Set Communication Type: Set the current connection type between HMI and PC.
Set Communication Type as following figure：

Communication Manager include function such as【Add】,【Modify】,【Remove】,【Remove all】,【OK】
Add: to add a new communication type between HMI and PLC.
Modify: to modify the current communication type.
Remove: to remove the selected communication type.
Remove all: to remove all the communication
386
Advanced Part KHManager

Descriptions of Communication Type Settings.
Communication Type
Serial
Parameters Setting
Select
Selectcurrent
currentPC
PCCOM
COMport.
port.
Ethernet
Set current HMI IP.
USB
No need to set parameters.
4)
PLC: to select the communication protocol between HMI and PLC.
Descriptions of【PLC】
Drop down menu for PLC
Select the corresponding communication protocol between HMI and PLC.
Station
PLC’s station No.
HMI Device Port
Select the HMI port which is used to communicate with PLC
5)
Address: to set the address which needs to be monitored
Descriptions of【Adderss】
Address
Batch
Set the address of HMI/PLC which needs to be monitored
Batch Count
Set the number of address which will be copied, its range is 1~1000
Address Auto Change Mode
Copy by address increment/decrement.
Forward Address Auto Change
Increment/decrement for the address of the register
After Address Auto Change
Increment/decrement for the address of the register in accordance with
the decimal point
Note: Batch is only valid in the first time to add monitor items.
6)
Address Type: to select the data type of the address, including bit, number and string. It will display the data according
to selected data type when monitoring.
7)
Run/Stop monitor
【Run】：Select monitor item and click
icon in toolbar to run it. Press ctrl/shift icon to select more items. The data will
display in “Value” after run the item.
387
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
【Stop】：Select monitor item and click
icon in toolbar to stop it. Press ctrl/shift to select more items.
388
13 Print
Kinco HMIware support 2 type of printing method：

Local print: Printing via serial or USB interface, HMI is connected directly to the printer to print the HMI screen.

Network print (remote print): Through network printer to print HMI screen.
Network printing needs hardware configuration: HMI with Ethernet port and connect to the LAN, the LAN with a PC,
printer, and the printer is no direct link between the HMI, and HMI does not need any drivers.
Enthernet
Cable
13.1 Type of Printer supports local printing
Kinco HMIware supported printer models as follows:
Kinco HMIware
Printer Models
Printer Driver
Printer
Interface
Manufacturer
Printer method
Dot Matrix
WH4008A31-0
WH-A52Z20-30E125
Serial
Pin micro-printing
240 pixels / line
53
WH-A52Z20-40E125
Serial
Pin micro-printing
240 pixels / line
WH-A62R10-41E725
Serial
Thermal micro-printing
192 pixels / line
WH-A93RG0-00E725
Serial
Thermal micro-printing
192 pixels / line
Serial
Thermal micro-printing
192 pixels / line
WH-A62R10
WH-E173R90-00E11720
GA
WH-A93RG0-00E825
Serial
Thermal micro-printing
384 pixels / line
0E825
WH-T2AR10-30E82B
Serial
Thermal POS
384 pixels / line
WH-E191RB0-
WH-E191RB0-00E11820
00E1182055
55
Serial
Thermal micro-printing
576 pixels / line
SP-E4004SK
Serial
Impact dot matrix
240 pixels / line
MY-POS80K
Serial
Thermal POS
240 pixels / line
E, F
MY-POS80K
http://www.b
rightek.com.c
n
WH-A93RG0-0
Siupo SP-M, D,
information
389
http://www.si
upo.com
http://www.
mypos.cn
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
13.2 Printing-related Components
In Kinco HMIware, you can use the print function of specific components as follows:
Components name
Trigger
Support
Support Network
Local Print
Print
Print Current Screen


Print the specified screen


Print Current Screen


Print Content
Register
Function Key
—
PLC Control（Report Printout）
Word
PLC Control（Screen Hard Copy）
Bit
Event Information Logon
Word / Bit
Print the contents of trigger event


Trend Curve
Word / Bit
Print trend curve


☞ For more details about the print-related elements settings, please refer to [Advanced Part 4 Compent]

Report Printout
You control the specified window screen printout by changing the value of the specified word registers. When the value of
the specified register word changed, and is a valid window number, the window number corresponding window contents will
be printed. Printing is completed; the value of the specified register address automatically changes to 0.
Example：Set as shown below, when the value of LW0 is equal to 10, print the contents of the window 10. Printing is
completed，the value of LW0 automatically change to 0. When the value of LW0 is equal to 11, print the contents of the
window 11. [Report] function using output only execute print function does not perform the function of switching window,
will not switch to the print window. Using the [Report Printout] function performs only print function and will not switch to
the printed window.
390
Advanced Part Printer

Event Print
In the [Event Information Logon], set the print log events, when the set condition is triggered, it will print out the event
contents.
Example: Set as shown below, selecting [On Trigger] and [Return to Normal]: when LB0 is ON, print "temperature is too
high!” When LB0 returns to OFF, print "Temperature is too high!".
391
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
If you need to print the time, check the contents in [HMI Attribute] - [Print Settings] - [Print Settings of Event Display].
☞ For more details about Print Settings of Event Display, please refer to [Advanced part 6.1.8 Print Setting]
!
[Print] - check the [Print Relative Time], if no printer is connected, HMI will be prompted to an error
message "Print Error"
☞ For more details about [Trend Print], please refer to [Advanced Part 4.6.1 Trend Curve]
13.3 Pictbridge Print
Pictbridge is a direct connection and picture printing standard, the devices which support this protocol can be connected
392
Advanced Part Printer
together and print pictures directly. In Kinco HMIware V2.2, customer can use Pictbridge to connect HMI directly with
printer and print the screen directly. This standard supports connecting devices to printer directly but do not need to connect
the device to PC to print, it is very convenient for different applications.
MT4000 serial HMI supports all the printers which support PictBridge protocol, user can connect HMI and this printer
with USB cable on HMI USB slave port. Then they can print HMI screen and data on this printer.
HMI
!
1.
MT4210T、MT4220TE、MT4310C、MT4300C、MT4300CE、MT4403T\TE、MT4512T\TE、
MT4523T\TE、MT4404T、MT4424TE、MT4522T\TE、MT4620TE，MT4414T\TE，MT4513T\TE.
The HMI which are produced after Dec 2013 support Pictbridge printing.
2.
MT4210T、MT4220TE、MT4310C、MT4300C、MT4300CE、MT4403T\TE、MT4512T\TE、
MT4523T\TE, MT4404T, MT4424TE、MT4522T\TE、MT4620TE, MT4414T\TE ，MT4513T\TE.The
HMI which are produced before Dec 2013 will support Pictbridge printing after updated the kernel
and rootfs in Kinco HMIware v2.2（build131108）.
3.
Kinco HMIware v2.2（build131108）or higher version supports Pictbridge printing
When user downloads program from Kinco HMIware or U disk to HMI, if there is information of “Please update
Kernel and Rootfs”, which means user needs to update the Kernel and Rootfs.
Version Information:
Kinco HMIware Version
Kernel
Roots
Need to update or not
Enable PictBridge
V2.1(build130805)
1828
1895
Yes
Do not support
V2.2(build131108)
1958
1971
No
Support
If customer does not need the print function in Kinco HMIware V2.2, please disable the “Enable Pint” in HMI Print
Setting and then compile the program again before downloading
Flow chart of update printing function
393
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Different modes of HMI USB slave port.
Enable Print in HMI Attribute in Kinco HMIware
Setting Items
Enable Printer
Function
HMI
in
Checked
Setup
Window
Unchecked
Checked
Unchecked
Print Mode, can print from USB
Print Mode, but cannot print from
slave port, but cannot download
USB slave port, because there is no
program.
compiled files for printing.
Download Mode, cannot print
Download Mode, cannot print
To sum up，user must check the Enable Printer Function in setup window and Enable Print in Kinco HMIware to enable the
print function in HMI.
13.4 Print Function Setting Method
13.4.1 Local Print: HMI serial is connected directly to the Printer
[Example 1] MT5320T connect to WH-A93RG0-00E825 printer, print the current screen by function key. First create a new
project.
Enable Print and select Printer driver: [HMI Attribute]-[Print Setting]-[Enable Print]
1
3
2
 Select the printer driver "WH-A93RG0-00E825" from the [Printer] list.
 Select the printer port connected with HMI, in this case choose "COM0".
!
Same port cannot be set to print port and communication port

 [Baud rate / data bits / parity / stop bits] recommend using the default settings, and printer parameters must be consistent.
In this case [baud] / [data bits] / [Parity] / [stop bits] are the default.
 You place a function key on screen0, and select [Print] - select All [Print Text]. Compile and download to HMI.
394
Advanced Part Printer

The COM0 wiring connection instructions about WH-A93RG0-00E825 printer and MT5320T, please refer
to [Communication Manual]

 Through press the function key to print current screen.
Because micro-printer are monochrome printers, when editing HMI configuration project, recommended

window fill color is white, the text color is black, try not to use the color pictures, so as to avoid the
printing effect is not clear
13.4.2 Local Print: HMI USB Slave is connected directly to the Printer
Example of how to use PictBridge function:
1.
Enable the “Enable Print” in Print Setting of HMI Attributes. Choose the PictBridge as the Printer.。
2.
Set the small dip switches SW1 and SW2 to ON then restart, HMI will display the set up screen, check the “Enable
Printer Function” to enable the printing protocol
Enable Printer Function in set up screen：
395
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
3.
Set the DIP switches SW1 and SW2 to OFF then restart, HMI display the normal operation screen.
4.
Use USB cable to connect HMI (USB Slave) to printer to print HMI screen and data.
!
a)
The USB slave port on HMI is used to download/upload program in default setting, if chick
the “Enable Printer Function” in HMI setup screen, the USB port is configured as printing
port, It does not support program download/upload or other functions in this mode.
b)
In rewrite Kernel and Rootfs mode (SW1 ON, SW2 OFF and restart), the USB slave port is
always configured as download mode, the above setting can not affect this function in this mode.
c)
The printer may not work normally after HMI is repowered or restarted, please restart the
printer if this problem happens.
13.4.3 Network Print (remote print): Through Network Printer to Print HMI Screen.
Element to enable network printing setup method as follows:
Components name
Function Key
PLC Control（Report
Printout）
PLC Control（Screen
Hard Copy）
Trigger
Register
—
Word
Bit
Enable Network print
Print Content
Print Current
Screen
Print the specified
screen
Print Current
Screen
396
Advanced Part Printer
Event Information
Logon
rend Curve
Word/ Bit
Word
Print the contents
of trigger event
Print trend curve
[Example]: requirements through remote printer to print the HMI Screens.
Preparation before printing: a PC, a HMI with network interface, a printer can be directly connected to the PC
This example uses the HP USB printer which model is HP LaserJet P2014, HMI model is MT5320T, and use the [PLC
Control] - [Report Printout] function to print the specified screen.

Installed printer driver on the PC, then in the operating system [Control Panel] - [Printers and Faxes] to find the
appropriate printer, and through the right-click menu to set as the default printer
 Run the print program on PC【NetPrint.exe】
[NetPrint.exe] program is stored in Kinco HMIware software installation directory, if the user did not change the
installation directory, the default installation path is【D:\Program Files\Kinco\Kinco HMIware】。
397
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Double click to run [NetPrint.exe], if the firewall prompts [you want to keep this process?], Select [Unblock].

When printing, [NetPrint.exe] need to keep running, [NetPrint.exe] during operation will be minimized to
the tray
 In the [HMI Attribute] - [Print Settings], set the PC IP address and port which run [NetPrint.exe]:
In the [HMI Attribute]-[HMI], set the HMI IP address
398
Advanced Part Printer
!
1. The PC which connect to the printer and the PC which run the [NetPrint.exe] program can be the same,
and it can also be any PC within the LAN
2. The PC which connect the printer, the PC which run the [NetPrint.exe] program and HMI are connected
to the same LAN, IP address must be on the same subnet, IP address must be the same in front of three, the
last one is not the same
Enable network printing
PLC Control] property in the [[control type] is set to "Report Output" to specify the address of the register LW0; then check
[custom printing options]] and [network printing and check all the options] [print content.
And then you place a "Numeric Input" component on screen 0. [Read / Write Address] is set LW0. Save and compiled, then
downloaded to HMI.
399
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1. Use [network printing] function, you need to enable the print function in related components，while

local print only need to enable print function in [HMI attribute]-[Print setting]
2. Select the [Network Printing], printer color cannot be modified, the default is monochrome
Cable
The HMI through cross or direct network cable access network.
 Setting print properties
Click [NetPrint.exe] icon to pop up the properties window. As shown:

Property described as follows:
NetPrint property descriptions
Tool
Print Setup
Paper Direction
set portrait/landscape
Print Position
set align left/mediate
[alone]:Printers print in real time, immediately upon receiving the print job
Print
Print Method
[merge]: After receiving the print job is not printed immediately, but covered
with a total content of paper to print the print job again, this function is mainly
used to save paper
400
Advanced Part Printer
Checked, and choose the path, upon receiving the print job, you can save the
Save to local
screen pictures on your PC instead of printing. Picture format. JPG, picture
naming names is the time, yyyymmdd-hhmmss, such as 20120903-110552.jpg
Printer Setup
Print Preview
View print effect
Exit
Exit [NetPrint.exe]
Help
About [NetPrint.exe] version information
HMI IP address。If the HMI with the PC connected to the same LAN, NetPrint will automatically
IP address
detect
Change on the value of LW0, it will print the contents of the corresponding window
13.4 Print Page Application Skills
When the HMI window larger or smaller than the actual width of print paper, you can set the current window to 【Print
Page】, by changing the HMI window width and height to achieve print paper more or less than the actual width of the HMI
window. This feature is only available for [Report printout]
1. Select [Print page], the window maximum width and height can be set to 1024 x 1024 pixels / line.

2. Once the height of the window is set to exceed the actual height of the HMI window, if the HMI runs
the window, over the part will not show up. Recommended to use [Report printout], that only need to print
this window, no view on the HMI. If you want to view, you can do a normal screen identical to the user.
[Example] HMI model: MT5320T, the width of window is 320 pixels / line.
WH-A62R10-41E725 printer support 192 pixels / line.
If MT5320T connect to WH-A62R10-41E725, the HMI is wider than the width of the paper, so the window to the right of
HMI 128 pixels printed out.
Create a new project of MT5320T
[HMI Attribute]—[Print Setting]—select[Enable Print].
[Printer]: WH-A62R10
[Port]:COM0
[Baud Rate]/ [Data Bit]/ [Parity Check]/ [Stop Bit] are default.
401
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Double-click screen0，[Window Attribute]-choose [special attribute]-[print page], and set the width is 192, height is 1024.

Set control type: [Report printout]
☞ For more detail about [Report printout], please refer to [Advanced part 4.15.5 PLC Control]
Cable

For more details about the printer connection cable, refer to [communication connection Manual]
13.5 Print Error
The following dialog box will be displayed when the printer error:
When this error occurs, please check the printer power, cable, printer port, etc. are normal.
☞ For more details about shielding print error messages and modify the print error information content, please refer to
[Advanced part 6.1.4 HMI System Information Text]
402
14 HMI Communication
This chapter introduces the HMI supports communication and various communication configurations.
14.1 Serial Communication
Serial interface that is referred to is a bit of data sent in the order. Serial communication is common in industrial control
communication, which is characterized by a communication line as simple as a pair of transmission line can be two-way
communication, thereby reducing costs, especially for long-distance communication, the communication distance can be
from a few meters to several thousand m, the transfer speed is slow.
HMI supports RS-232C, RS-485, and RS-422A three kinds of serial communication connection.
14.1.1 HMI and PC Serial Communication
HMI via RS-232C serial cable to connect the PC side serial interface for user projects, recipes and other data upload /
download and HMI firmware update.
☞For more details about uploading and downloading via the serial port on the HMI, please refer to [Advanced Part 8
KHManager]
14.1.2 HMI and PLC /Controller Serial Communication
Single HMI via the serial port with single PLC communication, but also support multiple serial communication protocol to
use the same or a different serial communication protocols PLC / controller communication.
In the same COM port, can connect multiple serial communication protocol and uses the same multi-point communication
PLC / controller can connect up to 255 devices. The serial communication protocols using different PLC / controller needs
were connected to the HMI different COM port, and can simultaneously and use three different serial communication
protocols PLC / controller communications, depending on the hardware configuration of the actual HMI decision.
!
COM0 and COM1 port supports RS485 interface mode, respectively simultaneously with multiple serial
communication protocol to use the same PLC / controller communication; The RS232 interface COM2
port supports only way, it does not support multiple PLC / controller communication
403
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

single HMI with a single PLC / controller communication
[Example] Below a MT5320T with a SIEMENS S7-200 communication, for example, requires the HMI monitor PLC M0.0
output state. (This example uses the HMI COM0 port to connect PLC communication)
 Configure the device in the topology window and set the communication parameters
Configuring HMI COM0 client communications parameters: [HMI Attribute]-[COM0 Setting] set the serial communication
parameters
!
HMI serial communication parameters with the actual PLC communication port parameters consistent
Configure the PLC station number: [PLC Attribute] – [station NO.] setting 2
404
Advanced Part HMI Communication
!
[PLC Attribute] – [station NO.] consistent with the actual PLC station number
 Edit the configuration screen
Double-click the HMI in the topology window icon to open the Configuration Editor window, From the[ Graph Element
window] - [PLC Parts], select "Bit State Lamp" component added to the Configuration Editor window, and set the
component Attribute are:
Read Address
M.B 0.0（PLC Register）
State0 State1
Graph
Using vector graphics，
After setting, save the project, compile and download.

Using RS-485 communication cable for connecting the HMI and the PLC，After successful communication can be
established on the HMI monitor the state of M0.0

single HMI with multiple PLC / controller communication

Single HMI with multiple PLC / controller (different communication protocols) communication
405
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
[Example] Below a MT5320T with a SIEMENS S7-200 (hereinafter referred to as PLC 0), a MITSUBISHI FX2N
(hereinafter referred to as PLC 1), a OMRON CP1H (hereinafter referred to as PLC 2) communication, for example,
Requirements were monitored on the HMI PLC 0 of VW 100, PLC 1 of D100 data and PLC 2 in Q 0.0 outputs.
（This example uses the HMI COM0 port to connect PLC 0, COM1 connected PLC 1, COM2 communication connection
PLC 2）
 Configure the device in the topology window and set the communication parameters
In the [HMI Attribute] - [COM0/COM1/COM2 Setting] According to the serial communications port of the connected PLC
actual parameters were set to HMI serial communication parameters, Parameters are set as follows:
HMI serial
Serial communication parameters
COM0
RS485-2，9600，8，Even parity，1
COM1
RS485-4，9600，7，Even parity，1
COM2
RS232，9600，7，Even parity，2
In the PLC 0, PLC 1, and PLC 2 [PLC Attribute], in accordance with the actual [PLC station number] to each station number
setting:
PLC Number
Station number
PLC 0
2
PLC 1
0
PLC 2
0

Connected to the serial port on a different HMI PLC / controller can be set to the same or a different
station number, setting the station number to be connected with the actual PLC / controller station number
the same.
 Edit the configuration screen
Double-click the HMI in the topology window icon to open the Configuration Editor window, Respectively, from the [Graph
406
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Element window] - [PLC Parts] select two "Number Display" and a "Bit State Lamp" component added to the Configuration
Editor window, Component Attribute are set to:
Number display element _1
PLC Number*
0
Read Address
VW 100（PLC Register）
Graph
Using vector graphics，
Number display element _2
PLC Number*
1
Read Address
D 100（PLC Register）
Graph
Using vector graphics，
Bit State Lamp
PLC Number *
2
Read Address
CIO _bit 100.00（PLC Register）
State0 State1
Graph
Using vector graphics，
※A multi-machine HMI by changing the components Attribute required of the [PLC number] to distinguish PLC control
object.
After setting, save the project, compile and download.

Use the appropriate communication cable are connected HMI and PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2, after the success of
communication is established on the HMI monitor VW 100, D100 data as well as the state of Q 0.0

Single HMI with multiple PLC / controller (the same communication protocol) communication
407
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
[Example] Below a MT5320T with three MODBUS device (hereinafter referred to as PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2), a
MITSUBISHI FX2N (hereinafter referred to as PLC 3), a OMRON CP1H (hereinafter referred to as PLC 4) communication
is cases, Requirements were monitored on the HMI PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2 of 4X 100, PLC 3 of D100 data and PLC 4 of Q
0.0 outputs.
（This example uses the HMI COM0 port to connect PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2, COM1 connected PLC 3, COM2
communication connection PLC 4）
 Configure the device in the topology window and set the communication parameters
In the [HMI Attribute] - [Serial 0/1/2 setup] According to the serial communications port of the connected PLC actual
parameters were set to HMI serial communication parameters, the parameters are set as follows：
HMI Serial ports
Serial communication parameters
COM0
RS485-2，9600，8，Even parity，1
COM1
RS485-4，9600，7，Even parity，1
408
Advanced Part HMI Communication
RS232，9600，7，Even parity，2
COM2
In the PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2 [PLC Attribute] , in accordance with the actual [PLC station number] to each station number
setting ：
PLC Number
Station number
PLC 0
1
PLC 1
2
PLC 2
3
PLC 3
0
PLC 4
0

Connected to a serial port on the HMI with PLC / controller must be set to a different station number and
station number set to be connected with the actual PLC / controller station number consistent
 Edit the configuration screen
Double-click the HMI in the topology window icon to open the Configuration Editor window, respectively, from the [Graph
Element window] - [PLC Parts] selected four "Number Display" and a "bit status indicator" component added to the
Configuration Editor window, element attributes are set as follows:
Number display element _1/2/3
PLC Number*
0
1
Read Address
4X 100（PLC Register）
2
Graph
Using vector graphics，
Number display element _4
PLC Number*
4
Read Address
D 100（PLC Register）
Graph
Using vector graphics，
Bit Lamp
PLC Number*
5
Read Address
CIO_bit 100.00（PLC Register）
State0 State1
Graph
Using vector graphics，
※A multi-machine screen by changing the components required Attribute of the [number] to distinguish PLC control object.
409
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
After setting, save the project, compile and download.

Use the appropriate communication cable are connected HMI and PLC 0, PLC 1, PLC 2, PLC 3, PLC 4, after the
success of communication is established on the HMI monitor VW 100, D100 data and Q 0.0 state.
14.1.3 Serial Communication Related Settings
（1）Kinco HMIware allowed through "Exchange serial 0 and serial 1 " option will COM0 and COM1 serial port
communication parameters and settings in these two serial ports to connect devices on the exchange.
☞ For details about serial to exchange, refer to [Advanced Part 2.9 Exchange Serial]
（2）Users in making redundant communication, it can provide a system through Kinco HMIware special register to mask
the corresponding fault site communications.
☞ For details about the Station No. Shield, refer to [Advanced Part 15 Register]
（3）When the HMI and PLC / controller serial communication failure occurs, the system will automatically prompt the
corresponding fault error message. Fault error message contains information about the PLC station number in hexadecimal
data display.
Meanwhile, the user can customize the system to provide fault error message content or special registers through the system
to mask the corresponding fault error message.
☞ For details about the System Information screen, refer to [Advanced Part 15 Register]
☞ For details about the system customization, refer to [Advanced Part 6.1.4 HMI System Information Text]
14.2 Network Port Communication
Ethernet has a high transmission speed, low power, easy to install and good compatibility and other advantages, it is widely
used in industrial automation control system.
HMI via Ethernet communication mainly in the following two ways:
One is through the ends of the Straight through Cable RJ45 connector or Crossover Cable, via a hub or switch
communications;
Another is through the RJ45 connectors at both ends of the Crossover Cable, not through a hub or switch communications,
this approach only applies to one pair of a communication.
14.2.1 HMI and PC Network Port Communication
HMI via RJ45 connectors at both ends of the Crossover Cable and PC-side network interface connector for user projects,
recipes and other data upload / download and HMI firmware update.
410
Advanced Part HMI Communication
☞ For more details about HMI via Ethernet port on uploading and downloading, refer to [Advanced part 7 Compile /
Simulate / Download / Upload]
14.2.2 HMI and HMI Port Communication Network
HMI and HMI port communication network are the following two ways:

Single HMI and single HMI communication
Single HMI and single HMI via a network port communication, through both ends of the cross UTP RJ45 connector is
connected directly communicate.

Multiple (two or more) HMI group network communication
Multiple HMI via the network port communication, need to communicate through the Hub or Switch connection.
[Example] Below two MT5320T communication, for example, requires HMI0 screen control HMI1 of LB100 status output
to ON.
 Configure the device in the topology window and set the communication parameters
In the [HMI Attribute] - [HMI] - [Network Configuration Settings], click [Add] Configuring the HMI network port
411
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
communication parameters：
HMI Number
Communication protocol
IP Address
HMI0
Kinco
192.168.100.240
HMI1
Kinco
192.168.100.241
Once configured, the topology diagram and bus configurations are listed below：
 Edit the configuration screen
In the topology window, double HMI0 icon to open HMI0 Configuration Editor window, from the [Graph Element window]
- [PLC Parts], select “ Bit State Setting” added to the Configuration Editor window, the component property is set to：
HMI*
1
Write Address
LB 100（HMI Local register）
Switch Type
toggle
Graphics
Using vector graphics,
※In Multi-screen network, elements required by changing the properties of the [number] to distinguish between the touch
screen control object.
After setting, save the project, compile and download
 Use a crossover cable to connect HMI0 and HMI1, after the communication is established successfully, you can touch
on the HMI0 Bit State Setting Part, Can be HMI1 LB100 state turns ON.
14.2.3 HMI and PLC/Controller Network Port Communication
HMI and PLC communications network ports are the following ways：

Single HMI and single PLC communication network port
Single HMI and single PLC communication via Ethernet port，through the ends of the cross UTP RJ45 connector is
connected directly communicate.
412
Advanced Part HMI Communication
HMI
Controller
LAN port
LAN port
Crossover Cable

Single HMI and multiple PLC
network port communication
Single HMI and multiple PLC communication via Ethernet port, need to communicate through the Hub or Switch
connection.

Multiple HMI and multiple PLC communication network port

Multiple HMI and multiple PLC communication via Ethernet port need to communicate through the Hub or Switch
connection.
[Examples] Below two MT5320T (hereinafter referred HMI0 and HMI1) and one MODBUS TCP device (hereinafter
referred to PLC0), and one OMRON CJ series PLC (hereinafter referred to PLC1) communications as an example. Require
to monitor the data of PLC0 4x100 in the HMI0, and to monitor the data of PLC1 D100 in HMI1.
 Configure the device in the topology window and set the communication parameters
413
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In【HMI Attribute】—【HMI】—【Network Device Settings】，Click【Add】configuring the HMI network port communication
parameters。
Setting HMI：
HMI NO.
HMI0
IP Address
192.168.100.240
Communication protocol
Kinco
Modbus TCP
Omron CJ Series Ethernet(TCP)
HMI1
192.168.100.241
Kinco
Modbus TCP
Omron CJ Series Ethernet(TCP)
Setting PLC：The IP address set here with the actual IP address of the PLC consistent
PLC NO.
IP Address
Communication protocol
PLC0
192.168.100.2
Modbus TCP Slave
PLC1
192.168.100.201
Omron CJ Series Ethernet(TCP Slave)
After configuration, the topology diagram and field bus setting are listed below：
 Edit the configuration screen
In the topology window, double HMI0 icon，opens HMI0 configuration Editor window，from【Graph element window】—
【PLC Parts】choose “Number Display” element add to Configuration Editor window，Element attribute is set to:
HMI*
1
Read Address
4x 100（PLC Register）
414
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Graphics
Using vector graphics，
Then opens the Configuration Editor window of HMI1,from【Graph element window】—【PLC Parts】choose “Number
Display” element add to Configuration Editor window, Element attribute is set to:
HMI*
0
Read Address
D 100（PLC Register）
Graphics
Using vector graphics，
※Multi-screen network elements required by changing the properties of the [number] to distinguish between the touch
screen control object.
After setting, save the project, compile and download.
 Using crossover or straight-through cable through the Hub or Switch are connected HMI0, HMI1, PLC0, PLC1, after
successful communication can be established to monitor the PLC0's 4x100 data in HMI0 and to monitor the PLC1 D100 data
in HMI1
14.2.4 FTP Function
Kinco HMIware open the FTP functions，can transport files of external storage device to the PC via the LAN, or transport
files of PC to external storage device.
!
FTP function is only available with USB HOST or SD card interface and an HMI with Ethernet port.
【Examples】Through the LAN to access MT5320T U disk file, HMI's IP address is 192.168.100.241.
In【HMI Attributes】—【HMI】open the property page FTP function。
Select【open FTP】，setting password：123456。

1.
FTP default password is 888888.
2. FTP password are not supported characters, cannot be empty, only digits.
415
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
In【HMI Attributes】—【HMI】configure the HMI network parameters.
Set the IP address of the current HMI：
192.168.100.241,，Not to modify the subnet mask and default gateway。
 Save, compile, then downloading the project.
Use cross or straight-through cable via Hub or Switch to access the HMI LAN. Open the IE browser or Explorer, in the
address bar, enter the IP address of the HMI: ftp://192.168.100.241, Enter the system will automatically pop-up dialog
[Login identity], Enter the user name: root, Password: 123456, you can log into the FTP server.
416
Advanced Part HMI Communication
 Open usb1 folder, internal documents can browse. But also can be copy their files to a PC or copy files from the PC to
the U disk.
417
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
14.3 Field Bus Communication
Fieldbus is a kind used in the production site, between devices in the field, between field devices and control devices
implement two-way, string-shaped, multi-node digital communication technology. Kinco HMIware Supports field bus
communication with CAN and Profibus-DP.
14.3.1 CAN Communicate
Kinco HMIware provided CANOpen Node Slave HMI communication protocol can be realized as a slave device with
CANOpen communication between the master devices.
[Examples] Take one MT5320T-CAN screen and one CAN communications equipment for example.
 In Kinco HMIware topology window to configure the device and set the communication parameters
Double-click the HMI icon in the topology window，in【HMI Attribute】—【HMI】—【Field bus setting】，Click【Add】
configuring the HMI communication parameters.
Setting【Protocol】for＂CANOpen Node Slave＂；The remaining parameter settings and the connected CAN device
communication parameters are consistent.
After configuration, the topology diagram and bus configurations are listed below：
 Edit the configuration screen
Place the “number input/display” in configuration screen, Address Range LW8000~8031. Save and compile and download
the project.
 Configuration of the CAN device
418
Advanced Part HMI Communication

For more information on the CAN device configuration, see [Communication connection
instructions]CanOpen Node Slave(CANOpenSlave protocol) related content
Communications configuration and communication cables are set up, after successfully established communication, HMI
can read and write operations on the CAN devices.
14.3.2 DP Communicate
The DP of PROFIBUS-DP is Decentralized Periphery，is a field bus. It has the characteristics of high-speed low-cost，Used
for device-level control systems and distributed I / O communications.
In Kinco HMIware ，HMI software provided by the communication protocol Profibus Slave ,HMI as a slave device and
supports Profibus-DP communication protocol PLC / controller communications.
HMI as a slave device，HMI local address LW is mapped to PIW(D)/PQW(D)，Written to or read from the PLC.
The correspondence relation table of registers below：
!
PLC Register Address
Local address range corresponding HMI
PIW(D)
LW8500~8615
PQW(D)
LW8000~8115
With PLC / controller communication via Profibus DP HMI must be extended with Fieldbus interfaces and
the DP model
[Examples] Below a MT5320T-DP and a SIEMENS S7-300 communication, for example, requires the HMI monitor PLC
PQW256 data.
 Installing the GSD file by STEP7 software
Slave devices need to have a device description file， is used to describe the characteristics of DP the device，This file is
called GSD file，This file usually contains device-specific parameters: Such as baud rate, the input / output data length, IO
data definition. It is an ASCII text file format，Usually provided by the device manufacturer.
Kinco provided "kinco.gsd" File can find In Kinco HMIware installation directory

fieldbus folder or
“http://www.kinco.cn/Search.aspx?type=product&par1=1&par2=8&nodeid=45&lang=cn”
“kinco MT5020 series ProfibusDP GSD file”
419
download
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
GSD file installed，Right in the HW Config directory PROFIBUS DP / Additional Field Devices / MMI find the appropriate
configuration file:
 PLC hardware configuration
Open SIMATIC Manager， in the block configuration Insert included OB1、OB82、OB86、OB100、OB121、OB122 tissue
blocks：
2
1
3
Open HW Config，add Master System：
420
4
Advanced Part HMI Communication
After appears the main rail station system, Configure the master system
Add a slave：
421
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
DP master system and the slave device address number cannot be the same; In addition slave device
transfer rate adaptation, without setting
Configuring the slave input and output resources：This example configure 16 Words Input，16 Words Output，PIW address
from 256~287，PQW address from 256~287
422
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Setting User_Prm_Data(0)：Double-click the slave station device icon，in【DP slave】—【Parameter assignment】set
User_Prm_Data(0)为 1
When LW using double word, only with SIEMENS products through DP communication, only need to

User_Prm_Data (0) is set to 1; If communicate with a master device support other DP protocol,
User_Prm_Data (0) defaults to 0.
 In Kinco HMIware topology window to configure the device and set the communication parameters
Double-click the HMI icon in the topology window，in【HMI Attribute】—【HMI】—【Field bus setting】，Click【Add】
configuring the HMI communication parameters.
Setting【Protocol】for “Profibus Slave”；
【Input/output Modules】Are set to 16 Words，should match with HW Config Slave
device input and output resources；Slave address should match with HW Config.
423
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Input/ Output Modules should match with Master configuration, The max length are 116 words.
After configuration, the topology diagram and bus configurations are listed below：
 Edit the configuration screen
Double-click the HMI icon in the topology window，and open the Configuration Editor window，in【Graph element window】
—【PLC Parts】Select "Number Display" component added to the Configuration Editor window，Element attribute is set to:
Read Address
LW 8000(HMI Local address)
Graphics
Using vector graphics,，
After setting, save the project, compile and download.
Using DP communication cables are connected the HMI and PLC，After successful communication established , can monitor
PQW256 data on the HM.
14.4 MPI Communicate
MPI is the multi-point interface (Multi Point Interface) for short，is developed for PLC communication by Siemens. MPI
communication when the communication rate is less demanding, communication data is not used when a cheap and easy
means of communication. The main advantage of MPI communication CPU can establish communications with multiple
424
Advanced Part HMI Communication
devices，Such as PG / PC programming, HMI device (PC) and the other PLC can be connected together to run
simultaneously. MPI interface using RS-485 physical interface mode, the transmission rate can be 19.2kbit / s or 187.5kbit /
s.
In Kinco HMI ware in, HMI software provided by SIEMENS S7-300/400 (MPI Direct) communications protocol, as the
master station and HMI MPI communication protocol support PLC / controller communications.
!
With PLC / HMI controller via MPI communication must be extended with Fieldbus Interface and is-MPI
model.
[Examples] Below two MT5320T-MPI (hereinafter referred HMI0 and HMI1) and two SIEMENS S7-300 (hereinafter
referred to PLC0 and PLC1) communications, for example, requires HMI0 monitoring PLC0 data on data block variables
DB10.DBW 10.
 In STEP7 Software Configure PLC side communication parameters
Create a New Project ， Under this project insert two PLC stations ， are STATION1(CPU315-2DP) and
STATION2(CPU315-2DP)，Respectively, to complete the hardware configuration into the CPU，Establish MPI network and
configure the MPI station address and baud rate，In this example, the MPI station addresses are set to No. 2 and No. 3, and
communication rate 187.5kbit / s.
!
1. Throughout the MPI network communication rate must be consistent and MPI station addresses cannot
conflict.
2. When the PLC with 4 or 4 above HMI communication, Need to set the [attributes] - [Communications]
to change the parameters of PG communication.
For example , CPU 315-2DP，CPU default PG communication number is 1 , OP communication for the 1,
S7 standard communication is 12, while the maximum number of connection resources 16; The number of
the previous three together is always more than the maximum number of connection resources 16 less two,
that means there are two shared an office for the first three, So S7 300 CPU is always maximum and three
HMI communication, cannot be even the first four，If you need to increase the number of connecting HMI,
just to reduce the number of S7 standard communication to further increase the number of PG
communication and keep three of the total does not exceed the maximum number of 16 connection
resources can be. To increase communication between the PLC, will have to increase the number of OP
communication.
 Configure DB data block
In the SIMATIC Manager to add the data block DB10, in this case the data required to monitor DB10.DBW 10, the
definition of a variable data block DB10, the need to define DB10.DBW 0 ~ DB10.DBW 14 or more variables.
425
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
1. Define data block variables, note: the variable data type to be set in the HMI data type.
Such as data type REAL, then the values in the HMI device data types required to single-precision
floating-point
2. Ensure that the data defined in the PLC HMI block variable than the actual use of the data block
variables and more.
For example, used in the HMI DB5.DBW32, the PLC cannot be defined only to DB5.DBW32, but defined
to DB5.DBW34 or DB5.DBW36 or more
 In Kinco HMIware topology window to configure the device and set the communication parameters
Double-click the HMI icon in the topology window，in【HMI Attribute】—【HMI】—【Field bus setting】，Click【Add】
configuring the HMI communication parameters. Setting HMI：in【Device Name】select the appropriate configuration object，
and set【protocol】 “MPI”，【Baud Rate】should be match with the actual PLC communication port consistent.
!
MPI network connecting multiple master devices, pay attention to the 【master station number】 setting
and cannot be the same.
Setting PLC：in【Device Name】select the appropriate configuration object，
【Target Address】should be match with the actual
PLC station number consistent.
426
Advanced Part HMI Communication
After configuration, the topology diagram and bus configurations are listed below：
 Edit the configuration screen
Double-click the HMI icon in the topology window，and open the Configuration Editor window，in【Graph element window】
—【PLC Parts】Select "Number Display" component added to the Configuration Editor window，Element attribute is set to:
PLC No.*1
0
Read Address
DBn_DBW 1000010（PLC Register）*2
Graphics
Using vector graphics，
※1. A multi-screen or multi-screen multi-machine, Need to change element attributes 【PLC No.】to distinguish control
object.
2. In the HMI, the address type DBn_ DBX, DBn_DBW, DBn_DBD as custom data block address. The first three data
formats for the data block number, later five for the address, address less than five to the previous zero padding.
After setting, save the project, compile and download.
Using MPI communication cables are connected HMI0, HMI1, PLC 0, PLC 1, after the success of communication is
established to monitor DB10.DBW10 in HMI0.
427
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
14.5 MODBUS Protocol Applications（Master-slave mode）
MODBUS protocol is a common language applied on the electronic controller. Over this protocol, between the controller,
the controller through the network (such as Ethernet), and other devices can communicate. Today, MODBUS protocol has
become a common industry standard by which different manufacturers of industrial control equipment can be connected into
the network, thereby performing centralized monitoring.
14.5.1 MODBUS Protocol Overview
Modbus is a request / response protocol, and provide services required by the function code.
Modbus protocol including ASCII, RTU, TCP, etc., does not require the physical layer. Protocol defines the controller can
recognize and use the message structure, regardless of what network they are communicating. The Modbus ASCII, RTU
protocol provides news, data structures, commands, and fluent manner , Data communication using Maser / Slave mode ,
Master station data request message, the slave receives the correct data can be sent after a message to the master station in
response to the request ; master can also be directly send message modify the data from a slave, two-way read and write.
MODBUS stipulates that only master station has the initiative, only a passive response from the slave, including answering
error message.
MT Series HMI Modbus protocol communications to achieve, follow the standard Modbus communication process:
Common data frame format is as follows：

Address code
Address field of a message frame contains two characters (ASCII) or 8Bit (RTU). Possible from the device address is 0 ...
247 (decimal). Single device address range is 1 ... 247. To contact master device through the slave device address into the
address field of the message to select from the device. When a message is sent from the device to respond, he put his address
in response to the address field in order to know which device is the master device to respond. Address 0 is used as the
broadcast address and all slave devices will recognize.

Function code
In the HMI system, commonly used function codes are as follows：
Modbus
Function code
Name
Function
Corresponding
address type
01
Read Coil Status
Read bit（Read N Bits）
0x
02
Read input discrete
Read bit
1x
03
Read multiple registers
04
Read Input Registers
Reading integer, status word, float
3x
05
Write Single Coil
Write bit（Write a Bit）
0x
06
Write Single Register
Write integer, character, status word, float（Write a Word）
4x
Reading integer, character, status word, float（Read N
Words）
428
4x
Advanced Part HMI Communication
15
16

Write multiple coils
Write
Multiple
Registers
Write bit（Write N Bits）
0x
Write integer, character, status word, float（Write N Words）
4x
Data Area
Data area contains the specific function of the terminal data needed to respond to queries or the terminal to collect data.
These data may be numeric, reference address or set values. For example：Function code tells terminal reads a register the
data area from which you need to specify the beginning and read the number of register data, the embedded addresses and
data types according to the contents of the slave varies.

Error correction code
Modbus protocol data needs to checksum, in addition to the serial protocol parity outside, ASCII mode uses the LRC parity,
RTU mode uses a 16-bit CRC checksum, TCP checksum mode without additional requirements.

Parity
Users can configure the controller is an odd or even parity, or no parity. This will determine the character of each parity
bit is how to set up.
If you specify an odd or even parity, "1" digit will count to the number of bits in each character (ASCII Mode 7 data bits,
RTU, 8 data bits). For example RTU character frame contains the following eight data bits：1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1；The whole
"1", the number is four。Such as the use even parity, the parity frame bit will be 0, so that the entire "1" bits remain is
four. If the odd parity, the parity frame bit will be 1, so that the entire "1" bits is 5. If no parity bit, no parity bit is
transmitted, nor checksum testing. Additional padding instead of stop bits to be transmitted character frame.

LRC Detect
Using ASCII mode, messages include methods based LRC error detection domains. LRC field testing except the
beginning of the message field colon and end carriage return line numbers outside content.
LRC field is a binary value that contains an 8-bit byte. LRC value calculated by the transmission device and into the
message frame, the receiving device receiving the message in the process of calculating LRC, and place it in the
message received LRC field value, and if the two values are unequal, there is an error.
LRC is the message of the continuous accumulation of bytes 8Bit, discarding the carry bit.
LRC Simple function as follows：
static unsigned char LRC(auchMsg,usDataLen)
unsigned char *auchMsg ; /* Message to be calculated */
unsigned short usDataLen ; /* LRC number of bytes to be processed */
{
unsigned char uchLRC = 0 ; /* LRC Byte Initialization */
while (usDataLen--) /* Send Message */
uchLRC += *auchMsg++ ; /* Cumulative */
return ((unsigned char)(-((char_uchLRC))) ;
429
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
}

CRC Detect
Use RTU mode, the message including the method based on the CRC error detection fields. CRC field test the entire
contents of the message.
The CRC field is two bytes that contains a 16 bit binary value. Calculated by the transmission equipment was added to
the message. Receives the message receiving device recalculates the CRC, and with the received CRC value in the
field, and if the two values are different, then an error.
CRC added to messages, the low byte of the first to join, and then the high byte. CRC simple function as follows：
unsigned short CRC16(puchMsg, usDataLen)
unsigned char *puchMsg ; /*
the message to be CRC checksum */
unsigned short usDataLen ; /* The number of bytes in the message */
{
unsigned char uchCRCHi = 0xFF ; /* High CRC byte initialization */
unsigned char uchCRCLo = 0xFF ; /* Low CRC byte initialization */
unsigned uIndex ; /* CRC cycle index */
while (usDataLen--) /* Transmitted message buffer */
{
uIndex = uchCRCHi ^ *puchMsgg++ ; /* Calculate the CRC */
uchCRCHi = uchCRCLo ^ auchCRCHi[uIndex} ;
uchCRCLo = auchCRCLo[uIndex] ;
}
return (uchCRCHi << 8 | uchCRCLo) ;
}
14.5.2 MODBUS Protocol Communication Format
Following through several examples, and use the serial debugging tools to send and receive data frames HMI listen to learn
more about the Modbus protocol communication format.
The following examples are primary device HMI, PLC done from the device, and use the RTU transmission mode is
described:
Topology diagram is shown below：
（1）01 Function Code Application
Function Code 01 reads 0x10, 0x11, 0x12, 0x13, 0x14, 0x15 Bit of these six states.
Placed six "bit state lamp" parts in the HMI configuration, the read address are set to 0x10 ~ 0x15.
430
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Running, the host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
First address
First address
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
01
01
00
09
Read Bit Number
Read Bit Number
(high byte)
(low byte)
00
06
CRC
CRC
High byte
low byte
6C
0A
Slave (PLC) response
Station no.
Function code
Byte count
Single byte of data
CRC High byte
CRC low byte
01
01
01
3A
D1
9B
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
HMI display
01H 01H 01H 3AH D1H 9BH
0x15 HMI reads as ON, 0x14 is ON, 0x13 is ON, 0x12 is OFF, 0x11 is ON, 0x10 is OFF. 3A hexadecimal number is covert
into binary to 111,010, corresponding exactly.
（2）02 Function Code Application
Function Code 02 reads 1x999 this Bit state.
In the HMI configuration to place a "bit state lamp" part, the read address is set to 1x999。
Running, the host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
First address
First address
Read Bit Number
Read Bit Number
CRC
CRC
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
(high byte)
(low byte)
high byte
low byte
01
02
03
E6
00
01
58
79
Slave (PLC) response
Station no.
Function code
Byte count
01
02
01
01
02
01
Data (single-byte)
CRC high byte
CRC low byte
00
A1
88
01
60
48
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
01H 02H 01H 00H A1H 88H
01H 02H 01H 01H 60H 48H
（3）03 Function Code Application
431
HMI display
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Function Code 03 reads 4x 208 ~ 215 this 8 Words value.
Placed on the HMI configuration 8 "Number Display" component, the read address are set to 4x 208 ~ 215.
Running, the host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
First address
First address
Read Word
Read Word Number
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
(low byte)
01
03
00
CF
00
08
CRC
CRC
high
low byte
byte
74
33
Slave (PLC) response
Station
Functio
Byte
no.
n code
count
01
03
10
Data(5)
Data(5)
Data(1)
Data(1)
Data(2)
Data(2)
Data(3)
Data(3)
Data(4)
Data(4)
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
00
01
00
02
00
03
00
04
CRC
CRC
high byte
low byte
72
98
Data(6)
Data(6)
Data(7)
Data(7)
Data(8)
Data(8)
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
00
05
00
06
00
07
00
08
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
HMI display
01H 03H 10H 00H 01H 00H 02H 00H 03H 00H 04H 00H 05H
00H 06H 00H 07H 00H 08H 72H 98H
（4）04 Function Code Application
Function Code 04 reads 3x 1023 the value of the Word.
Placed on the HMI configuration 8 "Number Display" component, the read address are set to3x 1023.
Running, the host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
First address
First address
Read Word
Read Word Number
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
(low byte)
01
04
03
FE
00
01
CRC
high
byte
CRC
low byte
50
7E
Slave (PLC) response
Station
Function
no.
code
01
04
Byte count
02
Data High Byte
Data low Byte
04
D2
432
CRC
CRC
high byte
low byte
3B
AD
Advanced Part HMI Communication
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
HMI display
01H 04H 02H 04H D2H 3BH ADH
（5）05 Function Code Application
Use 05 Function code to modify 0x 1 Bit state.
Place a "Bit State Setting” component in HMI, the write address is set to 0x 1, switch type is set to "Toggle."
Runtime on the HMI click "Bit State Setting" component to switch to the ON state, the serial debugging tools for the data
received 01 05 00 00 FF 00 8C 3A; Be switched to the OFF state, the serial debugging tools for the data received 01 05 00
00 00 00 CD CA;（Among them, the hexadecimal value 0XFF00 requests coil to ON. Hexadecimal value 0X0000 request
coil is OFF）Meanwhile, the serial debugging tools to reply to the same data.
The host (HMI) Request
CRC
Station
Function
First address
First address
Write Bit Number
Write Bit Number
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
(high byte)
(low byte)
01
05
00
00
FF
00
8C
CA
01
05
00
00
00
00
CD
CA
high
byte
CRC
low byte
Slave (PLC) response
CRC
Station
Function
First address
First address
Write Bit Number
Write Bit Number
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
(high byte)
(low byte)
01
05
00
00
FF
00
8C
CA
01
05
00
00
00
00
CD
CA
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
high
byte
CRC
low byte
HMI display
01H 05H 00H 00H FFH 00H 8CH 3AH
01H 05H 00H 00H 00H 00H CDH CAH
（6）06 Function Code Application
Use 06 Function code writes 4x 1 this Word value.
In the HMI configuration to place a "multiple state setting" component, the write address is set to 4x 1, set the mode to "set
constant", set the value to 88.
433
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Runtime on the HMI click on the " multiple state setting " component, the serial debugging tools received data to 01 06 00
00 00 58 88 30; while serial debugging tools To reply to the same data.
the host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
First address
First address
Write Word
Write Word
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
Number (low byte)
01
06
00
00
00
58
CRC
high
byte
88
CRC
low byte
30
Slave (PLC) response
Station
Function
First address
First address
Write Word
Write Word
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
Number (low byte)
01
06
00
00
00
58
HMI debugging tools from the serial port to send data packets
CRC
high
byte
88
CRC
low byte
30
HMI display
01H 06H 00H 00H 00H 58H 88H 30H
（7）15 Function Code Application
Use 15 Function code modify the 0x 10 ~ 25 this 16 Bit state.
In the HMI configuration to create a macro code: 15 function code. C, variables are defined as follows:
Code is as follows:
And then placed on a configuration screen "function key" component, the function is set to "execute macro code: 15 function
code. C".
Running, click on the function keys on the HMI, the serial data received on debugging tools for the 01H 0FH 00H 09H 00H
10H 02H FFH FFH E3H 09H, while serial debugging tools, the reply data 01H 0FH 00H 09H 00H 10H 84H 05H.
The host (HMI) Request
434
Advanced Part HMI Communication
First
First
Station
Function
address
address
no.
code
(High
(Low
(high
byte)
byte)
byte)
00
09
01
0F
Write
Write Bit
Bit
Number
Number
(low
byte)
00
10
Write
Bit
Bit
Bit
Data
Data
Byte
High
low
count
Byte
Byte
02
FF
FF
CRC
CRC
High
low
Byte
Byte
E3
09
Slave (PLC) response
First
Station
Function
address
First address
Write Bit
Write Bit
CRC
no.
code
(High
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
Number (low byte)
High Byte
09
00
10
84
byte)
01
0F
00
CRC
low
Byte
05
（8）16 Function Code Application
Use 16 Function code writes 4x 10 ~ 25 these 16 Words value.
In the HMI configuration to create a macro code: 16 function code. C, variables are defined as follows:
Code is as follows:
And then placed on a configuration screen "function key" component, the function is set to "execute macro code: 16 function
code. C".
Running, click on the function keys on the HMI, the serial data received on debugging tools for the 01H 10H 00H 09H 00H
10H 20H 00H 01H 00H 02H 00H 03H 00H 04H 00H 05H 00H 06H 00H 07H 00H 08H 00H 09H 00H 0AH 00H 0BH 00H
0CH 00H 0DH 00H 0EH 00H 0FH 00H 10H 88H 37H.while serial debugging tools, the reply data 01H 10H 00H 09H 00H
10H 11H C7H。
The host (HMI) Request
Station
Function
no.
code
First
First
Write Word
Write Word
address
address
Number (high
Number (low
(High
(Low
byte)
byte)
435
Write Word
Byte count
Data(1)
Data(1)
High
low
Byte
Byte
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
01
10
byte)
byte)
00
09
00
10
20
00
01
Data(3)
Data(3)
Data(4)
Data(4)
Data(5)
Data(5)
Data(6)
Data(6)
Data(7)
Data(7)
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
00
03
00
04
00
05
00
06
00
07
Data(9)
Data(10)
Data(10)
Data(11)
Data(11)
Data(12)
Data(12)
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
09
00
0A
00
0B
00
0C
Data(8)
High
Byte
00
Data(13)
Data(8)
low
Byte
08
Data(13)
Data(9)
High
Byte
00
Data(14)
Data(14)
Data(15)
Data(15)
Data(16)
Data(16)
CRC
CRC
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
High
low
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
00
0D
00
0E
00
0F
00
10
88
37
Slave (PLC) response
Station
Function
First address
First address
Write Word
Write Word
no.
code
(High byte)
(Low byte)
Number (high byte)
Number (low byte)
01
10
00
09
00
10
CRC
CRC
High
low
Byte
Byte
11
C7
14.5.3 MODBUS Protocol in the HMI Application
In the HMI interface design applications, often encountered need to design their own microcontroller control board
communication situation. In this application environment, the MCU control system designers want a simple, stable and
reliable means of communication with the HMI to exchange data. The MODBUS protocol is achieved between the HMI and
the equipment master-slave communication mode most commonly used way.
Below microcontroller (hereinafter referred to as MCU) and HMI through MODBUS protocol (RTU transmission mode in
case) communication, for example, explains how to use MODBUS protocol communication between the HMI and the MCU.
Between the HMI and the MCU communication through MODBUS protocol mainly have the following two Master-slave
ways:
Master / Slave
HMI as Master device
MCU as Slave device
Using protocol
Modbus RTU
Advantage
Disadvantages
HMI direct access to the MCU
MCU as a slave device must constantly
mapped out 0X, 1X, 3X, 4X
respond to queries the HMI, CPU
436
Advanced Part HMI Communication
registers.
occupancy rate is high; MCU interrupt
response shall be used, programming is
relatively difficult.
HMI as Master device
Modbus RTU
MCU as the master device can
MCU as Slave device
Slave
initiate communication; do not take modified, you must regularly check the
LW on the HMI configuration data is
up too much CPU time.
MCU can be read out to achieve them
HMI local address LW, LB is
inconvenient.
mapped to 4X, 0 X register, write or MCU can only access the HMI local
read by the MCU.
word (LW), the position (LB)
（1）HMI as Master, MCU as Slave (using the Modbus RTU protocol)
MCU and HMI using standard Modbus RTU protocol for communication, HMI as master, MCU for the slave side, the MCU,
you need to write the interrupt service routine to handle communication requests from HMI. MCU must support the standard
Modbus RTU protocol, while MCU must map out 0X, 1X, 3X, 4X registers (where 0X, 1X is bit register; 3X, 4X for the
word register)
The recommended communication parameter is 19200, data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. In addition to seven data bits protocol
support all settings other than combinations. Baud rate range from 1200-115200, with the flexibility to choose.

Communication processes
First, HMI sends a request to the MCU, MCU accepts the request, a response back to the HMI. MCU can access the HMI,
4X, 3X, 0X, 1X register; the address range is 1 to 65535.
!
1. MODBUS protocol is relatively complex, demanding overtime
2. In the communication process, HMI continuously sends request packets to MCU; MCU accepts the
request, the need to continue to give a response to the HMI. MCU's response is given using interrupt
mode; therefore, MCU's CPU usage is high. Most of the MCU's CPU resources consumed during the
communication response. Therefore, in practical applications need to be taken into account, if the MCU is
used in addition to doing communication functions, there are other response functions, HMI (Master)
MCU (Slave) using Modbus RTU protocol solution is not recommended, it is recommended to use HMI
(Slave) MCU (Master), using Modbus RTU Slave protocol solutions

HMI Power communication processes
When the HMI after power
（1）If the configuration page does not place any project component, the HMI will not send any communication packets
External
（2）If the configuration page placed engineering components and these components address types are local types (LW, RW,
RWI, LB, RB, RBI, LW.B), the HMI will not send any communication packets External
437
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
（3）If the configuration page to place the component works, and these elements are not the local address type
for 0X, 1X,
3X, 4X, the HMI constantly scanning configuration page of these registers, and constantly sends communication data
packets
（4）When using the timer device batch write bit components (consecutive addresses transmission number greater than one)
when, HMI will be issued by the packet encapsulation function code: 0x0F
（5）When using the timer components word element bulk write (consecutive address transfer number greater than one)
when, HMI will be issued by the packet encapsulation function code: 0x10
（6）Using recipes components download operation (that is, the local word register in HMI RW data downloaded to the
MCU in the appropriate register, such as 4X).
When the download operation data length is greater than 1, HMI will be issued by the packet encapsulation function code:
0x10

Data communications package
Assuming HMI configuration screen is placed 25 0X register address type, starting address: 20, HMI station number is 1.
HMI send packets: ("H" indicates hexadecimal form)
01H 01H 00H 13H 00H
25H XXH
XXH（Wherein: "XX" indicates LRC / CRC）
MCU Return packets：
01H 01H 05H CDH 6BH

B2H 0EH 1BH XXH
XXH（Wherein: "XX" indicates LRC / CRC）
HMI Communication parameter configuration
HMI Port parameter settings：
According to the actual physical connection mode selection set [Communication type].
Baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits setting must be connected to the MCU and the corresponding parameters consistent.
Other parameters are described below:
Parameter
Explanation
PLC Communication
HMI wait MCU response, if the MCU to set the time interval in which the response is not given,
timeout
the HMI that communication timeout, and then continue to send request packet, continue to wait
438
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Protocol timeout 1
Inter-character timeout. HMI communication with the MCU in the process, if the communication
frame characters and the time interval between characters exceeds the set time interval, the HMI
think this communication process is completed, then, to deal with the communication data frame,
parse packets.
For Modbus protocol, baud rate calculation within the program should be based on an estimate.
As follows:
Protocol timeout 1 = 1.5*1000000*(1 + data bits + parity + stop bits) / baud + set adjust time bps
(baud rate);
Sample code (standard C language):
int speed_arr[] = { B115200, B57600, B38400, B19200, B9600, B4800, B2400, B1200,
B300,B150, B134, B110, B75 };
int name_arr[] = {115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 300, 150, 134,
110, 75 };
int adjust_time_bps_arr[]={1000，4000，10000，11000,25000，40000，70000，140000，
600000，0，0，0，0};
Function: Set a baud rate adjustment values check time
Parameter: baud_rate
Returns: the current baud rate of the checksum time adjustment value
int set_adjust_time_bps(int baud_rate)
{
int
adjust_time;
int i;
for(i=0;i<sizeof(speed_arr)/sizeof(int);i++)
{
if(baud_rate==name_arr[i])
{
adjust_time=adjust_time_bps_arr[i];
break;
}
}
return adjust_time;
}
Protocol timeout 2
Reserved (users do not set)
Max interval of word
Occurs mainly in the HMI read data phase, in order to improve communication efficiency,
(bit) block pack
relatively tight group of registers connected to pack together to form a bulk read, for example, D1,
439
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
D2, D4, group packet interval is set to 10, these three registers will be taken a bulk read (read
from D1 from the bulk 4 registers). Note: The group packet interval must be less than the
maximum length of batch read.
Max word (bits) block
Protocol supports the largest number of registers to read and write batch. This function is used to
package size
achieve data transmission components to achieve
PLC Station number setting：
（2）MCU as Master, HMI as Slave (using Modbus RTU Slave protocol)
MCU and HMI using standard Modbus RTU protocol for communication, MCU for remote, HMI for the slave side, the
MCU, just write a simple communication read / write programs without having to write the interrupt service routine. HMI
local address LW, LB is mapped to 4X, 0X register, write or read by the MCU.
Registers the correspondence table is as follows:
Modbus Register address range
Local address range corresponding HMI
0X（1---9000）
LB（0---8999）
4X（1---9000）
LW（0---8999）
The recommended communication parameter is 19200, data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. In addition to seven data bits protocol
support all settings other than combinations. Baud rate range from 1200-115200, with the flexibility to choose from.

Communication processes
First, MCU sends a request to the HMI, HMI accepts the request, a response back to the MCU.
!
1. MODBUS protocol is relatively complex, demanding overtime
2. In the communication process, MCU as the initiator of communication, initiate communication. When
the HMI device accepts the request, a response back to the MCU. Therefore, MCU without constantly
interrupt, do not take up too much CPU time
Therefore, in practice, if the MCU is used in addition to doing communication functions, there are other
response functions (recommended to use this solution).
3. HMI configuration on LW, LB data is modified, you must regularly check the MCU can be read out and
realize it is not very convenient. Therefore, the actual application, the MCU written communication read /
write process, you should consider requesting the HMI data interval stated in the program to give much
time to wait for a communication request
440
Advanced Part HMI Communication

HMI Power communication processes
In this scheme, the user edit the configuration project, the component type can only select local word address register LW
and the local register LB. When powered on the HMI, HMI does not take the initiative to send out a packet communication,
HMI is waiting to receive state. After the MCU send request, HMI resuming a response.

HM Communication parameter configuration
HMI Port parameter settings：
Them from the device number for the HMI station number, other communications parameters set according to specific
circumstances.
441
15 VNC
VNC (Virtual Network Computing) is a kind of software for screen sharing and remote operation via RFB
protocol. The VNC software could transfer mouse and keyboard operation and real-time screen.
VNC system is composed of client-side, server-side and protocol. The server side shares screen with
client-side, while the client-side interacts with server side by monitoring and controlling server-side.
VNC is OS independent. Users could use the VNC system to remote control HMI via PC, mobile and so
on.
15.1 Various client-sides
Kinco does not provide the VNC software. Users could download from the internet:
 VNC software for PC: VNC Viewer
 Browser: IE, Firefox…
 VNC software for mobile terminal: most mobile system support VNC software, for example:
VNC/RDP.
1. JAVA plugin tool is required by browser access. Generally, PC has the JAVA
plugin. Please refer to Java.com to install if there is no JAVA plugin on PC.
2. You can open multiple VNC Viewer clients to access to multiple HMI at the
same time.
15.2 Access via LAN
15.2.1 Remote control HMI by PC via LAN
【Example 1】Remote control MT4414TE by PC. MT4414TE works as server, while PC as client.
1. Only the HMI models with Ethernet port support VNC function for the VNC
function is realized via Ethernet.
1) Tools required for Client-side:
2) The related system registers of HMI are as follows:
Register
Function
LB9290
Open VNC function. Set to “1” to open the VNC function.
LB9291
Mask user operation. Set to “1” to
mask user operation(check only,
cannot operate)
LB9292
Operation password enabled. Set to “1” to enable operation password.
LB9293
Inquiry password enabled. Set to “1” to enable inquiry password.
442
Advanced Part HMI Communication
LW10146~LW10147
Operation password
LW10148~LW10149
Inquiry password
3)
Parameter settings for HMI:
Set IP of HMI as follows:
1.
Take the default gateway in LAN.
Set the VNC related registers:
4) Parameter setting on PC
Input IP of the target HMI:
443
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Input Password (Operation password or inquiry password)
Monitoring on PC:
Changes on HMI is displayed on PC simultaneously, meanwhile, user could control HMI by operating on
PC.
444
Advanced Part HMI Communication
1. If input inquiry password on PC side, then users only could check HMI
information, but cannot operate.
2. If input operation password on PC side, then users could check HMI
information and operate HMI on PC, but cannot operate.
3. If there is no password set on HMI, then no passwords required for monitoring
or operating HMI.
15.2.2 Remote control HMI by mobile via LAN
【Example 2】Remote control MT4414TE by an android mobile. MT4414TE works as server, while the
android mobile as client.
1) Tools required for mobile
2) Parameter setting of HMI is the same with 【Example 1】
3) Parameter setting on mobile
1. Input IP in the Address box.
2. The default port is 5900, please do not change it, otherwise, may not get
connection.
3. Nickname and User name can be omitted.
4. Input operation password or inquiry password.
445
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Monitoring on mobile:
Changes on HMI is displayed on mobile simultaneously, meanwhile, user could control HMI by operating
on mobile.
15.2.3 Remote control HMI by browser via LAN
【Example 3】Remote control MT4414TE by browser.
1) Parameter setting of HMI is the same with 【Example 1】
2) Open the browser, input IP and port of the target HMI in the website box: http://192.168.130.8:5800
446
Advanced Part HMI Communication
Input password (Operation password or inquiry password)
Monitoring by browser:
Changes on HMI is displayed by browser simultaneously, meanwhile, users could control HMI by
operating on browser.
447
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
1. The remote control by browser is realized by a JAVA plugin running on the
website. Please make sure that JAVA software has been installed on PC.
2. Default port for browser access is 5800. Please do not change it, otherwise may
not get connection.
3. Only after updated kernel and Rootfs by v2.2 (build140314) software or above,
the HMI can support the remote control by brower.
15.3 Access via WAN
For remote access via WAN, users need to set port mapping of HMI by router.
For remote access by VNC Viewer on PC via WAN, users need to map IP of target HMI to port number
5900.
【Example 4】The IP of the remote HMI is: 192.168.4.39
1) Port mapping:Choose menu“Forwarding->Virtual Servers”,click the Add New…button
2) Parameter setting of HMI:
3) Assumed that the WAN IP of the local network where the HMI located is 192.168.100.14, then, users
need to input IP 192.168.100.14 into VNC Viewer and mobiles of external network to remote control
HMI. Choose menu ”Network->WAN”
448
Advanced Part HMI Communication
For remote access by browser via WAN, users need to map the HMI IP to port number 5800.
【Example 5】 The IP of the remote HMI is: 192.168.4.39
1) Port mapping: Choose menu“Forwarding->Virtual Servers”,click the Add New…button
2) Parameter setting of HMI is the same with 【Example 4】
3)
Assumed that the WAN IP of the local network where the HMI located is 192.168.100.14, then, use
the browser of the external network to visit website: http://192.168.100.14:5800 to remote control
HMI.
1. The Gateway must been set in the same network segment for access via WAN.
2. The firewall and antivirus software are suggested to be closed, for it may affect
the VNC function.
Router mapping method: If the DMZ host is opened on PC, then users could remote control HMI by VNC
without port mapping.
【Example 6】 The IP of the remote HMI is: 192.168.4.39
1) Router mapping：Choose menu ”Forwarding->DMZ”
449
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2) Parameter setting of HMI is the same with 【Example 4】
3) Assumed that the WAN IP of the local network where the HMI located is 192.168.100.14, then，users
need to input IP 192.168.100.14 into PCs of external network to remote control HMI.
If users need to access multiple HMIs by VNC via WAN, then the router is required for supporting port
self-definition of external network port. The model TL-WR841N (TP-LINK) supports port self-definition
of external network.
【Example 7】IP of remote HMI1 is 192.168.100.35， IP of remote HMI2 is 192.168.100.36.
1)
Port setting of router: add two new items in [transfer rule]-[Virtual server]
1. For access by VNC Viewer, the internal port must be set to 5900 by router, and
serve port can be set as casual value. Input IP and internal port for access by
VNC Viewer via WAN.
2. For access by browser, the internal port must be set to 5800 by router, and serve
port can be set as casual value. Input IP and internal port for access by
450
Advanced Part HMI Communication
browser via WAN.
2) Parameter setting of HMI:
HMI1:
HMI2:
3)
Assumed that the WAN IP of the local network where the HMI located is 203.110.174.214, then,
users need to input 203.110.174.214:5900 and 203.110.174.214:5901 into PCs and mobiles of
external network to remote control HMI.
1. The firewall and antivirus software are suggested to be closed, for it may affect
the VNC function.
451
16 Register
The registers supported by HMI include local registers and external PLC or the registers of control devices. Local registers
include Local Word(LW)，Local Bit(LB)，Recipe Word(RW) and so on. External registers include M，D，S, etc.
16.1 Local Registers of HMI
16.1.1 Bit Address
Description
Local bit, Local word address, local registers
of HMI, don’t save data after power off.
Bit extended from local word，Bit addresses
extended from local words.
Address Type
Address Range
LB
0～9999
Format
DDDD：Decimal system
DDDDD.H
LW.B
0～10255.F
No. “H” bit of the no. DDDDD
word, range of H：0~f
Recipe bit，Recipe bit address, local registers
of HMI, save data after power off, don’t save
0～261000.F
RB
DDDDDD.H
data when run out of batteries.
Recipe bit index，Recipe bit index addresses,
indirect addressing mode is adopted, save data
after power off, don’t save data when run out
DDDDDD.H
0～261000.F
RBI
【Example】RBI50
RB address=50+[LW9000]
of batteries.
Flash recipe bit，Flash recipe bit addresses,
using FLASH to save the data that is Erased
/Written infrequently, save data after power
FRB
0～134217727.F
DDDDDDDDD.H
FRBI
0～134217727.F
DDDDDDDDD.H
off even when run out of batteries, but the
“erease/write”times are limited.
Flash recipe bit index，Flash recipe bit index
addresses, using FLASH to save the data that
is Erased /Written infrequently, save data
after power off even when run out of
batteries, but the “erease/write”times are
limited.
16.1.2 Word Address
Description
Local word，Local word addresses.
Address Type
Address Range
LW
0～10255
452
Format
DDDDD
Hardware Part Name and Specification
Recipe word ， Local recipe word addresses,
indicating the local register of HMI, save data
after power off, don’t save data when run out of
RW
0～261000
DDDDDD
batteries.
Recipe word index，Recipe word index addresses,
local register of HMI, indirect addressing mode is
adopted, save data after power off, don’t save data
DDDDDD
RWI
0～261000
when run out of batteries.
【Example】RWI50
RW address = 50 +
[LW9000]
Extended Recipe word，Extended recipe word
addresses, usually for HMI external storage
devices access, such as SD card, U disk and so on,
when more than one external storage devices are
ERW0～ERW2
0～2147483647
DDDDDDDDDD
0～2147483647
DDDDDDDDDD
FRW
0～134217727
DDDDDDDDD
FRWI
0～134217727
DDDDDDDDD
used, ERW0/ERW1/ERW2 will be used for
indentifying.
Extended Recipe word index，Extended recipe
word index addresses, usually for HMI external
storage devices access, such as SD card, U disk
ERWI0～
and so on, when more than one external storage
ERWI2
devices are used, ERW0/ERW1/ERW2 will be
used for indentifying.
Flash recipe word，Flash recipe word addresses,
using FLASH to save the data that is Erased
/Written infrequently, save data after power off
even when run out of batteries, but the
“Erease/Write” times are limited.
Flash recipe word ， Flash recipe word index
address, using FLASH to save the data that is
Erased /Written infrequently, save data after power
off even when run out of batteries, but the
“Erease/Write” times are limited.
16.2 System Special Registers of HMI
The system has reserved some Local Word(LW)，Local Bit(LB) addresses for special purpose, the users must use the
addresses according to related description.
453
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
!
When local registers are used, users need to pay special attention to making sure that the local registers
cannot conflict with the special registers, otherwise the registers will not be able to be used normally or
unexpected results will be lead.
16.2.1 Parameter Setting of Hardware
Address
Description
Read/Write
Screen saver indication for entering. When the system enters screen saver/backlight and energy
LB9018
saving state, the bit is automatically set to ON; when the system exits screen saver state, it is
R
set to OFF.
Screen saver indication for exiting. When the system enters screen saver/backlight and energy
LB9019
saving state, the bit is automatically set to OFF; when the system exits screen saver state, it is
R
set to ON.
LB9045
LB9051
LB9091
LB9092
LB9093
LB9094
LB9120
LB9121
LB9141
LB9145
Restart touch screen. Restart HMI when this bit is set to ON.
Enable/disable touch function when backlight is closed. Set this bit to ON will disable the
touch function when backlight is closed.
Increase LCD contrast. The system will execute the function of increasing LCD contrast by
setting the bit to ON, upon completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Decrease LCD contrast. The system will execute the function of decreasing LCD contrast by
setting the bit to ON, upon completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Increase backlight brightness. The system will execute the function of increasing backlight
brightness by setting the bit to ON, upon completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Decrease backlight brightness. The system will execute the function of decreasing backlight
brightness by setting the bit to ON, upon completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Trigger long sound of buzzer. Set the bit to ON to trigger long sound of buzzer once, upon
completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Trigger short sound of buzzer. Set the bit to ON to trigger short sound of buzzer once, upon
completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Turn off the current sound of buzzer alarm. Set the bit to On to turn off the current sound of
buzzer alarm, upon completion, the bit will be cleared automatically.
Automatically restart after system crash. Set the bit to ON, to make HMI will restart
automatically after it crash for 5 seconds.
W
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R/W
LB9160
Switch bit of CPU light. Set the bit to ON to turn off CPU light, and forbid blinking.
R/W
LB9163
Screen flip display. Set the bit to ON to flip vertical display the HMI screen.
R/W
LW9140
Display screen brightness level.
R
LW9141
Display screen contrast level.
R
454
Hardware Part Name and Specification
Note：as for KM5303，the value of LW9141 indicates the brightness of the buttons.
LW9464
LW9532
Audio volume register. Range: 0~100, 0 indicates mute, from 1 to 100, the volume increases
gradually.
Number of the screen saver window. Display and set the number of the screen saver window.
R/W
R/W
16.2.2 System Setting

System parameter Setting
Address
LW10010
LW10011
Description
Initial window number, range: 0~65535.
Read/Write
R/W
Screen saver/backlight and energy saving time setting. 0: Disable screen saver; 1~65535:
Enable screen saver (take effect without restart). Time unit: minute.
R/W
Buzzer sound. 0: Disable; 1: Enable (take effect without restart, non-zero value enables the
function)
LW10012
Note: LW10012 is only used for closing buzzer, not for closing the buzzer sound triggered by
R/W
alarms and events. For the buzzer sound triggered by alarms and events, the function is
prohibited.
LW10013
Pop-up window attribute. 0: Normal；1: Display above other windows.
R/W
LW10014
Common window attribute. 0: Display below base window; 1: Display above base window.
R/W
LW10015
Number of stored events. Range: 0～65535
R/W
LW10016
RTC source. 0: PLC(Local Word)；1: Internal RTC
R/W
LW10017
Default language. Range: 0~7.
R/W
LW10018
System reserved. For HMI internal use.
R/W
LW10019
Exchange communication ports. Set the bit to ON to exchange com0 and com1 of HMI.
R/W

Taskbar control
Address
Description
Read/Write
LB9040
Hide/display Fast selection window. Set the bit to ON to hide; Set the bit to OFF to display.
R/W
LB9041
Hide/display taskbar. Set the bit to ON to hide; Set the bit to OFF to display.
R/W
LB9042
Hide/display task buttons. Set the bit to ON to hide; Set the bit to OFF to display.
R/W
LB9043

Hide/display all (Fast selection window, taskbar, task buttons). Set the bit to ON to hide; Set
the bit to OFF to display.
R/W
Keyboard control
Address
LB9060
LB9061
Description
Read/Write
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the left part of the
window. When numeric input or text input function is enabled by users, HMI will set the bit to
ON automatically, and pop up a direct window including a keypad. After successful entry or
455
R
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
pressing [Esc], this bit will be set to OFF, and the keypad window will be closed automatically.
LB9062
LB9063
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the upper left part
of the window.
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the bottom left part
of the window.
LB9064
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the right part of the
LB9065
window.
LB9066
LB9067
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the upper right part
of the window.
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the bottom right
part of the window.
LB9068
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in optional position of
LB9069
the window.
LB9080
LB9081

Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the upper half part
of the window.
Keypad popup indication. Keypad popup is controlled by the component in the bottom half part
of the window.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Pinyin input method
Address
Description
Read/Write
This bit is used to switch input method of Chinese and English. When the bit is set to
LB9100
ON, the system switches to Pinyin input method; when it is set to OFF, the system
R/W
switched to English input method.
The value is the serial number of the current window in which Chinese characters are
LW9150
displayed, the value is used for page turning.
LW9152～9167

Display the currently entered Pinyin characters.
R/W
R
Touch
Address
LB9053
LW9030
LW9031
Description
Touch status. The bit will be set to ON when press, OFF when lose.
Touch coordinate. Record the touch coordinate of X position that takes the upper-left corner of
the screen as origin.
Touch coordinate. Record the touch coordinate of Y position that takes the upper-left corner of
the screen as origin.
LW9540
Position of the touch component (component position). The values are the coordinates (x, y, w,
～9543
h) of the touch component relative to the window coordinates.
456
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R
Hardware Part Name and Specification
LW9544
～9547

Position of the window which the touch components are in (window position). The values are
the coordinates (x, y, w, h) of the window which the touch components are in relative to the
R
screen coordinates.
Cursor
Address
LB9135
Description
Cursor lock. When the bit is set to ON, the cursor is locked in the current input component, it
will switch to other input components only after the current input is completed.
Read/Write
R/W
LW9520
Cursor position. X position of the cursor in the input component.
R
LW9521
Cursor position. Y position of the cursor in the input component.
R
LW9530

Cursor semi-transparent display. When the value are not set to 0,the cursor will display
semi-transparently, the range of the value is 20~100.
R/W
Change Base Window
Address
Description
Read/Write
Disable the return value function of 【PLC Control】—【Change Base Window】. ON: Disable;
OFF: Enable.
【Example】: To switch from Base Window 10 to Base Window 12 with the 【PLC Control】
LB9052
—【Change Base Window】 function，and the reading address is D12, the switchover will be
R/W
implemented when the value of D20 is 12. After the system switches to Base Window 12, PLC
will automatically return the number 12 to the address D21. If the return value function is
disabled, the system will not return the number 12 to D21.
LB9139
LW9050

The bit will be set when change Base Window. The bit will be set to ON when change Base
Window display.
Displaying Base Window Number. Slave machine can maintain the same Base Window with
master machine according to the word.
R
R
Print control
Address
LB9016
Description
Printer error indication. The bit is set to ON in case of printer error and to OFF if printer is
normal.
Read/Write
R
Printer control. Set it to ON to disable print function; set it to OFF to enable print function.
LB9017
Note: 【HMI Attributes】—【print Setting】—【Enable print】must be selected, otherwise the
R/W
function of this bit will be invalid.
LB9123
LB9132
Event printing setting. Set the bit to ON to separate event content from other information such
as serial number, time and so on.
Printing indication. The bit will be set to ON when printing, OFF when finished.
457
R/W
R
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LB9133
Printing preprocessing. Set the bit to ON to execute printing preprocessing operation to
R/W
improve the printing results.
LB9143
USB printer connection status. Set the bit to ON for connection, OFF for disconnection.
R
LW9800
Error code register, word length:2
R
LW10254

Enable Pictbridge print. Set it to 1 to enable pictbridge print; set it to 0 to disable pictbridge
R/W
print.
HMI System Version Information
Register
Description
Read/Write
LW9640
Hardware Version
R
LW9641
Kernel Version
R
LW9642
Rootfs Version
R
LW9643
GUI Version
R
LW9644
Comserver Version
R
LW9645
Servo Version
R

HMI Time
Address
Description
Read/Write
LW9034～9035
Stopwatch, double word, display the time in unit of 0.1 second.
LW10000
BIN code，System time (Second), range:0~59
R/W
LW10001
BIN code，System time (Minute), range:0~59
R/W
LW10002
BIN code，System time (Hour), range:0~23
R/W
LW10003
BIN code，System time (Date), range:0~31
R/W
LW10004
BIN code，System time (Month), range:0~12
R/W
LW10005
BIN code，System time (Year), range:0~9999
R/W
LW10006
BIN code，System time (Week), range:0~6
R/W
!

R
The system time should be downloaded into HMI for debugging, it will call the system time of PC when
run in offline simulation mode on PC.
External time
Address
Description
Readable/Writable
LW9010
Local time(Second), Range:0~59
R/W
LW9011
Local time(Minute), Range:0~59
R/W
LW9012
Local time(Hour), Range:0~23
R/W
LW9013
Local time(Date), Range:0~31
R/W
LW9014
Local time(Month), Range:0~12
R/W
458
Hardware Part Name and Specification
LW9015
Local time(Year), Range:0~9999
R/W
LW9016
Local time(Week), Range:0~6
R/W
LW9017
Local time(Millisecond), Range:0~999
R/W
!
1.When 【HMI Attributes】—【Use The External Clock for Event】 is selected, the events will read the
values of LW9010~9017 rather than adopt system time of HMI.
2. Before this function is used, the values of PLC time registers must be transmitted to LW9010~9017.

VNC
Address
Description
R/W
LB9290
VNC enable, set on，start VNC function
RW
LB9291
VNC operation disable, set on，no VNC operation
RW
LB9292
VNC operation password enable，set on, password valid
RW
LB9293
VNC check password enable, set on, password valid
RW
LW10146~10147
VNC operation password
RW
LW10148~10149
VNC check password
RW

Others
Address
LB9124
LB9162
LB9164
LB9240
LB9260
LB9261
Description
Times of alarm setting. Set the bit to ON to display alarm times in the front of the massages.
TTF font optimization display. Set the bit to ON to optimize the display effect of the edge of
the TTF font.
Video mode selection. ON: NTSC mode; OFF: VPAL mode.
ON: When he number input component which read address same as write address is input ENT,
the new value will display immediately.
Speed selection switch pages. ON: Switch page displays fast. OFF: Switch page displays slow.
Switch page data display selection. ON:Keep original data. OFF:Page data first brush cut to
zero, and then display valid data.
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Open the function of exporting event to csv file including date. ON:Open.After setting ON,the
LB9270
format of csv file in external device(USB,SD Card)will change,it can’t be used together with
R/W
the function “Save to external device” like USB and SD Card. OFF: Close.
LB9280
LB9910
LB9911
Identifier bit of unconfirmed event. ON: there are events which are unconfirmed; OFF: there is
no event which is unconfirmed.
Open WebServer. Set the bit to ON to open WebServer function; while OFF to close this
function.
Brower display mode. Set the bit to ON to display HMI image with gray mode in browser;
while OFF to display actual HMI image.
459
R/W
R/W
R/W
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LW9616
Record the current number of events triggered. Word length:1
LW9370
Operation acknowledgement mode. Operator acknowledgement mode: 1: Confirm; 2: Cancel.
LB9915
Set on，with key, KM5303 switch disable
RW
LB9920
Set on, instead invalid float number NAN of former value
RW
!
R/W
R
1. The above functions will take effect after restart.
2. The values of the local words above will be saved after power off.
16.2.3 Components Setting

Input Components
Address
LB9129
LB9131
LB9140
LB9142
LB9161
Description
Trigger input components in basic window. Set the bit to ON to trigger input components in
basic window.
Input components trigger automatically. Set the bit to ON to make the input components
triggered automatically after open window.
Caps Lock. Set the bit to ON to make English letters input in capital format; the bit will be set
to OFF automatically after input finished.
Trigger input components in popup window. Set the bit to ON to trigger input components in
the popup window in top layer.
Components left alignment display. Set the bit to ON to make the display
component(LW9060～9075) on the keyboard displays left alignment when input.
LW9002
Display the maximum of numeric input. When numeric input component is activated, it will
～9003
display the maximum of the numeric component. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.
LW9004
Display the minimum of numeric input. When numeric input component is activated, it will
～9005
display the minimum of the numeric component. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.
LW9060
～9075
LW9180
～9187
LW9190
～9197
LW9380
～9395

Read/Write
W
R/W
R/W
W
R/W
R
R
Number/Text input procedure display. The words will display the input procedure when
Number/Text input components are activated. LW9075 display the latest input data. Usually
R
text components are used for displaying.
Display the maximum of number input, usually by text components.
R/W
Display the minimum of number input, usually by text components.
R/W
Display the historical data of number input components, usually by text components.
Text components
460
R
Hardware Part Name and Specification
Address
Description
Read/Write
Display the bytes of text display component in inverted order. Set the bit to ON, then the high
LB9137
bytes and low bytes of text component will exchange to display, the low bytes will display on
R/W
the right side of the text component.
LB9138
LW9130
LW9170

Mask text characters. Set the bit to ON to make text component only display characters in code
R/W
33~127. Other characters will be replaced by space character.
Switch text library contents online. The value indicates the text library index.
R/W
Display the page number of note book component. The value indicates the initial row of the
R
input area. It is used for page turning of note book component.
Trend Curve
Address
Description
Read/Write
LB9110
Active view and zoom function of trend curve.
R/W
LB9111
Active cursors function of trend curve.
R
LW9200
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, year. BIN code.
R
LW9201
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, month. BIN code.
R
LW9202
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, date. BIN code.
R
LW9203
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, hour. BIN code.
R
LW9204
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, minute. BIN code.
R
LW9205
Time value of the browsed points of trend curve, second. BIN code.
R
Display the value of every channel of every browsing dot in trend curve. According to the
LW9210～
channels of trend curve, the registers will display the current value of each channel. LW9210
R
displays the value of channel 0; LW9211 displays the value of channel 1; …

Register decoding in Modbus Slave driver
Address
LW9810
LW9811
Descriptions
R/W
Adjust the decoding sequence of 16bits integer
R/W
Value
Sequence
Descriptions
For example:0x0001
0
12
High byte and low byte are normal
Means 1 (0x0001)
1
21
High byte and low byte swap
Means 256 (0x0100)
Adjust the decoding sequence of 2bits integer
R/W
Value
Sequence
Descriptions
For example:0x0000 0001
0
1234
High byte and low byte,high word and low
Means 1 (0x0000 0001)
word are Normal
1
2143
High word and low word are normal,but
Means 256(0x0000 0100)
high byte and low byte swap.
2
3
3412
4321
High word and low word swap,but
Means 65536
high byte and low byte are normal.
(0x0001 0000)
High word and low word,high byte
Means 16777216
461
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
and low byte swap.
LW9812
(0x0100 0000)
Adjust the decoding sequence of 2bits float
R/W
Value
Sequence
Descriptions
For example:0x3F80 0000
0
1234
High byte and low byte,high word and
Means 1.0(0x3F80 0000)
low word are Normal
1
2
3
2143
3412
4321
High word and low word are normal,but
Means -5.78564e-039
high byte and low byte swap.
(0x803F 0000)
High word and low word swap,but
Means 2.27795e-041
high byte and low byte are normal.
(0x3F80 0000)
High word and low word,high byte
Means 4.60060e-041
and low byte swap.
(0x0000 803F)
16.2.4 Security Leve l and User Permission

Security Level
Address
LB9046
Description
Lower security level. The bit will be set to ON when system switches from a lower
security level to a higher level.
Read/Write
R
LW9040～9041
Password of security level. Double word.
W
LW9042
Security level. Display security level of current base window.
R
LW9043

Switch security level by force. Force to switch from higher level (for example, level 2)
to lower level (for example, level 0).
W
Mapping of Security Level
Address
Description
Read/Write
LW10024～10025
Level 1 password. Double word
R/W
LW10026～10027
Level 2 password. Double word
R/W
LW10118～10119
Level 3 password. Double word
R/W
LW10120～10121
Level 4 password. Double word
R/W
LW10122～10123
Level 5 password. Double word
R/W
LW10124～10125
Level 6 password. Double word
R/W
LW10126～10127
Level 7 password. Double word
R/W
LW10128～10129
Level 8 password. Double word
R/W
LW10130～10131
Level 9 password. Double word
R/W
LW10132～10133
Level 10 password. Double word
R/W
LW10134～10135
Level 11 password. Double word
R/W
LW10136～10137
Level 12 password. Double word
R/W
LW10138～10139
Level 13 password. Double word
R/W
LW10140～10141
Level 14 password. Double word
R/W
462
Hardware Part Name and Specification
LW10142～10143
!
Level 15 password. Double word
R/W
1. The value of the local word above could be saved after power off.
2. Online modification of passwords is supported by the function.
3. Passwords could be modified online, while offline simulation does not support passwords modification.

User Permission
Address
Description
ReadWrite
LB9165
User login. Set ON to execute logining operation, then set OFF automatically.
W
LB9166
User logoff. Set ON to execute logoff operation, then set OFF automatically.
W
LB9167
Add user. Set ON to execute adding user operation, then set OFF automatically.
W
LB9168
Delete user. Set ON to execute deleting user operation, then set OFF automatically.
W
LB9169
Modify password. Set ON to modify password operation, then set OFF automatically.
W
LB9190
LB9191
Executive mark of user management. The bit will set to ON when execute operations of
Add/Delete users.
Operation failure of user management. The bit will be set to ON when operation of user
management fails.
R
R
LW9486～9501
User name for login. Input user name for login, 32 characters at most.
R/W
LW9502～9503
User password. Input user password for login.
R/W
LW9504～9505
Display user permission of the current user. Display the user permission with 32 bits
corresponding to the current user.
R
LW9506～9507
Set user permission. Set user permission with 32 bits when adding user information.
W
LW9508～9509
Set automatic logoff time. Set automatic logoff time when adding user information.
W
LW9510～9511
LW9650~9665
Password confirmation. Input password again to confirm the consistency when adding
user information.
Display login user name
W
R
16.2.5 Data and Project Management
Recipe operation
Address
LB9010
LB9011
LB9012
Description
Recipe downloading indication. The bit will be set to ON in downloading status, and set
to OFF automatically after download is finished (Download from recipe to PLC).
Recipe uploading indication. The bit will be set to ON in uploading status, and set to
OFF automatically after uploading is finished (Upload from PLC to recipe).
Recipe Download/Upload indication. Set to ON in downloading/uploading status, and
set to OFF automatically after downloading/uploading is finished.
463
Read/Write
R
R
R
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LW9000～9001
Index address for recipe data. RWI and RBI access recipe data by this index address.
LW9000 is low word, LW9001 is high word.
R/W
LB9130
Clear RW register. Set the bit to ON to trigger RW clearance.
R/W
LW9260～9261
Initial address for RW clear operation.
R/W
LW9262～9263
Word length for RW clear operation.
R/W

External memory operation
Address
LB9153
LB9154
LB9155
Description
Safety removing setting of SD card. Set the bit to ON before inserting SD card; Set to
OFF before removing to make sure safety removing.
Safety removing setting of U disk 1. Set the bit to ON before inserting U disk 1; Set to
OFF before removing to make sure safety removing.
Safety removing setting of U disk 2. Set the bit to ON before inserting U disk 2; Set to
OFF before removing to make sure safety removing.
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
LB9156
Clear files in SD card. Clear all the files that generated in SD card.
W
LB9157
Clear files in U disk 1. Clear all the files that generated in U disk 1.
W
LB9158
Clear files in U disk 2. Clear all the files that generated in U disk 2.
W
LB9220
HMI is reading SD card indication. ON: reading operation
R
LB9221
HMI is reading U disk1 indication. ON: reading operation
R
LB9222
HMI is reading U disk2 indication. ON: reading operation
R
LB9230
HMI is writing SD card indication. ON: writing operation
R
LB9231
HMI is writing U disk1 indication. ON: writing operation
R
LB9232
HMI is writing U disk2 indication. ON: writing operation
R
LW9470～9485

Prefix title of the copied file. Prefix character strings of the file name which is copied to
SD card or U disk.
R/W
File list box operation
Address
LB9150
LB9151
LB9152
LB9265
Description
Execute import/export operation of project or recipe. Set the bit to ON to execute
import/export operation.
Protection bit of export project. Uploading password is input correctly when export
project, then the bit will be set to OFF, otherwise, it will be set to ON.
Switch folder type between tree type and list type. Set the bit to ON to display folders in
tree type, while set it to OFF to display folders in list type.
Open import/export logo function.ON: Open import/export logo function. OFF: Open
import/export project function.
464
Read/Write
W
R
R/W
R/W
Hardware Part Name and Specification
LW9300～9331
LW9332～9363
LW9364
LW9366
Route name of the browsed file. Display the route name which is browsed currently in
file list component.
Current selected file. Display the file name which is browsing currently in file list
component.
Import/ export selection of project or recipe. 1: project import; 2: project export; 3:
recipe import; 4: recipe export.
Copy/cut/ paste operation of files. With file browse component to execute: 1: copy; 2:
cut; 3: paste.
R
R/W
R/W
W
16.2.6 Communication

PLC communication information
Address
LB9136
LB9144
LB9180
Description
Read/Write
Filtrate communication of the non-response PLC. Set the bit to on to filtrate
communication of the non-response PLC.
Hide the component which failed in communication. Set the bit to ON to hide the
component which failed in communication.
Notification bit of PLC access error, when PLC communication error occurs, the bit will
be set to ON.
R/W
R/W
R
Mask off code of PLC station NO. (COM port 0). Each bit corresponds to one station no.
LW9264～9279
of port 0 (9264.0 corresponds to station no. 0, … , 9279.F corresponds to station no.
255), set the corresponding bit to ON to mask the communication of the corresponding
R/W
station.
Mask off code of PLC station NO. (COM port 1). Each bit corresponds to one station no.
LW9280～9295
of port 1 (9280.0 corresponds to station no. 0, … , 9295.F corresponds to station no.
255), set the corresponding bit to ON to mask the communication of the corresponding
R/W
station.
Mask off code of HMI no.. Each bit corresponds to one HMI no. in the network (9400.0
LW9400～9415
corresponds to HMI no. 0, … , 9415.F
corresponds to HMI no. 255), set the
R/W
corresponding bit to ON to mask the communication of the corresponding HMI.
Register for communication status indication (COM 0). Each bit corresponds to one
LW9432～9447
station no. (9432.0 corresponds to station no. 0, … , 9447.F
corresponds to station no.
255). When PLC communication timeout and no response, the corresponding bit will be
R/W
set to ON, otherwise, the bit will be set to OFF.
Register for communication status indication (COM 1). Each bit corresponds to one
LW9448～9463
station no. (9448.0 corresponds to station no. 0, … , 9463.F
corresponds to station no.
255). When there is no response and PLC communication timeout, the corresponding bit
465
R/W
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
will be set to ON, otherwise, the bit will be set to OFF.
Mask off code of error message. Each bit corresponds to one error message. Set the bit
LW9296～9299
to ON to mask the corresponding error message indication.
For example：“PLC No Response” corresponds to 9296.2, “Socket Connect Error”
R/W
corresponds to 9296.4
Indication code of error message. Each bit corresponds to one error message, when an
LW9550～9553
error indication occurred, the corresponding bit will be set to ON automatically.
R
For example ： “PLC No Response” corresponds to 9692.2 ， “Socket Connect
Error”corresponds to 9296.4

Mapping of communication parameters
Address
LW10030～10033
LW10034
Description
Read/Write
IP address. Each section occupies one word, range 0~255.
R/W
Download port number. It is download port number rather than communication port
R/W
number.
LW10035
Reserved.
R/W
LW10110
Gateway. Each section occupies one word, range 0~255.
R/W
LW10114
Subnet mask. Each section occupies one word, range 0~255.
R/W
LW10036
Work mode of COM0. 0：232；1：485-4w；2：485-2w
R/W
LW10037～10038
Baud rate of COM0. Double word..
R/W
LW10039
Data bit of COM0.
R/W
LW10040
Check bit of COM0.
R/W
LW10041
Stop bit of COM0.
R/W
LW10042
Slave station no. of COM0 (HMI station no.)
R/W
LW10043～10044
PLC time-out constant of COM0.
R/W
LW10045～10046
Protocol time-out constant 1of COM0.
R/W
LW10047～10048
Protocol time-out constant 2 of COM0.
R/W
LW10056
Work mode of COM1. 0：232；1：485-4w；2：485-2w
R/W
LW10057～10058
Baud rate of COM1. Double word..
R/W
LW10059
Data bit of COM1.
R/W
LW10060
Check bit of COM1.
R/W
LW10061
Stop bit of COM1.
R/W
LW10062
Slave station no. of COM1 (HMI station no.)
R/W
LW10063～10064
PLC time-out constant of COM1.
R/W
LW10065～10066
Protocol time-out constant 1of COM1.
R/W
466
Hardware Part Name and Specification
LW10067～10068
Protocol time-out constant 2 of COM1.
R/W
LW10182
Work mode of COM2. 0：232；
R/W
LW10183～10184
Baud rate of COM2. Double word..
R/W
LW10185
Data bit of COM2.
R/W
LW10186
Check bit of COM2.
R/W
LW10187
Stop bit of COM2.
R/W
LW10188
Slave station no. of COM2 (HMI station no.)
R/W
LW10189～10190
PLC time-out constant of COM2.
R/W
LW10191～10192
Protocol time-out constant 1of COM2.
R/W
LW10193～10194
Protocol time-out constant 2 of COM2.
R/W
!

1. The above functions will take effect after restart.
2. The value of the local words above will be saved after power off.
Variables of station number
Address
Description
LW9416
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 0 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9417
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 1 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9418
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 2 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9419
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 3 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9420
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 4 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9421
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 5 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9422
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 6 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9423
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 7 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9424
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 8 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9425
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 9 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9426
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 10 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9427
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 11 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9428
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 12 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9429
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 13 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9430
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 14 of variable of station number.
R/W
LW9431
Variable register of station number. It corresponds to index 15 of variable of station number.
R/W

Read/Write
Error code of bus
Address
Description
467
Read/Write
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LW9145
Record error codes of Profibus.
R
LW9146
Record error codes of Canopen.
R
Description
Read/Write
Macro code operation
Address
LB9116
Macro reading input registers indication. The bit will be set to ON when Macro is reading input
R
registers, set to OFF automatically after finish reading.
LB9117
Macro writing output register indication. The bit will be set to ON when Macro is writing input
R
registers, set to OFF automatically after finish writing.
LB9118
Macro working indication. The bit will be set to ON When Macro is running (read and write
R
register operation are included), set to OFF after finish.
LW9465
Time magnification of Macro time-out. If it is set to N, then the allowable maximum running
time for once of Marco is N times as long as the default value.
468
R/W
Hardware Part
469
1 Name and Specification
This chapter mainly introduces names and specifications of the universal parts of MT series HMI.

Names and specifications of the special parts of MT series HMI, please refer to related selection manual.
1.1 Name of Each Part
Names of the universal parts of MT series:
Front:
a
PWR
CPU
COM
a. Screen display /Touch control area
b. PWR indicator
c. CPU indicator
Back:
470
b
c
d
d. COM indicator
Hardware Part Name and Specification
a. Input terminal of power supply DC24V b. 1A Fuse
c. LAN interface
d. USB HOST(USB type A interface)
SLAVE(USB type B interface) f. COM1(female) g. COM0&COM2(male) h. RESET Button i. DIP Switch
e. USB
j. SD
CARD interface k. One-time button type lithium battery
1.2 Specifications of Each Part
1.2.1 Screen display/Touch control area
The touch panel is for input/output and display.
Caution
In the case of personal safety may be endangered or significant losses may be leaded, please do not use the
input function of HMI touch switch as emergency stop switch.
1.2.2 LED indicator
Indicator
Description
PWR
When the power supply of HMI is ON/OFF, the yellow indicator is ON/OFF.
CPU
When CPU works normally, the green indicator is ON.
When HMI communicates with PLC and such controllers normally, the red indicator will frequently
COM
!
flick or be normally ON.
COM indicator only indicates the communication states of PLCs connected to COM0 and COM1.
1.2.3 Power Supply
Input
voltage：DC24V±15%
24V：Connect to 24V+ terminal of the power supply.
GND：Connect to COM terminal or 0V terminal of the power supply.
24V
GND
FG
FG：Earthing terminal
1.2.4 Fuse
Fast fuse with rated current 1A is used.
Notice
Fast fuse offers protection when the power supply voltage is too high or power polarity is connected
reversely, but it cannot ensure the internal electronic components shall not be damaged.
1.2.5 Serial ports
471
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Notice
Please do not hot plug communication cable with charged, to avoid the communication interface being
damaged.

Serial port COM0
COM0 is a 9-pin D-SUB male connector, it supports communication functions of RS-232C/RS-485/RS-422A, and its pin
assignment is as follows:
Pin#
Function
Signal
RS-232C

RS-485
RS-422A
1
RX-(B)
--
RS485B
Receive data
2
RXD
Receive data
--
--
3
TXD
Send data
--
--
4
TX-
--
--
Send data
5
SG
6
RX+(A)
--
RS485A
Receive data
7
NC
--
--
--
8
NC
--
--
--
9
TX+
--
--
Send data
Signal Ground
Serial port COM1
COM1 is a 9-pin D-SUB female connector, it supports communication functions of RS-232C/RS-485/RS-422A, and its pin
assignment is as follows:
Pin#
Function
Signal
RS-232C

RS-485
RS-422A
1
RX-(B)
--
RS485B
Receive data
2
RXD
Receive data
--
--
3
TXD
Send data
--
--
4
TX-
--
--
Send data
5
SG
6
RX+(A)
--
RS485A
Receive data
7
CTS
Clear to send
--
--
8
RTS
Request to send
--
--
9
TX+
--
--
Send data
Signal Ground
Serial port COM2
COM2 shares physical interface with COM0, is 9-pin D-SUB male connector, this port only supports communication
function of
RS-232C, and its pin assignment is as follows:
472
Hardware Part Name and Specification
Pin#
Function
Signal
RS-232C
1
NC
--
2
NC
--
3
NC
--
4
NC
--
5
SG
Signal Ground
6
NC
--
7
RXD
Receive data
8
TXD
Send data
9
NC
--
COM2 can connect with controllers supporting RS-232C, also can be used to upload/download program and debug.
1.2.6 USB interfaces

USB HOST
USB HOST is a USB A type interface，can connect with peripheral equipments such as USB storage device, keyboard,
mouse and so on. Its pin assignment is as follows:
Pin#

Signal
Function
1
VCC
+5V power supply
2
D-
Data-
3
D+
Data+
4
GND
-5V Earthing
USB SLAVE
USB SLAVE is a USB B type interface，can connect with the USB port of PC, and is used to upload/download program and
debug. Its pin assignment is as follows:
Pin#
Signal
Function
1
VCC
+5V power supply
2
D-
Data-
3
D+
Data+
4
GND
-5V Earthing
1.2.7 LAN interface
LAN port is a 10M/100M transmission speed auto-adapted RJ-45 type interface, can be used to upload/download program
and debug; Multiple HMIs equipped with LAN interfaces can be networked at will via this port and communication with
controllers supporting Ethernet communication is also supported by this port. Its pin assignment is as follows:
473
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Pin#
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Send data +
2
TX-
Send data -
3
RX+
Receive data +
4
NC
--
5
NC
--
6
RX-
Receive data -
7
NC
--
8
NC
--
1.2.8 SD CARD interface
SD CARD port is suitable for connecting with ordinary plug of which the size is 32mm×24mm×2.1mm. It can be used to
save data and quick upload/download user projects, recipes and such files. Its pin assignment is as follows:
Pin#
Signal
Function
1
CD/DAT3
Card checkout / Data 3
2
CMD
Command
3
VSS1
GND
4
VDD
Power supply (+3V）
5
CLK
Clock
6
VSS2
GND
7
DAT0
Data 0
8
DAT1
Data 1
9
DAT2
Data 2
1.2.9 DIP switch
DIP Switch is used to set the HMI system in different working modes, the corresponding working modes of the setting are as
follows:
SW1
SW2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Working mode
Normal working mode
☞ More details about Firmware Update Mode, please refer to
【Hardware Part 5 Firmware Update Mode】
OFF
ON
☞More
details about Touch Screen Calibrate Mode, please
refer to【Hardware Part 4 Touch Screen Calibrate Mode】
ON
ON
☞More
details about System Setting Mode, please refer to
【Hardware Part 3 System Setting Mode】
474
Hardware Part Name and Specification
1.2.10 RESET switch
Press the RESET button，HMI will restart.
1.2.11 Button battery
Non-rechargeable button type LI-Mn battery is used, and the standard voltage is 3V. (CR series)
475
2 Connection with Preiferal Equipments
To meet users’ requirements for multifunction screens of intelligence, information, humanity, MT series HMIs have equipped
with kinds of interfaces.
The equipments supported by the interfaces are described in turn as follows.
2.1 Connection via Serial Port
(1)
Connect with PLC and other controllers via serial ports to communicate
HMI can connect with the serial ports of PLC and such controllers to communicate via RS-232C/RS-485/RS-422A serial
cable.

Requirements for connection
The PLC and such controllers communicate with HMI must be of the types supported by Kinco HMIware, or support the
serial communication protocols supported by Kinco HMIware.

Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves according to the types of controllers and communication modes.
(2) Upload/download data via serial ports
HMI can connect with the serial ports of PC to upload/download user projects, recipes and such data via RS-232C serial
cable.

Requirements for connection
Install and run the HMIware configuration software of Kinco on PC, select download ways through the 【Tools】menu of the
476
Hardware Part Connection with Preiferal Equipments
software.
☞More details about download please refer to【Advanced Part 7.3 Download】

Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves.
（3）Connect with scanner and such equipments via serial ports
HMI can connect with scanner via RS-232Cserial cable to receive banner code and such data.

Requirements for connection
The scanners communicate with HMI must be of the types supported by Kinco HMIware, or support the serial
communication protocols supported by Kinco HMIware.

Cable production
Directly use the RS-232C communication cable provided by the scanner manufacturer.
（4）Connect with miniprinter via serial ports
HMI could connect with miniprinters to print screen or data report via RS-232C serial ports.

Requirements for connection
The miniprinters communicate with HMI must of the types supported by Kinco HMIware, or support the serial
communication protocols supported by Kinco HMIware.


More details please refer to the manual of 【Communication Connection Guide】.
Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves.
477
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
2.2 Connection via USB Interfaces
（1） Connect with USB mouse, USB keyboard and such equipments via USB HOST

Connect with USB mouse
HMI connects with USB mouse, then the USB mouse can execute input operation to the HMI screen.

Connect with USB keyboard
HMI connects with USB keyboard,
then the USB keyboard can execute input operation to the HMI screen via the
【Map Key】function of Function Key components.

Connect with USB mass storage device
Connection between HMI and USB mass storage device can be used for:

Quick upload/download user projects, recipes and such files between HMI and USB mass storage devices via
import/export functions;

A physical storage area (ERW) is divided up from the USB mass storage device, users take access to ERW registers to
read/write data directly on HMI.

Historical data of Trend Curve and XY Curve, historical events, operation log and such data can be saved in USB mass
storage devices.

Connect with USB printer
HMI can connect with USB printers via USB cable to print screen and data report.
The USB printers communicate with HMI mush be of the types supported by Kinco HMIware, or support the printer
communication protocols supported by Kinco HMIware.
478
Hardware Part Connection with Preiferal Equipments


Details about the supported printers please refer to the manual of 【Communication Connection Guide】.
Connect with USB camera
HMI can connect to camera with drive type USB to display the video pictures input by USB camera via camera component.
☞More details please refer to
【Advanced Part 4.10.2 Camera】
（2）Upload/download data via USB SLAVE
HMI can connect with the USB interfaces of PC to upload/download projects, recipes and such data via USB cable.

Requirements for connection
Install and run the HMIware configuration software of Kinco on PC, select download ways through the 【Tools】menu of the
software.

Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves.

Details about cable production please refer to the manual of 【Communication Connection Guide】.
2.3 Connection via LAN Interfaces
（1）Connect with PLC and such controllers to communicate
479
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
HMI can connect to PLC and such controllers to communicate via an interconnection cable (RJ45 Crossover Cable).

Requirements for connection
The PLC and such controllers communicate with HMI mush be of the types supported by Kinco HMIware, or support the
Ethernet communication protocols supported by Kinco HMIware.

Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves.
（2）Upload/download/monitor data via LAN interface
Via interconnection cable (RJ45 Crossover Cable), HMI can connect with the LAN interface of PC to upload/download user
projects, recipes and such data; meanwhile users can monitor the data of HMI or PLC and such controllers on PC.

Requirements for connection
Install and run the HMIware configuration software of Kinco on PC, select download ways through the 【Tools】menu of the
software.

Cable production
Users can make the cable for connection by themselves.
（3）Connect HMI to a Local Area Network via Hub/Switch
HMI can be connected to a HUB or SWITCH to access a Local Area Network via a standard Ethernet cable (RJ45
straight-through cable) or interconnection cable (RJ45 cross-over cable). This is mainly used for multiple HMIs links or
HMI network with multiple PLC and such controllers.
☞ More details please refer to【Adavanced Part 14 HMI Communication】
（4）linking via LAN interface
HMI can link to another HMI via interconnection cable (RJ45 Crossover Cable).

Requirements for connection
All HMIs online are with LAN interfaces, and set 【HMI Attributes】—【Networking Device Setting】in the software.

Cable production
Users can make the connection cable by themselves.

More details please refer to the manual of 【Communication Connection Guide】.
480
3 System Setting Mode
In this mode, users can set such items as system time, Startup Window, IP address.
3.1 Methods to Display System Setting Mode
Enter the System Setting Mode by the following steps：
Set the DIP switch SW1 and SW2 to “ON”；
Press the “RESET button, then HMI restarts and enters the SETUP interface.
3.2 System Setting
Take the SETUP interface of MT5320T for example:
In the SETUP interface of MT5320T，the following items can be set:

Startup Window No.：Startup window. It is the displayed window when start HMI, the default value is 0.

Backlight Saver Time：Screen saver time, in minutes. The default value is 10. Screen saver is unavailable when the
value is 0.

Buzzer Disabled/Enabled：Enable/Disable the buzzer. For MT5000/4000 series HMI, select “Mute” to close the buzzer.

Network parameter setting: set the network parameters such as IP Address, Port, Subnet Mask, Gateway of a target
screen equipped with Ethernet port.

Brightness adjustment: Adjust brightness（Brightness Up/Down）to achieve the best visual effect.


Brightness adjustment is not supported by some HMI models.
Calibrate Time: Check whether the year, month, day, hour, minute and second are the current time, otherwise, calibrate
manually.
481
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software

Import/Export: Quick upload/download user project files or recipe files. The function is only supported be HMIs
equipped with USB HOST/SD Card ports.
Upload the user project files (.pkg）saved in HMI to USB or SD Card. Upload password is
required when upload, the default password is 888888 if it has not been set in the HMI
attributes dialogue box.
Download the user project files (.pkg）saved in USB or SD Card into HMI.
Upload the recipe files (.rcp）saved in HMI to USB or SD Card.
Download the recipe files (.rcp）saved in USB or SD Card into HMI.
!
The SETUP interface may not be displayed in full size in a single screen, then click “Next” or “” to enter
the next page and click Back” or “” to return the previous page.
482
4 Touch Screen Calibrate Mode
When the screen touch is not accurate after firmware update, users can calibrate HMI screen under this mode.
4.1 Methods to Display Touch Screen Calibrate Mode
There are two methods to enter the Touch Screen Calibrate Mode:
Method 1: Enter Touch Screen Calibrate Mode by set DIP switches.
Set the DIP switch SW1 and SW2 (on the back of the HMI) to “ON”；
Press the “RESET button, then HMI restarts and enters the Touch Screen Calibrate interface.
Method 2：Enter Touch Screen Calibrate Mode by the “Touch Calibration” function of【Function Key】.
Method 2 is directly completed on the HMI screen, users do not need to manipulate the DIP switches and without bothering
to open the control cabinet.
☞More details please refer to【Advanced Part 4.2.6 Function Key】
4.2 Touch Screen Calibrate Setting
Follow the “+”sign to touch the screen until you hear a click sound and the“+”sign disappears, then “TP Adjust Success！”is
showing, which indicates that Touch Screen Calibrate is successed. Then, set DIP switch 1 and 2 to “OFF” and press
【Reset】button， restart HMI to exit Touch Screen Calibrate Mode.
483
5 Firmware Update Mode
In firmware update mode， users can update the version of the Kernel and Root files system (It is strongly recommended that
the users use the function under the guidance of Manufacturer).
5.1 Methods to Display Firmware Update Mode
Enter the Firmware Update Mode by the following steps：
Set the DIP switch (on the back of the HMI) SW1 to “ON” and SW2 to “OFF”；
Press the “RESET button, then HMI restarts and enters the Touch Screen Calibrate interface.
5.2 Firmware Update Setting
Open KHManager, enter【System Operation】to update the Kernel and Root files system.
☞More details please refer to
!
【Advanced Part 8 KHManager】
Please backup the configuration projects, recipe data and so on before update Kernel/Root files system, to
avoid data loss during update.
484
6 Maintenance and Tending
This chapter mainly introduces the maintenance and inspection methods to prevent errors occur, so as to ensure the normal
use of the products.
Caution
Do not disassemble the host or touch any internal component in a powered state, otherwise electric
shock accidents may be leaded.
6.1 Maintenance
To ensure the HMI in an optimal state, please maintain the following items regularly:

Engineering data backup
Regularly backup engineering data and store it to safe place, to prevent engineering data loss when HMI malfunctions and
in need of repairment and parts replacement.

Backlight replacement
When the backlight darkens and is difficult to see clearly, then, the backlight should be replaced. The users cannot replace
the backlight privately.
When you need to replace the backlight, please contact your local dealer or representative offices.

Battery replacement
Some HMI models use button type Li-Mn batteries to save recipe data and system time when HMI powers off, when the
voltage of the battery is lower than 2.5V, then the battery should be replaced. Users could buy and replace the batteries
according to the specified specifications by themselves.
6.2 Tending

Screen tending
When the screen gathers dust or dirt, please disconnect the power supply for HMI, then, soak a piece of soft cloth in neutral
detergent and wring it to dry, and then wipe the screen gently.
!
Prohibition
1. Do not use paint thinner, organic solvent or strong acid mixture to clean the screen.
2. Do not use hard or sharp objects to operate or wipe the screen, otherwise, screen surface will be
damaged.

Periodic inspection
To ensure the HM in an optimal state, please inspect the following items regularly:
485
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
 Working environment
Whether the temperature or humidity of HMI working environment is in the specified range?
Whether there is corrosive or flammable gas in the working environment of HMI?
 Electrical performance
Whether the power supply input voltage is in the specified range?
 Others
Has any of the power cable or power cord of the power supply terminals been loosened?
Whether all the installed fasteners are locked tight?
486
Appendix 1 Regular PLC Used for HMI
Connecting device
Brand
description
ABB
AC31/ AC500
（Rockwell）Allen-Bradley
MicroLogix PLC
AB SLC500/PLC5/MicroLogix
SLC500 PLC
Series(DF1)
PLC-5 PLC
AB SLC500/PLC5/MicroLogix Series
Ethernet(TCP Slave)
CompactLogix PLC
AB CompactLogix/ControlLogix
ControlLogix PLC
Series(DF1)
AB CompactLogix/ControlLogix Series
Ethernet(TCP Slave)
（Advantech）ADAM
ADAM-4015/ ADAM-4017
Baldor
NextMove ES Controller
Baumuller
BM4413-ST0-02200-03
Bosch Rexroth
KVFC+ Inverter
PPC-R Series Controller
IndraLogic L Series Controller
Bosch Rexroth
Bosch Rexroth Ethernet
（CAN）CANOpen Node
Kinco k4
Slave
Other company devices which support
CANOpen
Danfoss
FC-300
Delta
DVP PLC
DVP
Emerson
EC10/ EC20 Series PLC
Facon
FBs/ FBe/FBn
Fuji
SPB Series PLC/ NB Series PLC
GE
Fanuc Series 90-30 Series PLC
GE Fanuc Series SNP/GE SNP-X
Fanuc Series 90-70 Series PLC
Modbus TCP
Facon FB/Modbus RTU
VersaMax Series PLC
VersaMax Micro&Nano Series PLC
PACSystem RX7i Series PLC
Hitachi
H Series PLC
487
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
EH-150 Series PLC
MICRO-EH Series PLC
SJ300 Inverter
Hollysys
LM Series PLC
LK Series PLC
Hollysys LK Modbus RTU
Hollysys LK Modbus TCP Slave
IDEC
Micro Smart Series PLC
Inovance
H2U Series PLC
Inovance H2u
Modbus RTU
Kinco
Kinco K3 PLC
ED Series Servo
CD Series Servo
EB-MOD2P-01
Modbus RTU
Kinco EB-MOD2P-01
EB-MOD2P-11
Keyence
KV-16DT/ KV-1000/ KV-3000/ KV-5000
Lenze
Lecom A/B Series Inverter
LS
Master-k Series PLC
LS K-Master Cnet
LS K-Master CPU Direct
LS K-Master Modbus RTU
XGT Series PLC
LS XGT Cnet
LS XGT CPU Direct
GLOFA Series PLC
LS GLOFA Cnet
LS GLOFA FEnet
LUST
CDE34.008
ServoOne junior
Mitsubishi
FX Series PLC
Q Series PLC
FX Series Link Module
QJ Series Link Module
Modbus
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU Extend
Modbus RTU Slave
Modbus RTU MT500 Compatible
Modbus ASCII
488
Appendix 1 Regular PLC Used for HMI
Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP Slave
Modbus UDP
Modbus UDP Slave
Omron
C Series PLC
C Series Link PLC
CJ2 Series PLC
CJ1 Series PLC
CS1 Series PLC
CJ Series Link Module
CS Series Link Module
E5EZ-R3 Controller
OPTO
SNAP
Panasonic
FP Series PLC
Parker
Compax3 Series
SLVD Series
6K4 Series
Profibus DP Slave
Siemens S7-300/ Siemens S7-400
Other company devices which support
PROFIBUS DP Master
Schneider
Micro Series PLC
Modbus RTU
Premium Series PLC
Schneider Modicon Uni-TelWay
Nano Series PLC
Twido
Siemens
S7-200
SIEMENS S7-200
SIEMENS S7-200 Ethernet(TCP Slave)
S7-300
SIEMENS S7-300/400(PC Adapter Direct)
SIEMENS S7-300/400(MPI Direct)
Profibus Slave
SIEMENS S7-300 Ethernet(TCP Slave)
S7-400
SIEMENS S7-300/400(PC Adapter Direct)
SIEMENS S7-300/400(MPI Direct)
Profibus Slave
SIEMENS S7-400 Ethernet(TCP Slave)
S7-1200
489
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Thinget
XC3-32R-E
Modbus RTU
Thinget Controller
Trio
Euro
Trio
Modbus RTU Extend
Vigor
VH series PLC/ VB0 series PLC
Yaskawa
V Inverter
MP Series
Yaskawa MP2300
Yaskawa Ethernet(UDP Slave)
∑Ⅱ/∑Ⅱ Plus Servo
Yokogawa
FA-M3
Yokogawa FA-M3
Yokogawa FA-M3 Ethernet(TCP Slave)
YuDian
AI Series PLC
490
Appendix 2 List of Error Information
No.
Error information
Description
Compilation failed! No compiled PKG files are
Macro code or other reasons result in compilation failing，
generated!
no compiled PKG files are generated.
Warning: Init. Start Window does not exist, the
The initial start picture saved in the original project possibly
software will add the default Init. Start Window
has been lost, the system will automatically replace it with
automatically!
Kinco initial start picture.
Logo's size is too big, please adjust it! Logo's
The bitmap imported for Initial Start Window is bigger than
size is out of limit: Width*Height > 2097152
the software restriction.
4
Logo file error!
HMI0.lg file went wrong.
5
HMI%s logo compile failed!
6
Current HMI can not support this component!
1
2
3
7
9
Unable to parse file, import failed!
12
13
14
15
16
17
The current HMI does not support the component.
it?
Unable to write file, export failed!
11
picture used by logo does not exist.
Export file already exist, do you want to replace
8
10
HMI0.lg corresponding to Logo does not exist, or the
The same file is exported to the same path repeatedly.
The exported file name is possibly illegal.
The file to import does not exist or the file format is
discrepant.
The project is existed in your selected content,
The new project is of the same name with the already
replace the old one?
existing project in the path.
Project
has been
opened, can
not open
repeatedly!
Kinco HMIware cannot open one project repeatedly.
The new version project can not be opened by
Software of low version cannot open the project edited by
the old version software! Please update your
new version software. The software is upward compatible,
software!
please use the new version software.
Can not save project. Please check the following
The project is set to read only and cannot be modified and
files permission!
saved again.
Save project error, please resume you project
The project saved last time will be backupped automatically
from \"temp\" directory in your project directory!
in the \"temp\" directory.
The project had been modified, please save and
After modifying, the project should be saved and compiled
compile first!
again.
Can not find compiled file, please compile first!
PKG file is wrong or lost.
A same name project already exists in this folder,
please select another folder!
Projects of the same name cannot be saved in the same path.
491
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
18
Software was closed abnormally last time,
whether restore the unsaved project?
The
19
project
is
created
by
old
Prompt when reopen the project after abnormal close.
version
software .Do you want to backup and update the
Prompt for backuping when use high version software to
project now?\n\nWarning:the updated project can
open the project edited by low version software.
not be opened by old version software!
20
System default window, unable to delete!
21
Rename variable error!
22
Project incompleted!
23
24
25
26
27
Frame0~9 are the system default windows, cannot be
deleted.
The variable names possibly include “？”, “、”, “/” and such
illegal characters.
There are only serial port cables or PLCs in the Construct
Window.
Project error: some HMIs, PLCs or connectors
HMIs, PLCs and communication cables do not be
are not be connected!
connected properly in the Construct Window.
After delete, all related pictures will lost and can
not be recovered! Do you want to continue?
When delete the HMIs in the Construct Window, all the
configuration pictures will be deleted and cannot be
recovered, please be cautious with this operation.
After delete, all related register address for the
When delete PLCs, all the registers related with PLC will be
plc items will be set default value and can not be
changed to HMI default registers, and cannot be recovered,
recovered! Do you want to continue?
please be cautious with this operation.
If remove all, all objects will be deleted and can
Prompts of 【Delete all】in the attribute box of BUS, events,
not be recovered! Do you want to continue?
alarms, text libraries, address labels, PLC control.
After replace, some parts of the HMI will change
When replacing HMI models, the different screen sizes will
position, size or colour, and can not be
lead
recovered! Do you want to continue?
automatically in the configuration project.
to
some
components’
attributes
be
adjusted
When replacing HMI, some components not supported by
28
Element or the special function of the element. It
the new HMI will be automatically deleted due to different
has been deleted!
hardware, for example Video, Historical Event Display and
such components.
Project contains some HMIs which are not
The discontinued HMI models have been deleted in the
supported by current version software. These
configuration software of higher version, the discontinued
HMIs had been auto updated to some available
HMI model will be replaced automatically when open the
HMIs:\n\n
project edited by low version software.
30
Error: address cross-border
The addresses exceed the allowed range.
31
Error: address format error
The address format does not match with the actual format of
29
492
Appendix 2 List of Error Information
Error: address input error
component, possibly decimal number is written to octonary
system, or entered characters are illegal.
Address type not supported by the driver protocols is used
32
Invalid address type!
33
The files are damaged or deleted, can not play!
Audio files faulted.
Load system word library error!/ Vector font files
If the font library used in the project does not exist in the
used in project does not exist, please close the
computer, then song typeface will be taken as default when
project, install the missing font files
opening the project.
34
35
36
37
38
Copy error: the destination window ID already
exists!
windows
or
projects, the
component size should be smaller than target window.
Audio file imported into audio library should be less than
can not be added to sound library!
256k.
The fieldbus device is already defined, do you
If a fieldbus or network device is already defined in HMI, it
want to replace it?/ Network device is already
will prompt when you add the same fieldbus or network
defined,do you want to replace it?
device again.
40
The Invalid Path!/ The Invalid ProjectName!
Prompt when the same protocol is added repeatedly in the
same fieldbus device.
Prompt when saving project as or opening project but there
is no path or project name checked.
Bottom Window Error: the frame can not be used
as both parent window and bottom window!
Two windows cannot be used as mutual bottom window.
Window size settings failed, please adjust parts
The width and height values of the modified window should
position first, then reset the windows size!
be bigger than its coordinate values.
Image of GIF/PNG format or with alpha channel
43
component across
The size of File %s is larger than 256K, the file
Only one protocal can be defined in a device!
42
Source windows cannot be copied to the existing windows.
Copy
Size too large, can not be pasted!
39
41
in the project.
do not support the additional transparent color
treatment!
In picture editing window, transparent color treatment is
invalid for image of GIF/PNG format or with alpha channel.
Error: Please select at least one display
【Conditional display】of component is chosen，but no
condition!
display condition is checked and click【OK】.
Part size error: Width and height of part can not
The width and height values should both be bigger than 1
less than 1!
when modifying component size.
46
Error: The content cannot be empty!
When static text is used, it must not be empty.
47
Error: Text size must less than screen size!
44
45
The input content of static text is too long and exceeds the
screen size.
493
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Same item exists in the text library, whether or
Prompt when import text library and there is item of the
not to replace?
same name already existed.
The Fonts are too big that exceed the display area of the
Error: Text size must less than screen size!
components and windows.
The HMI does not support the HistoryDataDisp
KW5300T/KM5303T/KG5509T/KG5300T do not support
components!
historical data display.
MT4220TE/4414TE/4424/4522/4523/4620TE are equipped
HMI cannot support USB2!
with only one USB host.
IP address is already defined, please check it/ IP
address conflict, please check it!
When there are multiple HMIs in the configuration and
network communication protocol is used to network, the IP
addresses cannot repeat.
The station NO. is already defined, please check
When adding new PLC, there is the same station no. already
it!
existing in the same protocol.
The window id is incorrect or the window exists,
The number for the new frame is illegal or the number is
please input another id!
already existed.
The current screen does not support the property
of sound !
The hmi %s dosn't support the property of Save
screen shots to extend memory!
The target HMI does not support audio.
The target HMI does not support external storage devices.
57
Failed to open file
File error when uploading.
58
Cannot open Serial Port
Serial port may be occupied already.
59
Open usb handel fail
USB cable is not connected or the USB port is broken, or
the USB driver is not installed successfully.
Errors appear during downloading, so data received by HMI
60
Send data error/read data error/Data checkSum
is inconsistent with data sent by upper machine, please
error/file checksum fail
unplug the communication cable between HMI and PLC,
restart HMI and try again.
61
Recipe file size error
62
No download option was be selected
63
Unsupport HMI, download failed!
64
Recipe size is larger than HMI recipe registers.
Click the【Download】button when no download option is
chosen in
The model of the HMI is not supported by the used
software, high version software should be used.
Please use method of big BMP zipped or
simplify configuration project
KHDownload dialog box.
The project is too large to be downloaded, please check
whether lots of bitmaps or vector fonts are used in the
project and simplify the project and download again.
494
Appendix 2 List of Error Information
65
create file fail
66
Save file fail
67
Upload
password
Cannot download to external storage device, possibly there
are illegal characters included in the file name.
Prompt when download to external storage device and the
memory is insufficient.
must
contain
nonzero
The password cannot be zero when setting upload password
character!
in【HMI Attribute】page.
68
Invalid Password, please Input Password again!
Upload password entry failure.
69
password checksum fail
Prohibiting upload is set in the target HMI program.
70
Invalid Password. Project cannot be opened!
71
password error, please reset system and try again
After the project is encrypted, password input is wrong
when open project.
Password for decompilation is input wrong repeatedly.
Data package lost when uploading file, please unplug the
72
Failed to upload file
communication cable between HMI and PLC, restart HMI
and try again.
73
Click【Decompile】button when no PKG file or target
No select decompile PKG file
project for decomilation is chosen.
Number of PKG Files wrong ， can not
74
decompile!/ PKG file is not generated by the
same project and same build, can not decompile!
75
76
77
78
79
80
When multiple HMIs are networked, decompilation is not
supported.
PKG file does not allow decompile!
Prohibit decompiling is set in the【HMI Attributes】page.
PKG file edited by configuration software
Only the PKG files edited by software version higher than
version lower than1.2.3.0 cannot be decompiled!
version 1.2.3.0 can be decompiled.
Another decompile process has not ended, please
Prompt when starting a new decompilation while there is a
closed it first!
decompilation in process.
Target project file cannot be saved in the same directory
A same directory exists, delete it and continue?
with the original PKG file.
Online Simulation overtime and Program is end,
Maximum duration for direct online simulation is 15
if want, Please Simulate again
minutes, after the time run out users need to simulate again.
An instance of software already exists, please
close it first!
Only one simulation process can be executed at one time.
495
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
Appendix 3 List of System Prompt Message
Edit/Mask
Mask address
Prompt message
Description
Allow
LW.B9296.0
[0]System Error
System error (Possibly file system fault)
mask/edit
LW.B9296.1
[1]PLC Response Error
Communication with PLC error, possibly the
selected driver protocol do not support the current
connected PLC (Read/write error)
LW.B9296.2
[2]PLC No Response :xx-xx-x
PLC no response：xx-xx-x（HMI No.-PLC station
No. –Port No.）
（Communication with PLC fail,
please check communication cable and whether
the communication parameters of PLC AND HMI
are consistent)
LW.B9296.4
[4]Socket Connect Error
Connect to server failed. (Connect to local or
remote server failed. Usually network
communication faulted or PLC driver faulted, very
occasionally may communication cable of PLC
fault)
LW.B9296.5
[5]Socket COMM Error
Communication with server error
LW.B9296.6
[6]MacroCode Error:xxxx
Macro code xxxx execution error (Check marco
code, possibly there are memory access
cross-border or dividing by zero errors in marco
code)
LW.B9296.7
[7]Print Error
Print error (communication with printer error.
Please check printer connection, make sure that
whether the current printer is supported by
selected printer protocol)
LW.B9296.8
[8]Send Package Error
Send network massage failed.
LW.B9296.9
[9]Memory Shortage
Run out of memory (Possibly open two many
popup windows or components occupying too
much resources, check whether use too many
popup windows, direct windows, indirect
windows, trend curves, oscillograghs, XY plots,
alarms and events in project)
LW.B9296.A
[10]BCD Transform Overflow
BCD conversion outflow. Check whether BCD
settings of component are correct.
496
System Parameters
LW.B9296.B
[11]MacroCode Timeout:xxxx
Marco code xxxx executing timeout (Macro
execution time is too long or there is an endless
loop)
LW.B9296.E
[14]RW Access Overflow
Recipe memory access cross-border（The accessed
recipe address is beyond current allowable range
of HMI）
LW.B9296.F
[15]Waiting to Print
Waiting for printing. Printing dada is under
processing (This is a normal prompt during
printing)
LW.B9297.0
[16]Servo Not Ready
Server data is not ready (possibly server error), or
possibly firmware error or PLC driver error.
LW.B9297.2
[18]Transmit Data Failed
Data transmission failed.
LW.B9297.3
[19]Data Input Failed
Number input failed, the input value exceeds the
minimum/maximum values of number input
component.
LW.B9297.4
[20]Device Error
Device fault (Access to input/output devices error,
possibly file system or firmware fault)
LW.B9297.5
[21]Copying File ...
File is in copy (This is a normal prompt during
project export or screen shoot)
LW.B9297.6
[22]Copy File Failed
File copy failed (Project export or screen shoot
fail)
LW.B9297.7
[23]Invalid File
Import file is invalid（Filename invalid）
LW.B9297.8
[24]Password Error
Input password wrong
LW.B9297.9
[25]SD Card Full
SD card is full
LW.B9297.A
[26]USB Disk1 Full
U disk 1 is full
LW.B9297.B
[27]USB Disk2 Full
U disk 2 is full
LW.B9298.0
[32]RTC Device Error
RTC clock fault (possibly RTC chip fault)
LW.B9298.2
[34]Invalid UserName
Invalid user name (The input user name is invalid
when login or add/delete user)
LW.B9298.3
[35]Operation Complete
Prompt of operation success (This is normal
prompt during printing when adding/deleting user
or modifying password)
Do not allow
edit/mask
No
DOWNLOAD/SIM MODE
Enter download mode
corresponding
STRAIGHT MODE
Enter straight mode
mask bits
SIMULATION MODE
Enter indirect online simulation mode
497
Kinco HMIware Configuration Edit Software
LOAD PKG OK!
Project download success.
LOAD PKG ERROR!
Project download fail.
TP adjust success!
Touch screen calibration success.
TP adjust fail, try again!
Touch screen calibration fail, calibrate again.
DOWNLOAD/SIM MODE
There is no project in HMI, download project
User Data invalid, please
again.
redownload!
Kinco HMIware version too low!
The software version is too low, please use the
Please compile with new version!
newest version, compile and download project
again.
System Crash
HMI system crash, possibly project is too large or
firmware error.
498